Thanks to visit codestin.com
Credit goes to www.scribd.com

0% found this document useful (0 votes)
30 views784 pages

0452 PP With Ms

Uploaded by

ninaabraham500
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
30 views784 pages

0452 PP With Ms

Uploaded by

ninaabraham500
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 784

Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice February/March 2022
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*5211423493*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB22 03_0452_12/4RP
© UCLES 2022 [Turn over
2

1 What is prepared by a book-keeper?

A appropriation account
B cash book
C income statement
D statement of financial position

2 Which item is an asset?

A an amount owing by credit customers


B an amount owing to credit suppliers
C interest accrued on bank loan
D rent received in advance from tenant

3 Fatima required additional finance for her business and borrowed funds from Ali. This was
deposited into the business bank account.

How should Fatima record this?

account to be debited account to be credited

A bank Ali (loan)


B bank Ali (trade payable)
C Ali (loan) bank
D Ali (trade payable) bank

4 On 1 March, a business owed its suppliers $9500. During March, the following transactions took
place.

goods purchased on credit 10 000


goods returned to suppliers 200
cheques paid to suppliers 8 900
cash discounts received 100

How much did the business owe its suppliers on 31 March?

A $800 B $1000 C $10 300 D $10 500

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22


3

5 Which document from a supplier reduces the amount owed by a customer?

A credit note
B debit note
C invoice
D statement of account

6 What is recorded in a petty cash book?

A all cash transactions


B cash purchases and expenses only
C purchases of all small value items
D small cash transactions

7 Jacob settled the account of Ahmed, a credit supplier. He made the following entries on the credit
side of his cash book.

discount cash bank


$ $ $

Ahmed 5 195

Which entries did Jacob make on the debit side of Ahmed’s account?

A bank 195
B bank 200

C bank 195
discount allowed 5
D bank 195
discount received 5

8 The total of the debit column of a trial balance was more than the total of the credit column.

One account balance had been entered in the wrong column.

Which one was it?

A cash
B discount received
C drawings
D irrecoverable debts

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22 [Turn over


4

9 Davi prepared the following journal entry to correct an error.

debit credit
$ $

Samir 40
Samuel 40

Which error was being corrected?

A Cash paid to Samir had been credited to Samuel.


B Cash received from Samuel had been debited to Samir.
C Goods bought from Samir had been credited to Samuel.
D Goods sold to Samir had been debited to Samuel.

10 A suspense account was opened with a credit balance of $840.

Which error caused this?

A A cheque for $420 received from a customer was debited to his account.
B Discounts allowed, $420, was debited twice in the discounts allowed account.
C Goods costing $420, taken by the owner of the business for own use, were credited to his
drawings account.
D Rent received, $420, was credited twice in the rent receivable account.

11 A trader calculated her profit for the year at $14 800. The following errors were then discovered.

No entry had been made for $200 wages accrued.


The insurance expense included a prepayment of $90.

What is the correct profit for the year?

A $14 510 B $14 690 C $14 910 D $15 090

12 Jack’s cash book showed an overdrawn balance at bank of $2600. Comparing the cash book
with the bank statement, it was discovered that direct debits of $200 had not yet been recorded
by Jack. He then updated his cash book.

What was the bank balance in Jack’s updated cash book?

A $2400 credit
B $2400 debit
C $2800 credit
D $2800 debit

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22


5

13 Which item is debited in a sales ledger control account?

A cash discount
B contra entry
C interest on overdue account
D provision for doubtful debts

14 Leroy provided the following information for May.

May 1 balance owing to credit suppliers 420


31 credit purchases 590
returns to credit suppliers 110
cheques paid to credit suppliers 291
discount received from credit suppliers 9
interest charged by a credit supplier 5

What was the balance on his purchases ledger control account on 1 June?

A $595 B $605 C $613 D $623

15 Which item should be treated as capital expenditure?

A the annual depreciation on office premises


B the cost of building an office extension
C the cost of repairing office equipment
D the purchase of a new computer for resale

16 On the last day of the financial year, Khalid purchased office fittings, $900. This was incorrectly
recorded as office expenses, $90.

Khalid does not charge depreciation in the year of purchase.

What was the effect on the profit for the year?

A overstated by $810
B overstated by $990
C understated by $90
D understated by $900

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22 [Turn over


6

17 Aggie is a trader. She uses the following methods of depreciation for different types of
non-current asset.

straight-line at 20% per annum


reducing balance at 25% per annum
revaluation

On 1 January year 1, Aggie purchased small items of equipment costing a total of $2400 and
fittings costing $8000.

On 31 December year 2, Aggie estimated that the equipment was worth 70% of its original cost.

The statement of financial position showed the net book value of equipment as $1680 and fittings
as $4800.

Which depreciation methods has Aggie used?

equipment fittings

A reducing balance straight-line


B revaluation reducing balance
C revaluation straight-line
D straight-line revaluation

18 Abeo prepares financial statements to 31 December each year.

Abeo bought machinery for $40 000 on 1 January year 1. He charges depreciation on machinery
at 20% per annum using the reducing balance method. Depreciation is charged in the year of
purchase but not in the year of disposal.

On 1 January year 3, the machinery was sold for $22 000.

Which journal entry records the profit or loss on disposal of the machine?

debit credit
$ $

A disposal of machinery 2000


income statement 2000
B disposal of machinery 3600
income statement 3600
C income statement 2000
disposal of machinery 2000
D income statement 3600
disposal of machinery 3600

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22


7

19 Why would a business record the amount owing by a credit customer as an irrecoverable debt?

A The customer has gone out of business.


B The customer has liquidity problems.
C The customer is making a loss.
D The customer is not satisfied with the goods.

20 Anji maintains a provision for doubtful debts at 5% of the trade receivables at the end of each
financial year. At the start of the financial year, the trade receivables were $2000. At the end of
the financial year, the trade receivables were $4500.

Which entry would be made in the income statement for the financial year?

A $125 as an expense
B $125 as an income
C $325 as an expense
D $325 as an income

21 Which businesses do not prepare a trading account section of an income statement?

1 furniture store
2 insurance company
3 newsagent
4 toy shop
5 window-cleaner

A 1 and 2 B 2 and 5 C 3 and 4 D 3 and 5

22 A business provided the following information.

current assets 25 000


current liabilities 12 000
non-current assets 18 000
non-current liabilities 21 000

What was the capital of the business?

A $10 000 B $22 000 C $31 000 D $43 000

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22 [Turn over


8

23 A trader bought a machine for use in the business. He paid a part of the cost in cash and agreed
to pay the remaining part in 15 months’ time.

In addition to the non-current assets, which items in the statement of financial position will
increase as a result of this transaction?

current current non-current


assets liabilities liabilities

A   
B   
C   
D   

24 What is the purpose of a partnership appropriation account?

A to calculate partners’ salaries


B to record partners’ drawings
C to show the distribution of profits between partners
D to show the movement on partners’ capital accounts

25 James is a partner in a business. He made a loan to the business and received loan interest.

What is the double entry in the books of the partnership for the loan interest James has received?

debit credit

A bank account James current account


B interest on loan account bank account
C interest on loan account James current account
D James current account bank account

26 A limited company whose capital consisted of ordinary shares ceased trading and was not able to
pay its debts.

Which statement is correct?

A Shareholders would have to pay a proportion of the debt based on the number of shares
owned.
B Shareholders would have to pay a proportion of the debt based on the value of shares
owned.
C Shareholders would have to sell their personal possessions to pay the debts of the company.
D Shareholders would lose the money that was paid when the shares were first purchased.

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22


9

27 A limited company was formed on 1 June 2021.

On that date, the company issued 500 000 $1 shares. Shareholders were asked to pay 60% of
the cost immediately, with the remainder being payable by 1 June 2022.

By 1 August 2021, all shareholders had paid what was due at that date.

What was the share capital of the company on 1 August 2021?

called-up capital paid-up capital


$ $

A 200 000 300 000


B 300 000 300 000
C 500 000 300 000
D 500 000 500 000

28 There are 120 members of a sports club. The annual subscription is $60.

At the beginning of the year, no members had paid in advance and no members had
subscriptions outstanding.

At the end of the year, 7 members had not paid and 3 members had paid in advance.

Which amount was shown for subscriptions in the income and expenditure account?

A $6600 B $6960 C $7200 D $7800

29 What is shown in a manufacturing account?

1 cost of material consumed


2 purchases of finished goods
3 cost of production
4 cost of sales

A 1 and 2 only
B 1 and 3 only
C 1, 2 and 3 only
D 1, 2, 3 and 4

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22 [Turn over


10

30 Tarek produced a statement of affairs at 31 December year 1 and at 31 December year 2.

During year 2, his long-term loan increased by $3000 and his net current assets decreased by
$1000. Depreciation for the year was $500.

By how much did the total of Tarek’s capital decrease?

A $2500 B $3500 C $4000 D $4500

31 Wayne provided the following information.

$ $

revenue 12 800
opening inventory 1 000
purchases 10 500
11 500
closing inventory 1 600 9 900
gross profit 2 900

What was Wayne’s gross profit margin?

A 22.66% B 25.22% C 27.62% D 29.29%

32 A trader provided the following information for the year ended 31 December.

total cash and credit purchases of goods for re-sale 150 000
cash purchases of goods for re-sale 17 000
credit purchases of non-current assets 25 000

His trade payables at that date were $8000.

What was the trade payables turnover?

A 17 days
B 20 days
C 22 days
D 24 days

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22


11

33 A trader decided to reduce her level of inventory in order to reduce the storage costs.

Sales quantity and selling price were not affected.

How did this affect profit for the year and the rate of inventory turnover?

profit for rate of inventory


the year turnover

A decreased decreased
B decreased increased
C increased decreased
D increased increased

34 Azim and Bashir are both sole traders. They provided the following information.

Azim Bashir
$ $

profit for the year ended 31 December before interest 17 200 15 000
long-term loan at 31 December – 12 500
capital at 31 December 86 000 25 000

What was Azim’s return on capital employed?

A double Bashir’s
B half of Bashir’s
C one-third of Bashir’s
D three times Bashir’s

35 Stephanie’s major competitor has invested in a new machine for making goods more cheaply.
Stephanie knows this will affect her sales but did not record this in her accounting records.

Which accounting principle is Stephanie applying?

A going concern
B materiality
C money measurement
D prudence

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2022 0452/12/F/M/22


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 12 February/March 2022
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the February/March 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2022 [Turn over


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 B 1

2 A 1

3 A 1

4 C 1

5 A 1

6 D 1

7 D 1

8 B 1

9 D 1

10 A 1

11 B 1

12 C 1

13 C 1

14 B 1

15 B 1

16 C 1

17 C 1

18 D 1

19 A 1

20 A 1

21 B 1

22 A 1

23 D 1

24 C 1

25 B 1

26 D 1

27 B 1

28 C 1

© UCLES 2022 Page 2 of 3


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 B 1

30 D 1

31 A 1

32 C 1

33 D 1

34 B 1

35 C 1

© UCLES 2022 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 7 4 6 4 4 0 5 0 0 3 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper February/March 2022

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (CJ) 303841/3
© UCLES 2022 [Turn over
2

1 Nazmeen started in business as a hairdresser on 1 January 2022. She purchases her hairdressing
supplies on credit and uses the imprest system for her petty cash.

Nazmeen’s assets and liabilities at 1 January 2022 were as follows:


$
Motor vehicle 11 000
Balance at bank 2 300
Petty cash 200
Bank loan 2 500

REQUIRED

(a) (i) Prepare the general journal entry to record the opening assets and liabilities at
1 January 2022. A narrative is required.

Nazmeen
General journal

Date Details $ $

................... ................................................................. ................... ...................

................... ................................................................. ................... ...................

................... ................................................................. ................... ...................

................... ................................................................. ................... ...................

................... ................................................................. ................... ...................

................... ................................................................. ................... ...................

[4]

(ii) State one other use of the general journal.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Nazmeen makes all payments of less than $100 by petty cash. The imprest amount, which is
$200, is restored on the first day of each month from the bank account.

Nazmeen provided the following information for January 2022.

January 3 Paid for petrol, $35.


8 Paid for magazines for the reception area, $14.
17 Paid $60 to GL Limited, a trade payable.
26 Paid for vehicle cleaning, $9.
29 Paid $38 to Alim, a trade payable.

REQUIRED

(b) (i) Complete Nazmeen’s petty cash book on the following page.
Balance the petty cash book, bring down the balance on 1 February 2022 and restore
the imprest.
© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22
Nazmeen
Petty Cash Book
Total Date Details Total Motor Sundry Ledger

© UCLES 2022
received paid expenses expenses accounts
$ $ $ $
$
2022

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................


3

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

0452/22/F/M/22
...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

[10]

[Turn over
4

(ii) State one advantage of using the imprest system for petty cash.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Nazmeen receives business documents from her credit suppliers.

REQUIRED

(c) Complete the table below by placing a tick (3) to indicate which document(s) each item
appears on. The first one is completed for you.

Invoice Credit note Statement


of account
A credit purchase 3 3
The balance owing by Nazmeen to a
supplier at the end of the month
A purchases return
Trade discount deducted from list price
Payment made to a credit supplier
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


5

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22 [Turn over


6

2 Ravi is a trader. He provided the following information.

2021 $
1 February Sales ledger control account debit balance 12 510
Sales ledger control account credit balance 1 245
2022
31 January Totals for the year:
Credit sales 134 000
Cash sales 4 625
Bank transfers received from credit customers 96 250
Cash received from credit customers 12 890
Returns from credit customers 4 000
Irrecoverable debts written off 9 100
Contra entries 1 677
Discount allowed 4 643
Discount received 2 119
Interest charged on overdue sales ledger accounts 1 104

Sales ledger control account debit balance ?


Sales ledger control account credit balance nil

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Ravi’s sales ledger control account for the year ended 31 January 2022.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 February 2022.

Ravi
Sales ledger control account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

[10]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


7

(b) State the accounting principle which is being applied when irrecoverable debts are written off.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Explain why the following interested parties want to know the level of Ravi’s trade receivables.

(i) Bank manager

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Trade payables

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

Ravi sends out statements of account to credit customers and charges interest on overdue
accounts. He is concerned about the loss caused to his business by irrecoverable debts. He is
considering employing a part-time credit controller to contact credit customers by telephone and
to start legal action on overdue accounts if necessary. The credit controller would be paid $6800
per annum.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Ravi whether or not he should employ the credit controller. Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22 [Turn over


8

3 Pari owns a clothing factory. Her year end is 31 December.

At 31 December 2021, her ledger account balances included the following.

$
Inventory at 1 January 2021
Raw materials 6 100
Work in progress 9 420
Finished goods 11 350
Revenue 230 020
Purchases of raw materials 84 200
Wages
Factory operatives 33 000
Factory supervisor 26 000
Office and sales staff 45 000
Rates and insurance 14 000
General factory expenses 11 500
Factory equipment – at cost 100 000
Factory equipment – provision for depreciation 36 000

Additional information

1. Inventory at 31 December 2021


Raw materials 6 840
Work in progress 9 885
Finished goods 12 630

2. Rates and insurance are to be apportioned equally between the factory and the office.

3. At 31 December 2021, general factory expenses of $500 were unpaid.

4. Factory equipment is depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing balance method.

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


9

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Pari’s manufacturing account for the year ended 31 December 2021.

Pari
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 December 2021
$ $

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

[9]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22 [Turn over


10

(b) Prepare Pari’s income statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2021.

Pari
Income Statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2021
$ $

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

[4]

(c) Calculate Pari’s gross margin. Your answer should be correct to two decimal places.

Gross margin
working answer

[2]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


11

Pari is disappointed in her cost of production and gross profit. She is considering buying in her
products instead of producing them in her factory.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Pari whether or not she should start to buy in her products. Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22 [Turn over


12

4 Demis is a trader. His financial year ends on 31 December.


He prepared the following trial balance which contains errors.

Demis
Trial balance at 31 December 2021
Debit Credit

$ $

Sales 90 052
Purchases 52 420
Purchases 52 420
Rates and insurance 11 500
General expenses 1 092
Property 92 500
Fixtures at cost 34 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures 21 760
Trade receivables 7 410
Trade payables 4 665
Inventory 9 600
Cash at bank 8 095
Capital at 1 January 2021 109 940
Drawings 11 320
Suspense 60 770
283 772 283 772

Additional information

1. There was $80 in the petty cash box at 31 December 2021.

2. The value of inventory on 31 December 2021 was included in the trial balance.
The inventory valuation had increased by 20% since 31 December 2020.

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


13

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare a corrected trial balance at 31 December 2021.

Demis
Corrected Trial Balance at 31 December 2021
Debit Credit
$ $

Sales ............................. .............................

Purchases ............................. .............................

Rates and insurance ............................. .............................

General expenses ............................. .............................

Property ............................. .............................

Fixtures at cost ............................. .............................

Provision for depreciation of fixtures ............................. .............................

Trade receivables ............................. .............................

Trade payables ............................. .............................

Inventory ............................. .............................

Cash at bank ............................. .............................

Capital at 1 January 2021 ............................. .............................

Drawings ............................. .............................

............................................... ............................. .............................

______________ ______________

______________ ______________

[6]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22 [Turn over


14

Demis has received a bank statement which shows that there were unpresented cheques of $437
at 31 December 2021. There were no outstanding lodgements.

REQUIRED

(b) Calculate the bank balance shown on the bank statement at 31 December 2021. Indicate
whether this balance is a debit or a credit balance.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

Demis later discovered the following errors.

1 Drawings of goods for own use, $317, had been omitted from the books of account.

2 Purchases returns, $93, had been credited to the sales account.

3 A payment for property insurance, $500, had been debited to the property account.

4 A credit purchase, $315, from Erin, had been recorded as $135.

5 A credit sale, $191, to Harvinder, had been debited to the sales account and credited to
Harvinder’s account.

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


15

REQUIRED

(c) Complete the following table to show the entries required to correct each error.

Entries required to correct the error


Error Debit Credit
Account $ Account $

1. Drawings of goods for own use,


$317, had been omitted from the
books of account. ................... .............. ................... ..............

2. Purchases returns, $93, had been


credited to the sales account. ................... .............. ................... ..............

3. A payment for property insurance,


$500, had been debited to the
property account. ................... .............. ................... ..............

4. A credit purchase, $315, from


Erin, had been recorded as $135. ................... .............. ................... ..............

5. A credit sale, $191, to Harvinder,


had been debited to the
sales account and credited to
Harvinder’s account. ................... .............. ................... ..............

[10]

(d) Identify the following error types from the table above.

(i) error 2

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) error 4

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22 [Turn over


16

5 Priti and Paisley are in partnership renting out properties. Paisley manages the office and
maintains the bookkeeping records for the partnership.

The partnership agreement provides for

Interest on drawings 5% per annum


Interest on capital 4% per annum
Salary to Paisley $6000 per annum
Residual profits and losses to be shared 75% to Priti and 25% to Paisley.

The partners provided the following list of balances.

$
Capital accounts at 1 February 2021
Priti 100 000
Paisley 20 000
Current accounts at 1 February 2021
Priti 7 932 credit
Paisley 2 350 credit
Drawings for the year ended 31 January 2022
Priti 15 000
Paisley 13 000

The profit for the year ended 31 January 2022 was $33 100.

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


17

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the appropriation account for Priti and Paisley for the year ended 31 January 2022.

Priti and Paisley


Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 January 2022
$ $

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

................................................................................................ ................... ...................

[6]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22 [Turn over


18

(b) Prepare Paisley’s current account for the year ended 31 January 2022. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 February 2022.

Paisley
Current account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

............. .................................. ............. ............. .................................. .............

[6]

(c) Suggest three reasons why Paisley may not be satisfied with his overall share of the profit for
the year to 31 January 2022.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

3 ................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


19

Priti and Paisley are planning to purchase more properties to rent out. They are considering
forming a limited company as they believe this would make it easier for them to raise the finance
for the purchase of the properties.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Priti and Paisley whether or not they should form a limited company.
Justify your answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 February/March 2022
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the February/March 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 17 printed pages.

© UCLES 2022 [Turn over


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2022 Page 2 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2022 Page 3 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Social Science-Specific Marking Principles
(for point-based marking)

1 Components using point-based marking:


• Point marking is often used to reward knowledge, understanding and application of skills. We give credit where the candidate’s answer
shows relevant knowledge, understanding and application of skills in answering the question. We do not give credit where the answer
shows confusion.

From this it follows that we:

a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark
scheme requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)

2 Presentation of mark scheme:


• Slashes (/) or the word ‘or’ separate alternative ways of making the same point.
• Semi colons (;) bullet points (•) or figures in brackets (1) separate different points.
• Content in the answer column in brackets is for examiner information/context to clarify the marking but is not required to earn the mark
(except Accounting syllabuses where they indicate negative numbers).

© UCLES 2022 Page 4 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
3 Calculation questions:
• The mark scheme will show the steps in the most likely correct method(s), the mark for each step, the correct answer(s) and the mark
for each answer
• If working/explanation is considered essential for full credit, this will be indicated in the question paper and in the mark scheme. In all
other instances, the correct answer to a calculation should be given full credit, even if no supporting working is shown.
• Where the candidate uses a valid method which is not covered by the mark scheme, award equivalent marks for reaching equivalent
stages.
• Where an answer makes use of a candidate’s own incorrect figure from previous working, the ‘own figure rule’ applies: full marks will be
given if a correct and complete method is used. Further guidance will be included in the mark scheme where necessary and any
exceptions to this general principle will be noted.

4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners
who marked that paper.

© UCLES 2022 Page 5 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a)(i) Nazmeen 4
General Journal
Debit Credit
Date Details
$ $

2022
Jan 1 Motor vehicle 11 000 }
Bank 2 300 } (1)
Petty cash 200 }
Bank loan 2 500 (1)
Capital 11 000 (1)
13 500 13 500
Assets, liabilities and capital at this date (1)

1(a)(ii) Correction of errors (1) 1


Purchase/disposal of non-current assets on credit (1)
Transactions not recorded in another book of prime entry (1)
Transfers between accounts (1)
Writing off irrecoverable debts (1)
Creation of/adjustment to a provision for doubtful debts (1)
Recording depreciation (1)
Year-end transfers to income statement (1)

Max (1)
Accept other valid points

© UCLES 2022 Page 6 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(b)(i) Nazmeen 10
Petty Cash Book
Total Total Motor Sundry Ledger
received Date Details paid expenses expenses accounts
$ $ $ $ $

2022
200 Jan 1 Balance (1)
3 Petrol (1) 35 35
8 Magazines (1) 14 14
17 GL Limited (1) 60 60
26 Cleaning (1) 9 9
29 Alim (1) 38 38
156 44 14 98
31 Balance c/d 44
200 200

44 Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)OF


156 Bank (1)OF

+ (1) dates
(1)OF totalling analysis columns

1(b)(ii) Easier control of/check on petty cash expenditure (1) 1


There is a maximum amount which can be spent (1)
Theft/fraud is limited to the imprest amount (1)

Accept other valid points


Max (1)

© UCLES 2022 Page 7 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) 4
Invoice Credit note Statement of
account

A credit purchase  

The balance owing by Nazmeen to a  (1) row


supplier at the end of the month

A purchases return   (1) row

Trade discount deducted from list   (1) row


price

Payment made to a supplier  (1) row

© UCLES 2022 Page 8 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(a) Ravi 10
Sales ledger control account
Date Details $ Date Details $

2021 2021
Feb 1 Balance b/d 12 510* Feb 1 Balance b/d (1) both 1 245*
2022 2022
Jan 31 Sales (1) 134 000 Jan 31 Bank (1) 96 250
Interest charged (1) 1 104 Cash (1) 12 890
Sales returns (1) 4 000
Irrecoverable debts (1) 9 100
Contra entries (1) 1 677
Discount allowed (1) 4 643
Balance c/d 17 809
2022 147 614 147 614
Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 17 809
(1) *for both opening balances

2(b) Prudence (1) 1

2(c)(i) Bank manager 2


Level of trade receivables may influence bank’s decision (1)
If the bank believes trade receivables are too high may not wish to lend (1)
If trade receivables too high may not have adequate funds to repay loan/ bank overdraft/ interest
OR If trade receivables too low may have adequate funds to repay loan/ bank overdraft/ interest (1)

Max (2)
Accept other valid points

© UCLES 2022 Page 9 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c)(ii) Trade payables 2


Level of trade receivables may influence trade payable’s decision (1)
If trade payable believes trade receivables are insufficient may decide not to supply/not to continue to supply/supply on
cash terms only
OR If trade receivables are high may have adequate funds to pay trade payables (1)

Max (2)
Accept other valid points

2(d) Reasons for employing a credit controller 5


Should result in lower irrecoverable debts (1)
Should control the amount owed by trade receivables (1)
Payments from trade receivables likely to be received more quickly/ collection period decreases(1)
Ravi’s time would be freed up to carry out other business tasks (1)
The salary of the credit controller is less than the amount of irrecoverable debts (1)
Max (2)
Accept other valid points

Reasons for not employing a credit controller


Have to pay an annual salary (1)
Salary would be paid regardless of amount of debts recovered (1)
No guarantee that all debts will be collected (1)
Legal fees may be incurred for any legal action (1)
Damage relationship with customers/ may buy less/may buy from a different supplier/lose customer loyalty (1)
Could instead try to increase cash sales (1)
Max (2)
Accept other valid points

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2022 Page 10 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) Pari 9
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 December 2021

Cost of material consumed $ $


Opening inventory of raw materials 6 100
Purchases of raw materials 84 200
90 300
Less Closing inventory of raw materials 6 840
83 460 (1)
Direct wages 33 000 (1)
Prime cost 116 460 (1)OF
Factory overheads
Wages of factory supervisor 26 000}
Rates and insurance (14 000 ÷ 2) 7 000}(1)
General expenses (11 500 + 500) 12 000 (1)
Depreciation of factory equipment
(100 000 – 36 000) x 20% 12 800 (1) 57 800
174 260 (1)OF
Add opening work-in-progress 9 420 *
183 680
Less closing work-in-progress 9 885*
Cost of production 173 795 (1)OF

*(1) for both inventories of work in progress

© UCLES 2022 Page 11 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Pari 4
Income Statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2021

$ $
Revenue 230 020
Cost of sales
Opening inventory of finished goods 11 350 *
Cost of production 173 795 (1)OF
185 145
Less Closing inventory of finished goods 12 630 * 172 515 (1)OF
Gross profit 57 505 (1)OF
*(1) for both inventories of finished goods

3(c) 100 2
Gross margin = 57 505 OF × } whole formula (1)OF = 25.00% (1)OF
230 020 1

© UCLES 2022 Page 12 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(d) 5
Advantages Disadvantages

May be cheaper to buy rather than to May be cheaper to make rather than to
make buy (1)
If could buy at lower cost than making If could make at lower cost than making
gross margin/gross profit would improve gross margin/gross profit would improve (1)
Would have more time for other business
functions e.g. marketing (1)
Accounting records would be simpler (1)
Cost of purchased finished goods may
increase in the future (1)
Depend on supplier for regular supplies (1)
Depend on supplier for quality (1)
Depend on supplier for required quantity (1)
May lose customer loyalty (1)
May be difficult to start production again
once stopped (1)

Advantages Max (2) Disadvantages Max (2)


Accept other valid points
Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2022 Page 13 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) Demis 6
Corrected Trial Balance at 31 December 2021

Debit Credit
$ $
Sales 90 052
Purchases 52 420 (1)
Rates and insurance 11 500
General expenses 1 092
Property 92 500
Fixtures at cost 34 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures 21 760
Trade receivables 7 410
Trade payables 4 665 (1)
Inventory 8 000 (2)CF
(1)OF
Cash at bank 8 095
Capital at 1 January 2021 109 940
Drawings 11 320
Petty cash 80 (1)
226 417 226 417

(1) matching CF totals

4(b) $ 2
Cash book balance 8 095 OF
Add unpresented cheques 437
Bank statement balance 8 532 (1) OF Credit (1)

© UCLES 2022 Page 14 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(c) 10
Error Entries required to correct the error

Debit Credit

Account $ Account $

1 Drawings of goods for own Drawings 317 (1) Purchases 317 (1)
use, $317, had been
omitted from the books of
account.

2 Purchases returns, $93, Sales 93 (1) Purchases 93 (1)


had been credited to the returns
sales account.

3 A payment for property Rates and 500 (1) Property 500 (1)
insurance, $500, had been insurance
debited to the property
account.

4 A credit purchase, $315, Purchases 180 (1) Erin 180 (1)


from Erin had been
recorded as $135.

5 A credit sale, $191, to Harvinder 382 (1) Sales 382 (1)


Harvinder, had been
debited to the sales
account and credited to
Harvinder’s account.

4(d)(i) Error of commission (1) 1

4(d)(ii) Error of original entry (1) 1

© UCLES 2022 Page 15 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) Priti and Paisley 6


Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 January 2022

$ $
Profit for the year 33 100
Add Interest on drawings Priti 750 (1)
Paisley 650 (1) 1 400
34 500
Less Interest on capital Priti 4 000 (1)
Paisley 800 (1)
4 800

Less Salary Paisley 6 000 (1) 10 800


23 700
Share of profit Priti 17 775 }(1)
Paisley 5 925 } OF 23 700

5(b) Paisley 6
Current account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2022 2021
Jan 31 Drawings (1) 13 000 Feb 1 Balance b/d 2 350
Interest on drawings (1)OF 650 2022
Balance c/d 1 425 Jan 31 Interest on capital (1)OF 800
Salary (1) 6 000
Profit share (1)OF 5 925
15 075 15 075
2022
Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 1 425

© UCLES 2022 Page 16 of 17


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(c) Is entitled to only one quarter of the residual profit (1) 3


His total profit share is significantly less than Priti’s (1)
May feel he is not getting adequate reward for his extra duties/responsibilities (1)
May be able to earn more as a manager elsewhere (1)
His total profit share is lower than his drawings for the year (1)

Accept other valid points


Max (3)

5(d) Advantages 5
Limited liability/ a company is a separate legal entity (1)
Can raise more finance (1)
More options for raising finance (1)
Different ways of raising finance are available ordinary/preference shares and debentures/loans (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Costly to establish (1)
More complex/regulated accounting required/have to publish accounts/more legal requirements (1)
May lose control of the business (1)
Decisions may take longer (1)
Dividends have to be paid to shareholders/have to share profit with shareholders (1)
Max (2)
Or other relevant disadvantages

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2022 Page 17 of 17


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*8805598337*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB21 11_0452_11/FP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Why does a trader calculate the profit of his business?

A to calculate the interest payable on a loan


B to calculate the provision for doubtful debts
C to know the total expenses of the business
D to know whether drawings are at a reasonable level

2 Hassan is a trader. During the financial year he took goods from the business for his own use.

How should he record this?

debit credit

A drawings inventory
B drawings purchases
C income statement inventory
D income statement purchases

3 Where are the accounts of credit suppliers maintained?

A purchases journal
B purchases ledger
C sales journal
D sales ledger

4 Which document does a trader issue to remind a credit customer that payment is due?

A credit note
B debit note
C receipt
D statement of account

5 What is a cheque counterfoil used for?

A to pay a cheque into the bank account


B to pay for goods purchased by cheque
C to record a cheque payment in the cash book
D to record a cheque received in the cash book

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21


3

6 Farouk sells goods on credit. A cheque from Khalid, a credit customer, was dishonoured by the
bank.

How should Farouk record this?

account to be debited account to be credited

A bank Khalid
B irrecoverable debts Khalid
C Khalid bank
D Khalid irrecoverable debts

7 Tumelo sells on credit. The terms of trade are listed.

list price: $200 per unit


credit period: 60 days
trade discount 15% if 10 units or more are purchased
cash discount 3% if the debt is paid within one month

A credit customer purchased 20 units and paid the debt within 15 days.

What was the total of the invoice?

A $3298 B $3400 C $3880 D $4000

8 Jane purchased goods and paid by credit transfer.

How should this be recorded in Jane’s accounting records?

account to account to
be debited be credited

A bank purchases
B purchases bank
C purchases trade payable
D trade payable purchases

9 What is shown in a trial balance?

A capital and profit on a particular date


B financial transactions for a particular period
C ledger balances on a particular date
D receipts and payments for a particular period

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21 [Turn over


4

10 At the end of each year, PT Limited transfers 20% of the profit for the year to the general reserve.

Draft financial statements were prepared for the year ended 30 September 2021. It was then
discovered that the inventory at 30 September 2021 had been overstated by $1500.

Which effects did the correction of this error have on retained earnings and general reserve at
30 September 2021?

retained earnings $ general reserve $

A decrease 300 increase 300


B decrease 1200 decrease 300
C increase 300 increase 1200
D increase 1500 no effect

11 The bank columns in a trader’s cash book and the bank statement both showed positive
balances. A comparison revealed the following differences.

uncredited cheque 200


bank charges not included in cash book 10

What was the difference between the balance shown in the bank column of the cash book and
that shown on the bank statement?

A The cash book balance was $190 higher than the bank statement balance.
B The cash book balance was $190 lower than the bank statement balance.
C The cash book balance was $210 higher than the bank statement balance.
D The cash book balance was $210 lower than the bank statement balance.

12 What is a reason for preparing a sales ledger control account?

A to calculate total sales revenue


B to ensure trade receivables pay on time
C to help prepare the income statement
D to summarise the accounts of the trade receivables

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21


5

13 Two companies each purchased a motor vehicle for $10 000 at the beginning of year 1. Company
G used the straight-line method of depreciation at a rate of 15% per annum, while Company H
used the reducing balance method at a rate of 20% per annum.

What was the difference in the depreciation charge between the two companies for year 2?

A $100 greater for G


B $100 greater for H
C $500 greater for G
D $500 greater for H

14 Amit’s financial year ends on 31 December. The following account appeared in his sales ledger.

Dipak account
2020 $ 2020 $

Jan 7 sales 3200 Jun 3 bank 1700


Oct 30 cash 230
Nov 21 ? 1270
3200 3200

What does the entry on 21 November represent?

A an irrecoverable debt
B discount allowed
C the balance carried down
D the recovery of a debt previously written off

15 Sally wished to increase the balance on the provision for doubtful debts account at the end of the
financial year.

How should this increase be recorded?

debit credit

A income statement provision for doubtful debts account


B irrecoverable debts account provision for doubtful debts account
C provision for doubtful debts account income statement
D provision for doubtful debts account irrecoverable debts account

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21 [Turn over


6

16 The following errors were found after a statement of financial position had been prepared.

1 A loan repayable in two year’s time had been included as a current liability.
2 A provision for doubtful debts should have been created.

What is the effect of correcting these errors?

current current non-current owner’s


assets liabilities liabilities equity

A decrease decrease increase decrease


B decrease increase decrease increase
C increase decrease decrease increase
D increase increase decrease decrease

17 John maintains a full set of accounting records.

Why does he also prepare a statement of financial position?

A to calculate the profit for the year


B to check if assets equal capital plus liabilities
C to show the transactions which took place during the year
D to summarise what the business owns and what it owes

18 What are advantages of operating as a sole trader?

1 The owner can keep all the profit.


2 The owner can raise finance by issuing debentures.
3 The owner can make decisions independently.
4 The owner is protected by limited liability.

A 1 and 3 B 1 only C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21


7

19 Anwar is a sole trader making annual profits of $24 000. He decides to admit Dilip as a partner.
They agree that Anwar would receive a salary, and profits and losses would be shared equally.

The forecast appropriation account for the partnership’s first year of trading is:

profit for the year 50 000


salary Anwar 10 000
profit available for distribution 40 000

By how much will Anwar’s total income increase?

A $1000 B $6000 C $16 000 D $26 000

20 Kasi and Ravi are in partnership. The financial statements for the year ended 31 August 2021
showed that Ravi was entitled to interest on capital and interest on loan and was charged interest
on drawings.

Which entries would be made in Ravi’s current account?

interest on capital interest on loan interest on drawings


debit credit debit credit debit credit

A   
B  
C   
D  

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21 [Turn over


8

21 BCD Limited provided the following information.

ordinary shares 300 000


retained earnings 200 000
debentures 170 000

How much was the equity and the capital employed?

equity capital employed


$ $

A 300 000 470 000


B 300 000 670 000
C 500 000 470 000
D 500 000 670 000

22 The issued share capital of CD Limited consists of ordinary shares.

Retained earnings were $86 000 on 1 September 2020 and $88 500 on 31 August 2021.

The company made a profit during the year of $26 000 and made a transfer to general reserve of
$5000.

What was the total ordinary share dividend paid during the year?

A $18 500 B $23 500 C $28 500 D $33 500

23 A sports club was formed on 1 August 2020. During the year ended 31 July 2021 the club
purchased equipment costing $5000, paying by cheque.

In which of the club’s financial statements did this appear?

receipts and payments income and expenditure statement of financial


account account position

A  
B  
C  
D 

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21


9

24 What is not part of the prime cost of a manufacturing business?

A raw material
B royalties
C wages of factory supervisors
D wages of production workers

25 The value of Thato’s work in progress increased during the year. This was recorded in his
financial statements.

How did this affect the cost of production and the cost of sales?

cost of
cost of sales
production

A decreased decreased
B decreased no effect
C increased increased
D increased no effect

26 What are advantages of keeping a full set of accounting records?

1 Financial statements will be free from errors.


2 It is impossible to make fraudulent entries.
3 More informed decision-making is possible.
4 The calculation of profit is more accurate.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

27 Beth provided the following information.

1 January 31 December
net assets $28 000 $24 000

Her drawings during the year amounted to $3000.

What was Beth’s profit or loss for the year?

A $1000 loss
B $1000 profit
C $7000 loss
D $7000 profit

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21 [Turn over


10

28 Roshan’s sales for his first year of trading were $55 000. His gross profit margin was 20%. The
closing inventory was $3200.

What were the purchases for the year?

A $41 250 B $44 000 C $44 450 D $47 200

29 Which information is required to calculate the return on capital employed for a sole trader?

A gross profit, non-current liabilities, owner’s capital


B gross profit, non-current liabilities, working capital
C operating profit for the year, non-current liabilities, owner’s capital
D operating profit for the year, non-current liabilities, working capital

30 What is the best indicator of the liquidity of a business?

A current ratio
B liquid (acid test) ratio
C return on capital employed
D working capital

31 A trader provided the following information for the year ended 31 May 2021.

trade payables on 1 June 2020 12 250


trade payables on 31 May 2021 42 000
credit purchases for the year 319 375

What was the trade payables turnover (days) for the year ended 31 May 2021?

A 31 days B 34 days C 48 days D 62 days

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21


11

32 A business provided the following information about its gross margin.

Year 1 40%
Year 2 38%
Year 3 35%

What could explain the changes in the gross margin?

A Cost of sales is decreasing.


B Expenses are decreasing.
C Quantity of goods sold is decreasing.
D Selling price is decreasing.

33 What is not a limitation of inter-firm comparison?

A Accounting records do not include the skills of the workforce.


B Businesses may have different accounting policies.
C Businesses may have different sales prices.
D The available information may not relate to a typical year.

34 Why would a supplier be interested in the financial statements of a credit customer?

A to know if the customer can pay what he owes


B to know the amount owed by trade receivables
C to know the profit for the year
D to know the value of the inventory

35 What does the objective of understandability assume users of financial statements will possess?

A a reasonable knowledge of accounting


B full knowledge of accounting
C knowledge of book-keeping but not accounting
D no knowledge of book-keeping or accounting

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/O/N/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2021

Question Answer Marks

1 D 1

2 B 1

3 B 1

4 D 1

5 C 1

6 C 1

7 B 1

8 B 1

9 C 1

10 B 1

11 C 1

12 D 1

13 B 1

14 A 1

15 A 1

16 A 1

17 D 1

18 A 1

19 B 1

20 C 1

21 D 1

22 A 1

23 B 1

24 C 1

25 A 1

26 D 1

27 A 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 3


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2021

Question Answer Marks

29 C 1

30 B 1

31 C 1

32 D 1

33 C 1

34 A 1

35 A 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*3561577926*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB21 11_0452_12/2RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Which statement is correct?

A The accountant prepares the trial balance and the book-keeper prepares the financial
statements.
B The accountant writes up the journals and the book-keeper writes up the ledger accounts.
C The book-keeper writes up the journals and the accountant prepares the trial balance.
D The book-keeper writes up the ledger accounts and the accountant prepares the financial
statements.

2 Which formulas may be used for the accounting equation?

1 assets = owner’s equity minus liabilities


2 liabilities = assets minus owner’s equity
3 owner’s equity = assets plus liabilities
4 owner’s equity plus liabilities = assets

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

3 Goods purchased on credit from Zamir were returned by Ashwin.

Which entries should Zamir make to record this?

account debited account credited

A Ashwin purchase returns


B purchase returns Zamir
C sales returns Ashwin
D Zamir sales returns

4 During her first financial year, a trader paid $1800 for insurance and $3200 for rent.

At the end of the financial year, she transferred insurance of $1500 and rent of $3600 to the
income statement.

What do the balances remaining on the accounts at the end of the financial year represent?

insurance account rent account

A accrued expense accrued expense


B accrued expense prepaid expense
C prepaid expense accrued expense
D prepaid expense prepaid expense

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21


3

5 Leah bought goods, $8000, less 15% trade discount. She later returned half of these goods as
they were faulty.

Which document did Leah issue to the supplier for the returned goods?

A credit note for $3400


B debit note for $3400
C credit note for $4000
D debit note for $4000

6 What is a cheque counterfoil used for?

A to make a credit entry in the bank column of a cash book


B to make a debit entry in the bank column of a cash book
C to send a payment to a supplier
D to send proof of payment to a customer

7 Farouk sells goods on credit. A cheque from Khalid, a credit customer, was dishonoured by the
bank.

How should Farouk record this?

account to be debited account to be credited

A bank Khalid
B irrecoverable debts Khalid
C Khalid bank
D Khalid irrecoverable debts

8 Why does a supplier offer trade discount?

A to avoid irrecoverable debts


B to encourage bulk buying
C to encourage payment in cash
D to reward prompt payment

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21 [Turn over


4

9 Ann maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system.

Which statement is not correct?

A A petty cash book can be maintained by a junior member of staff.

B At any time petty cash vouchers plus the petty cash balance are equal to the imprest
amount.
C The chief cashier is not asked continually for small sums of money.
D The number of entries in the cash book increases because of the large number of small cash
payments.

10 A sales invoice for $800 was incorrectly recorded in the sales journal as $1800.

How did this error affect the trial balance?

A The trial balance balanced but both totals were overstated by $1000.
B The trial balance balanced but both totals were understated by $1000.
C The trial balance did not balance because the credits were overstated by $1000.
D The trial balance did not balance because the debits were understated by $1000.

11 A standing order paid for rent has not been entered into the accounting records of a business.

Which statement is correct?

A Because the payment was made automatically, no additional entries are required in the
accounting records.
B Because the payment was made automatically, only an entry in the rent account is required.
C Entries are required in the cash book and in the bank reconciliation statement.
D Entries are required in the cash book and in the nominal (general) ledger.

12 The bank statement of a business had a credit balance of $2690 on 1 October 2021. At that date
cheques totalling $850 had not yet been presented for payment.

What was the bank balance in the cash book on 1 October 2021?

A $1840 credit
B $1840 debit
C $3540 credit
D $3540 debit

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21


5

13 A trader has purchased new business premises.

What are examples of capital expenditure?

1 cost of heating and lighting the new premises


2 cost of purchasing the new premises
3 legal costs of purchasing the new premises
4 office furniture purchased for use in the new premises

A 1 and 2 only B 1, 2 and 4 C 2, 3 and 4 D 3 and 4 only

14 Two companies each purchased a motor vehicle for $10 000 at the beginning of year 1. Company
G used the straight-line method of depreciation at a rate of 15% per annum, while Company H
used the reducing balance method at a rate of 20% per annum.

What was the difference in the depreciation charge between the two companies for year 2?

A $100 greater for G


B $100 greater for H
C $500 greater for G
D $500 greater for H

15 At the end of the financial year Mui had prepaid rent of $1500.

How should she record this?

A credit $1500 in the rent account and carry down as a credit balance
B credit $1500 in the rent account and carry down as a debit balance
C debit $1500 in the rent account and carry down as a credit balance
D debit $1500 in the rent account and carry down as a debit balance

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21 [Turn over


6

16 After preparing draft financial statements at the end of her first year of trading, Lucy discovered
two errors.

1 Damaged inventory had been valued at cost price, $340. It was expected to sell
for $180.
2 100 items which had been expected to sell for $12 each had been valued at their
cost price of $7 each. Carriage inwards of $1 for each item had not been included in
the cost.

What was the effect of these errors on the gross profit?

A overstated $60
B overstated $240
C understated $60
D understated $240

17 Which is an advantage and a disadvantage of operating as a sole trader?

advantage disadvantage

A gains all the profit bears all the risk


B gains all the profit controls the decision-making
C provides all the capital bears all the risk
D provides all the capital controls the decision-making

18 What is shown in the capital and liabilities section of a statement of financial position of a
business?

A how the resources are being used by the business


B the working capital of the business
C total amounts owed by and to the business
D where the resources of the business have come from

19 John maintains a full set of accounting records.

Why does he also prepare a statement of financial position?

A to calculate the profit for the year


B to check if assets equal capital plus liabilities
C to show the transactions which took place during the year
D to summarise what the business owns and what it owes

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21


7

20 A sole trader paid off the business’s overdraft using his own personal funds.

How did this affect the statement of financial position?

liabilities capital assets

A no effect increase increase


B decrease increase increase
C decrease increase no effect
D decrease no effect increase

21 Hassin found that he needed help to run his business. He decided to take a partner rather than
employ an assistant.

Why did he decide to take a partner?

1 An assistant would not interfere with how the shop was run.
2 An assistant would not share risk.
3 A partner would introduce some additional capital.
4 A partner would take a share of the profit.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

22 Anwar is a sole trader making annual profits of $24 000. He decides to admit Dilip as a partner.
They agree that Anwar would receive a salary, and profits and losses would be shared equally.

The forecast appropriation account for the partnership’s first year of trading is:

profit for the year 50 000


salary Anwar 10 000
profit available for distribution 40 000

By how much will Anwar’s total income increase?

A $1000 B $6000 C $16 000 D $26 000

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21 [Turn over


8

23 BCD Limited provided the following information.

ordinary shares 300 000


retained earnings 200 000
debentures 170 000

How much was the equity and the capital employed?

equity capital employed


$ $

A 300 000 470 000


B 300 000 670 000
C 500 000 470 000
D 500 000 670 000

24 The issued share capital of CD Limited consists of ordinary shares.

Retained earnings were $86 000 on 1 September 2020 and $88 500 on 31 August 2021.

The company made a profit during the year of $26 000 and made a transfer to general reserve of
$5000.

What was the total ordinary share dividend paid during the year?

A $18 500 B $23 500 C $28 500 D $33 500

25 A sports club was formed on 1 August 2020. During the year ended 31 July 2021 the club
purchased equipment costing $5000, paying by cheque.

In which of the club’s financial statements did this appear?

receipts and payments income and expenditure statement of financial


account account position

A  
B  
C  
D 

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21


9

26 A sports club has 100 members and the annual subscription is $60.

During the year ended 31 August 2021:

12 members paid their outstanding subscription from the previous financial year
10 members paid their subscription in advance for the following financial year.

On 31 August 2021, subscriptions for the current financial year were still outstanding from
8 members.

What was the total amount received from members during the year ended 31 August 2021?

A $5160 B $5640 C $6600 D $6840

27 Beth provided the following information.

1 January 31 December
net assets $28 000 $24 000

Her drawings during the year amounted to $3000.

What was Beth’s profit or loss for the year?

A $1000 loss
B $1000 profit
C $7000 loss
D $7000 profit

28 Roshan’s sales for his first year of trading were $55 000. His gross profit margin was 20%. The
closing inventory was $3200.

What were the purchases for the year?

A $41 250 B $44 000 C $44 450 D $47 200

29 Which information is required to calculate the return on capital employed for a sole trader?

A gross profit, non-current liabilities, owner’s capital


B gross profit, non-current liabilities, working capital
C operating profit for the year, non-current liabilities, owner’s capital
D operating profit for the year, non-current liabilities, working capital

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21 [Turn over


10

30 What is the best indicator of the liquidity of a business?

A current ratio
B liquid (acid test) ratio
C return on capital employed
D working capital

31 A business provided the following information about its gross margin.

Year 1 40%
Year 2 38%
Year 3 35%

What could explain the changes in the gross margin?

A Cost of sales is decreasing.


B Expenses are decreasing.
C Quantity of goods sold is decreasing.
D Selling price is decreasing.

32 Sam and Rob each own a trading business. The income of each business is solely from the sale
of goods. They provided the following information for the year ended 30 June 2020.

Sam Rob

return on capital employed 12% 10%


gross margin 25% 30%
profit margin 14% 12%
current ratio 2.8 : 1 1.2 : 1

Which statement is correct?

A Rob will find it easy to pay his current liabilities.


B Rob’s expenses are a higher proportion of his sales.
C Sam is not employing his capital effectively.
D Sam’s goods are sold at a higher price.

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21


11

33 Why would the owner of a business want to see his financial statements at the end of the year?

1 to assess the performance and progress of the business


2 to determine the market value of the non-current assets
3 to make informed decisions for the following years

A 1 only B 1 and 3 C 2 only D 2 and 3

34 Charlie is a car dealer. Joe wanted a new car and went to Charlie’s car showroom.

On Monday Joe took a car for a test drive and decided to buy it.

On Tuesday Joe arranged to pay for the car by cheque.

On Wednesday Joe collected the car and received an invoice.

On Thursday Joe’s cheque was cleared by the bank.

On which day was Charlie able to account for the profit on the sale?

A Monday
B Tuesday
C Wednesday
D Thursday

35 Which accounting objective requires that financial information is provided in time for a decision to
be made?

A comparability
B relevance
C reliability
D understandability

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/O/N/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2021

Question Answer Marks

1 D 1

2 C 1

3 C 1

4 C 1

5 B 1

6 A 1

7 C 1

8 B 1

9 D 1

10 A 1

11 D 1

12 B 1

13 C 1

14 B 1

15 B 1

16 A 1

17 A 1

18 D 1

19 D 1

20 C 1

21 C 1

22 B 1

23 D 1

24 A 1

25 B 1

26 D 1

27 A 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 3


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2021

Question Answer Marks

29 C 1

30 B 1

31 D 1

32 B 1

33 B 1

34 C 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 12 March 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 D 1

2 D 1

3 A 1

4 C 1

5 A 1

6 D 1

7 A 1

8 D 1

9 A 1

10 B 1

11 A 1

12 B 1

13 C 1

14 C 1

15 C 1

16 C 1

17 A 1

18 C 1

19 B 1

20 B 1

21 A 1

22 D 1

23 B 1

24 A 1

25 C 1

26 D 1

27 A 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 3


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 C 1

30 C 1

31 B 1

32 B 1

33 C 1

34 D 1

35 C 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice February/March 2020
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*4741387681*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

IB20 03_0452_12/2RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Which task would be carried out by a book-keeper but not an accountant?

A comparing one year’s results with those of previous years


B interpreting the accounting records
C preparing financial statements
D recording transactions in the ledgers and cash book

2 A business provided the following information on 1 February 2019.

non-current assets 75 000


current assets 40 000
current liabilities 25 000

The business made a profit of $10 000 for the year ended 31 January 2020.

The owner did not make any drawings during the year.

What was the capital on 31 January 2020?

A $35 000 B $50 000 C $70 000 D $100 000

3 Dilip is a manufacturer. He purchased a machine on credit from Sachin.

How did Dilip record this?

account to account to
be debited be credited

A machinery Sachin
B purchases Sachin
C Sachin machinery
D Sachin purchases

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20


3

4 Mui owns a household appliance store. He took home a washing machine for his personal use.
Mui recorded this transaction as follows.

account debited account credited

drawings sales

Did Mui make the correct entries to record this transaction?

debit entry credit entry

A no no
B no yes
C yes no
D yes yes

5 The following account appeared in the books of Abdul.

Hanif account
2020 $ 2020 $

Jan 18 returns 100 Jan 1 balance b / d 400


31 bank 392 4 purchases 250
discount 8
balance c / d 150
650 650

Which statement is correct?

A On 1 January Abdul owed Hanif $400.


B On 4 January Hanif purchased goods, $250, from Abdul.
C On 31 January Abdul allowed Hanif $8 trade discount.
D On 31 January Hanif owed Abdul $150.

6 Which business document contains details of purchases, returns and payments occurring during
a trading period?

A credit note
B debit note
C invoice
D statement of account

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20 [Turn over


4

7 Rashida sells goods on credit and allows her customers a trade discount.

Which statements are correct?

1 A debit entry is made in the customer’s account in the sales ledger for the net value
of the goods sold.
2 The date of sale, name of the customer, cost price and trade discount are entered in
the sales journal.
3 The trade discount is debited to the customer’s account and credited to the discount
allowed account.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 only D 2 and 3

8 The totals of a trial balance agreed but it was found that the purchase of office equipment had
been debited to office expenses account.

Which type of error has been made?

A commission
B compensating
C original entry
D principle

9 On 31 January, Somraj’s bank statement showed a credit balance of $740. Comparing the bank
statement with the cash book he found the following.

bank charges not recorded in the cash book 30


cheque paid but not presented to the bank 150

Somraj updated his cash book as required.

What was the updated cash book balance on 31 January?

A $590 B $620 C $860 D $890

10 When Mark started a car repair business, he purchased premises and equipment.

Two years later he spent $5000 on building an extension, $600 on new equipment and $750 on
repainting the original premises.

By how much will the non-current assets increase because of these transactions?

A $5000 B $5600 C $5750 D $6350

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20


5

11 A farmer sold a piece of land at market value.

How should the proceeds of this sale be treated?

A as a capital receipt
B as a revenue receipt
C as capital expenditure
D as revenue expenditure

12 Why should a trader provide for the depreciation of a non-current asset?

1 to match the cost against the revenue of the years which benefit from the use of the
asset
2 to provide a cash fund to enable the asset to be replaced at the end of its useful life
3 to recognise that most non-current assets lose value with the passage of time
4 to spread the cost of the asset over its expected working life to avoid overstating
profit

A 1 and 2 only B 1, 3 and 4 C 2 and 3 only D 2, 3 and 4

13 Equipment costing $20 000 was purchased on 1 January 2019. It has a useful working life of
5 years and a residual value of $3000. Depreciation using the straight-line method was included
in the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019.

It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.

What was the effect on the profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 of this error?

A $2000 overstated
B $2000 understated
C $2600 overstated
D $2600 understated

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20 [Turn over


6

14 A business provided the following information about two expenses.

amount paid during


1 January 2019 year ended 31 December 2019
$ 31 December 2019 $
$

electricity 240 accrued 1500 360 accrued


insurance 180 prepaid 1200 220 prepaid

Which amounts will be charged to the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019?

electricity insurance
$ $

A 900 800
B 1380 1240
C 1620 1160
D 2100 1600

15 Anjum rents part of her premises to Ajay for $6120 per annum. At the beginning of the year Ajay
had paid two months rent in advance. At the end of the year Ajay had paid three months rent in
advance.

How much rent was received from Ajay during the year?

A $3570 B $5610 C $6630 D $8670

16 A business maintains a provision for doubtful debts of 5% of trade receivables. The balance on
the provision for doubtful debts account on 31 December 2018 was $2700.

On 31 December 2019 the trade receivables amounted to $50 000.

How will the provision for doubtful debts be recorded on 31 December 2019?

provision for
$ income statement $
doubtful debts account

A credit 200 added to gross profit 200


B credit 200 deducted from gross profit 200
C debit 200 added to gross profit 200
D debit 200 deducted from gross profit 200

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20


7

17 At the end of the financial year Cindy valued her inventory at cost. This valuation incorrectly
included damaged goods costing $300. Cindy estimated these goods could be sold for $100.

What is the effect of correcting the inventory valuation?

gross profit profit for the year current assets

A decreases by $200 decreases by $200 decrease by $200


B decreases by $300 decreases by $300 decrease by $300
C increases by $100 increases by $100 decrease by $100
D increases by $200 increases by $200 decrease by $200

18 Hassan had the following assets on 31 January 2020.

premises 12 000
inventory 500
balance at bank 360
goodwill 3 000
cash 120

There were no liabilities on 31 January 2020.

Which entries will be made in Hassan’s statement of financial position on 31 January 2020?

intangible non-current current


capital
assets assets assets
$
$ $ $

A nil 12 000 980 12 980


B nil 15 000 480 15 480
C 3000 12 000 980 15 980
D 3000 15 000 480 18 480

19 AB Stores had the following transactions.

1 The owner invested a further $20 000 capital.


2 $2000 was paid to trade payables.
3 A long-term loan of $5000 was repaid.

By how much would the working capital increase after these transactions?

A $13 000 B $15 000 C $20 000 D $27 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20 [Turn over


8

20 The balances in the books of a business included the following.

goodwill 10 000
premises 25 000
trade receivables 9 500
trade payables 6 000
inventory 15 000
cash at bank 500 debit
long-term loan 5 000

What was the capital employed?

A $50 000 B $54 000 C $60 000 D $65 000

21 What is a disadvantage of operating a business as a partnership?

A Partners may not agree on how to run the business.


B Partners may not have the same skills.
C The financial statements must be published.
D The risks and responsibilities are shared.

22 What does not affect the total equity of a limited company?

A issue of ordinary shares


B ordinary share dividend paid
C profit for the year
D transfer from retained earnings to general reserve

23 What is called-up share capital?

A the amount received by the company for issued shares


B the amount requested from shareholders by the company
C the value of shares the company could issue
D the value of shares actually issued by the company

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20


9

24 A limited company provided the following information.

issued share capital (50 000 ordinary shares of $1 each) 50 000


profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 13 000
transfer to general reserve on 31 December 2019 6 000
interim ordinary share dividend paid during the year 3 000

On 31 December 2019 it was decided to use the remaining profit to pay a final ordinary share
dividend.

What percentage final dividend would the ordinary shareholders receive?

A 8% B 14% C 20% D 26%

25 A cricket club set up a snack bar on 1 January 2019.

The following information is available.

for the year ended 31 December 2019


receipts from sales of snacks 3250
cost of purchases of snacks 2500
wages of snack bar assistant 250
at 31 December 2019
cost of snacks unsold 520

What was the profit made by the snack bar?

A $500 B $750 C $1020 D $1270

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20 [Turn over


10

26 A social club had the following assets and liabilities.

non-current assets 6550


cafe expenses owing 25
subscriptions owing by members 50
balance at bank 500 debit
owing to credit suppliers 300
cafe inventory 500

What was the accumulated fund?

A $6275 B $6325 C $7175 D $7275

27 A manufacturing business provided the following information for the year ended
30 November 2019

factory supervisor’s salary 25 000


factory power 5 000
machinery depreciation 11 000
machinery operators’ wages 29 000
raw materials consumed 82 000

What was the total of the direct costs?

A $111 000 B $116 000 C $127 000 D $152 000

28 What would be included in the statement of financial position of a manufacturing business but not
a wholesale business?

A cash
B office equipment
C trade receivables
D work in progress

29 The average inventory of a business was $40 000. The rate of inventory turnover was 5 times a
year. Mark-up was 20%.

What was the revenue for the year?

A $160 000 B $200 000 C $240 000 D $250 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20


11

30 Sumit does not maintain a full set of accounting records.

What does Sumit not need to calculate his credit sales?

A customer’s dishonoured cheque


B discounts allowed
C discounts received
D returns from credit customers

31 Jake had current liabilities of trade payables and had current assets of inventory, trade
receivables and cash at bank.

Which measure would improve his current ratio?

A buying additional inventory and paying in cash


B decreasing drawings
C revaluing non-current assets
D selling inventory on credit rather than for cash

32 Flo and Mo are traders selling similar goods at similar prices. They provided the following
information.

Flo Mo

gross margin 50% 40%


profit margin 10% 8%

Which trader has better control of cost of sales and expenses?

costs of sales expenses

A Flo Flo
B Flo Mo
C Mo Flo
D Mo Mo

33 Which is an application of the materiality principle?

A always using the straight-line method when depreciating assets


B buying raw materials on credit rather than paying immediately
C charging the cost of light bulbs and batteries to operating expenses
D recording goods sold only when its legal title passes to the buyer

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20 [Turn over


12

34 Which accounting principle states that revenue should not be recorded before it is earned?

A consistency
B matching
C money measurement
D realisation

35 Which accounting objective requires that financial statements are free from bias and errors?

A comparability
B relevance
C reliability
D understandability

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/F/M/20


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 2 5 5 7 8 2 3 3 0 2 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper February/March 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (RCL (GO)) 186087/2


© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Amara maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The imprest amount of $200 is
restored on the first day of each month. On 1 January 2020 Amara had a balance of $65 in her
petty cash.

All payments of less than $100 are made from petty cash.

On 1 January 2020, Amara owed $85 to Razvan, a credit supplier.

Amara provided the following information for January 2020.

January 1 The petty cash imprest was restored from the business bank account.

3 Purchased stationery for cash, $24

7 Paid travelling expenses, $49

14 Paid Razvan the amount outstanding on his account

19 Purchased goods on credit from Razvan, $200 less 10% trade discount

22 Paid taxi fare, $18

28 Returned goods to Razvan which had been purchased on 19 January, list price
$40

29 Paid postage, $11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Amara’s petty cash book for the month of January 2020, on the page opposite.

Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 February 2020.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


Amara
Petty Cash Book

Total Date Details Total Travel Postage and Ledger

© UCLES 2020
received paid stationery accounts
$ $ $ $ $

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................


3

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

0452/22/F/M/20
…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................

…..................... …..................... ……………………………………........... …..................... …..................... …..................... ….....................

…..................... …..................... ……………………………………........... …..................... …..................... …..................... ….....................

[10]

[Turn over
4

Amara’s supplier, Razvan, maintains a full set of accounting records.

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare the account of Amara as it would appear in the ledger of Razvan.

Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 February 2020.

Razvan
Amara account

Date Details $ Date Details $

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………. ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………….…… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………. ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………. ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………. ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………. ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………. ……….....

[6]

On 2 February 2020 Amara paid the balance due to Razvan. She deducted cash discount of 2%.

REQUIRED

(c) Complete the following table by placing a tick (ü) in the correct column to show how Razvan
should record the cash discount. Where an account has no entry, tick ‘no entry’.

debit credit no entry


Amara account
Discount allowed account
Discount received account
[2]

Amara usually pays Razvan by cash or cheque.

REQUIRED

(d) State two other methods which Amara could use to pay Razvan from her bank account.

1 ..............................................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................................ [2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20 [Turn over


6

2 GHB Limited maintains a full set of accounting records and prepares monthly control accounts.

The following information was provided for November 2019.

$
Purchases ledger control account balance at 1 November ?

Totals for November:


Purchases journal 14 200
Purchases returns journal 1 160
Cash purchases 5 390
Commission receivable 2 110
Cash discount received 650
Cash discount allowed 710
Cheques paid to trade payables 11 420
Sales ledger contras 250
Interest charged by trade payables 95
Cheque refunds from trade payables 330
Purchases ledger control account balance at 30 November 13 195

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the purchases ledger control account for GHB Limited for November 2019.

Balance the account on 30 November 2019 and bring down the balance on 1 December
2019.

GHB Limited
Purchases ledger control account

Date Details $ Date Details $

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....


[9]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


7

A delivery vehicle was purchased by cheque during November 2019.

REQUIRED

(b) State two reasons why the purchase of the delivery vehicle was not recorded in the purchases
ledger control account.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) (i) State the most appropriate method of depreciation for the new delivery vehicle.

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State three reasons for your answer to (c) (i).

1 .........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 .........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

3 .........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20 [Turn over


8

The directors of GHB Limited are planning to finance a major expansion of the fleet of delivery
vehicles. $250 000 will be required for this expansion. The directors are considering whether to
issue additional ordinary shares or to obtain a long-term bank loan.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise the directors which of these two methods of finance is more appropriate.

Justify your answer with one advantage and one disadvantage of each option.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


9

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20 [Turn over


10

3 Tia and Sarna are partners in a trading business.

Their trial balance at 31 December 2019 was as follows:

Tia and Sarna


Trial Balance at 31 December 2019

debit credit
$ $
Revenue 124 000
Inventory at 1 January 2019 5 390
Purchases 55 440
Discount allowed 2 400
Discount received 1 385
Carriage outwards 6 160
Insurance 7 920
General expenses 8 100
Wages 9 600
Trade receivables 11 590
Trade payables 6 051
Bank 8 136
Premises at cost 90 000
Furniture at cost 24 000
Provision for depreciation on furniture 5 600
Capital accounts
Tia 80 000
Sarna 40 000
Current accounts
Tia 2 100
Sarna 1 600
Drawings
Tia 15 000
Sarna 17 000

260 736 260 736

Additional information

1 Inventory at 31 December 2019 was valued at $5165.

2 Depreciation on furniture is to be charged at 20% per annum using the straight-line method.

3 The insurance includes a payment of $2160 for the 12 months from 1 July 2019 to 30 June
2020.

4 The partnership agreement provides for


interest on capital of 5% per annum
a salary to Tia of $6000 per annum
residual profits and losses to be shared equally

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the income statement for Tia and Sarna for the year ended 31 December 2019.

Tia and Sarna


Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2019

$ $
……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………......…........ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

[8]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20 [Turn over


12

(b) Prepare the appropriation account for Tia and Sarna for the year ended 31 December 2019.

Tia and Sarna


Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 December 2019

$ $
……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….

[4]

(c) Prepare the current account for Sarna for the year ended 31 December 2019. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 January 2020.

Tia and Sarna


Sarna current account

Date Details $ Date Details $

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

……….... …………………………………… ………..... ……….... …………………………………… ……….....

[4]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


13

Tia and Sarna are considering transferring $7000 from the business bank account to an interest-
bearing deposit account.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise the partners whether or not they should make this transfer. Justify your answer by
providing advantages and disadvantages.

.................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................ [4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20 [Turn over


14

4 Arjun is a sole trader.

Arjun prepared a trial balance on 31 January 2020. The totals of the debit and credit sides differed.
This difference was placed in a suspense account.

Arjun later discovered the following errors.

1 The total of the discount received column in the cash book for January, $135, had been
credited to the commission receivable account.

2 $200 received from the sale of fittings (net book value $150) had been correctly debited but
had been credited to the fixtures and fittings account.

3 Cash drawings, $40, had been correctly debited but had been credited to the purchases
account.

4 The total of the analysis column for cleaning in the petty cash book, $73, had been transferred
to both the cleaning account and the office expenses account.

5 The purchase of equipment, $575, had been credited to the equipment repairs account. The
bank account had been correctly credited.

6 No entries had been made for a cheque payment for office expenses, $90.

7 A cheque, $69, paid to Simone had been posted to the account of Simon.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


15

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare journal entries to correct errors 1, 2 and 3.

Narratives are required.

Arjun
Journal

Error Details Debit Credit


number $ $

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. …………………………………...………………………………. …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..

………….. ………………………………………………………………….... …………………….. ……………………..


[9]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20 [Turn over


16

(b) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance, as a
balancing figure.

Arjun
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

…………… ………………………………… ………..…… …………… ………………………………. ………..……

…………… ………………………………… ………..…… …………… …………………………….… ………..……

…………… ………………………………… ………..…… …………… ………………………………… ………..……

…………… ………………………………… ………..…… …………… ………………………………… ………..……

…………… ………………………………… ………..…… …………… ………………………………… ………..……

…………… ………………………………… ………..…… …………… ………………………………… ………..……

…………. ………………………………… ………..…… …………… ………………………………… ………..……


[4]

(c) Complete the following table by placing a tick (ü) in the correct column to indicate how each
of the errors would affect Arjun's capital.

The first one has been completed as an example.

Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.

Error number Increases Decreases No effect


capital capital on capital
3 ü
4
5
6
7
[4]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


17

(d) State three advantages to Arjun of operating as a sole trader.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

3 ................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................ [3]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20 [Turn over


18

5 Adit provided the following information.

For the year to 31 January 2020 $


Profit for the year 27 900
Revenue 186 000
Credit purchases 93 075

At 31 January 2020
Non-current assets at book value 43 700
Inventory 9 340
Trade receivables 14 010
Trade payables 9 435
Bank overdraft 2 240
Bank loan (repayable 2023) 6 000

All goods are sold on credit terms.

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the following ratios. Show your workings.

profit margin
workings answer

trade payables turnover (days)


workings answer
(round up to nearest
whole day)

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


19

trade receivables turnover (days)


workings answer
(round up to nearest
whole day)

liquid ratio
workings answer

[8]

The bank overdraft limit is $2500.

The trade payables turnover for the year to 31 January 2019 was 35 days.

REQUIRED

(b) Advise Adit whether or not he should delay paying trade payables in order to reduce the bank
overdraft. Justify your answer by considering the effect on both the bank balance and the trade
payables.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20 [Turn over


20

(c) Suggest three other actions which Adit could take to reduce the bank overdraft.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

3 ................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................ [3]

(d) (i) State two reasons why Adit should produce an annual income statement.

1 .........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 .........................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State two reasons why Adit should apply the money measurement principle.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 20]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/F/M/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 22 March 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Amara 10
Petty Cash Book

Total Date Details Total Travel Postage Ledger


received paid and accounts
stationery
$ $ $ $ $

2020
65 Jan 1 Balance b/d
135 Bank (1)
3 Stationery (1) 24 24
7 Travel (1) 49 49
14 Razvan (1) 85 85
22 Taxi fare (1) 18 18
29 Postage (1) 11 11
187 67 35 85
31 Balance c/d 13
200 200
13 Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)

+ (1) dates
+ (1) OF totalling analysis columns
+ (1) OF for 2 matching totals

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(b) Razvan 6
Amara account

2020 $ 2020 $
Jan 1 Balance b/d 85 (1) Jan 14 Petty cash 85 (1)
19 Sales 180 (1) 28 Sales returns 36 (1)
31 Balance c/d 144
265 265
Feb 1 Balance b/d 144 (1)OF

+ (1) dates

1(c) 2
debit credit no entry

Amara account  (1)

Discount allowed account  }

Discount received account  }(1)

1(d) Direct debit (1) 2


Credit card/Debit card (1)
Online/electronic payment (1)
Telephone transfer (1)
Credit transfer (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(a) GHB Limited 9


Purchases ledger control account
2019 $ 2019 $
Nov 30 Purchases returns 1 160 (1) Nov 1 Balance b/d 12 050 (1) OF
Discount received 650 (1) 30 Purchases 14 200 (1)
Bank 11 420 (1) Interest 95 (1)
Sales ledger 250 (1) Bank 330 (1)
Balance c/d 13 195
26 675 26 675
Dec 1 Balance b/d 13 195 (1)

2(b) The purchases ledger control account does not include capital expenditure/non-current assets (1) 2
The purchases ledger control account only includes purchases of goods for resale (1)
The purchases ledger control account only includes transactions relating to trade payables (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

2(c)(i) Reducing balance method (1) 1

2(c)(ii) More depreciation is charged in the early years of its life (1) 3
Most of the benefit of the asset is gained in the early years (1)
The net book value is more likely to relate to the amount which will be realised on sale (1)
The vehicle may become out-of-date quickly depending on the vehicle type (1)
As repair costs are likely to be minimal in the early years, the overall charge to the income statement each year is more likely
to be fairly constant if the reducing balance method is used (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(d) Ordinary shares 5


Advantages:
Shares could be sold to new or existing shareholders (1)
Shares are permanent capital/do not have to be repaid (1)
Dividends vary according to the profit (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Disadvantages:
It may take longer to raise the funds (1)
Increased dividends may have to be paid (1)
All the shares need to be sold in order to raise the amount required (1)
Less control for existing shareholders (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Bank loan
Advantages:
Easier to set up/quicker to obtain funds (1)
May be repaid early (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Disadvantages:
A fixed rate of interest needs to be paid each year (1)
The interest would be payable irrespective of profit (1)
Must be re-paid in full within a fixed period (1)
Security would have to be provided (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) Tia and Sarna 8


Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2019

$ $
Revenue 124 000
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 5 390
Purchases 55 440
60 830
Less Closing inventory 5 165
55 665 (1)
Gross profit 68 335 (1)OF
Discount received 1 385 (1)
69 720
Less Expenses
Discount allowed 2 400 }
Carriage outwards 6 160 }(1)
Insurance (7 920 – 1 080) 6 840 (1)
General expenses 8 100 }
Wages 9 600 }(1)
Depreciation on Furniture (20% × 24 000) 4 800 (1) 37 900
Profit for the year 31 820 (1)OF

3(b) Tia and Sarna 4


Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 December 2019

$ $
Profit for the year 31 820 (1) OF
Less Interest on capital Tia 4 000
Sarna 2 000
6 000 (1)
Salary Tia 6 000 (1) 12 000
19 820
Profit share Tia 9 910 }(1) OF
Sarna 9 910 } 19 820

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(c) Tia and Sarna 4


Sarna Current account
2019 $ 2019 $
Dec 31 Drawings 17 000 (1) Jan 1 Balance b/d 1 600
Dec 31 Interest on capital 2 000 (1)OF
Profit 9 910 (1)OF
Balance c/d 3 490
17 000 17 000
2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d 3 490 (1)OF

3(d) Advantages 4
It would reduce cash sitting idle in the business bank account (1)
The levels of trade receivables and trade payables suggest that there will be future net cash inflow (1)
Interest would be earned on the amount transferred (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
It may not be possible to withdraw money from the deposit account without giving notice (1)
Cash may not be available if Tia decides to draw the full amount to which she is entitled at the end of the year (1)
Will decrease working capital/will reduce liquidity (1)
Tia and Sarna may be considering other uses for the cash (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Max (3) for advantages and disadvantages

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) Arjun 9
Journal
Error Details Debit Credit
number $ $

1 Commission receivable 135 (1)


Discount received 135 (1)
Correction of error – cash book total for discount received incorrectly posted (1)

2 Fixtures and fittings 200 (1)


Disposal of fixtures and fittings 200 (1)
Correction of error – proceeds of sale of fittings incorrectly posted (1)

3 Purchases 40 (1)
Cash 40 (1)
Correction of error – cash drawings posted in error to purchases (1)

4(b) Arjun 4
Suspense account

2020 $ 2020 $
Jan 31 Difference on trial 1 077 (1)OF Jan 31 Equipment repairs 575 (1)
balance Equipment 575 (1)
Office expenses 73 (1)
1 150 1 150

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(c) 4
Error number Increases Decreases No effect
capital capital on capital

3 

4 (1)

5  (1)

6  (1)

7 (1)

4(d) Full control of the business (1) 3


Decisions can be taken quickly (1)
Profits do not have to be shared/distributed (1)
Book-keeping and accounting are simpler (1)
Financial statements do not have to be published (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) 8
profit margin

workings answer

27 900 100 (1) whole formula 15% (1)


×
186 000 1

Trade payables turnover (days)

workings answer

9 435 365 (1) whole formula 37 days (1)


×
93 075 1

Trade receivables turnover (days)

workings answer

14 010 365 (1) whole formula 28 days (1)


×
186 000 1

Liquid ratio

workings answer

14 010 : 11 675 (1) whole formula 1.2 : 1 (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(b) Bank 5
May damage relationship with bank (1)
Already has a bank loan as well as the overdraft (1)
Has nearly reached his overdraft limit (1)
Bank may charge increased interest if overdraft limit is exceeded (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Trade payables
Relationship with suppliers may be damaged if he delays paying them (1)
Is taking longer to pay trade payables than he did last year (1)OF
May already be taking longer to pay than the credit period allowed (1)
Trade payables may refuse future supplies (1)
Interest may be charged on the overdue amount/cash discount will be forfeited (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

5(c) Sell surplus non-current assets (1) 3


Increase bank loan/additional bank loan (1)
Obtain loan from another source (1)
Convert to a partnership/limited company (1)
Introduce additional capital (1)
More efficient credit control (1)
Sell on a cash basis (1)
Reduce drawings (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d)(i) To calculate the profit for the year (1) 2


To assess progress of the business (1)
To provide information for calculation of ratios (1)
For comparison purposes (1)
To indicate where corrective action is required (1)
To assist planning (1)
To provide required information for the tax authorities (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

5(d)(ii) Non-monetary items cannot be recorded/only items which can be expressed in monetary terms can be recorded (1) 2
Money is a widely used/understood unit of measure (1)
Transactions are traditionally recorded in money terms (1)
Subjectivity/personal opinion is avoided (1)
Easier to make comparisons year-on-year/with other businesses (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 14


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice February/March 2021
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*6889339018*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB21 03_0452_12/3RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 A business employs a book-keeper and an accountant.

Which task would the accountant perform?

A extracting balances from the ledger accounts to produce a trial balance


B making entries in the general journal to adjust a provision for doubtful debts
C preparing a monthly report that analyses the profitability of the company
D recording sales and purchase invoices in the books of prime entry

2 What are assets?

amounts owed amounts owed items owned


to a business by a business by a business

A no no yes
B no yes yes
C yes no yes
D yes yes no

3 On 15 February, Kalou made the following entries in his accounts.

debit $ credit $

bank 228 Droghba 240


discount allowed 12

Which transaction was being recorded?

A Droghba paid Kalou by cheque after taking a cash discount.


B Droghba paid Kalou by cheque after taking a trade discount.
C Kalou paid Droghba by cheque after taking a cash discount.
D Kalou paid Droghba by cheque after taking a trade discount.

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


3

4 Jai is a manufacturer. On 1 February he purchased a machine costing $15 000 from Vinita. He
paid $10 000 immediately with a cheque from his personal bank account. The balance was to be
paid in June.

Which entries did Jai make on 1 February?

accounts debited $ accounts credited $

A machinery 10 000 bank 10 000


B machinery 10 000 capital 10 000
C machinery 15 000 bank 10 000
Vinita 5 000
D machinery 15 000 capital 10 000
Vinita 5 000

5 Jameel’s financial year ends on 31 December. On 1 January 2021 he brought down a debit
balance on his stationery account.

What does this balance represent?

A amount owing for stationery on 1 January 2021


B amount paid for stationery during 2020
C cost of stationery used during 2020
D inventory of stationery on 1 January 2021

6 Daksha returned goods to Amina.

Which entries did Daksha make in her books?

debit entry credit entry


account ledger account ledger

A Amina general purchases returns purchases


B Amina purchases purchases returns general
C purchases returns general Amina purchases
D purchases returns purchases Amina general

7 Which book of prime entry is written up from the copies of credit notes issued by a trader?

A purchases journal
B purchases returns journal
C sales journal
D sales returns journal

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21 [Turn over


4

8 Which transaction is recorded in the general journal?

A correction of an error in recording sales returns


B drawings in cash by the owner
C purchase of a motor vehicle by cheque
D purchase of goods on credit

9 Raminder maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The monthly imprest of $250 is
restored on the first day of each month.

In January the petty cashier spent $105 and received a refund of $15 from a stationery supplier.

How much was given to the petty cashier on 1 February to restore the imprest?

A $90 B $105 C $145 D $160

10 The totals of a trial balance failed to agree. The total of the credit column was $10 000. Two
errors were later found.

The sales journal had been overcast by $100.


Goods sold to Sarah on credit for $200 had been incorrectly debited to Zara.

What was the total of the debit column of the trial balance?

A $9700 B $9900 C $10 100 D $10 300

11 On 31 December 2020, the bank column in Farad’s cash book showed an overdrawn balance
of $2000.

The following items had not been entered in the cash book.

standing order for rent 200


interest on bank overdraft 50
credit transfer from X Limited 2900

What was the corrected balance of the bank column in the cash book at 1 January 2021?

A $650 credit
B $650 debit
C $1150 credit
D $1150 debit

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


5

12 Raj is both a customer of and a supplier to Balbir.

Raj’s account in Balbir’s sales ledger showed a debit balance of $300. There was a credit
balance of $100 on Raj’s account in the purchases ledger. A contra entry between the two
accounts was agreed.

Which entry would Balbir make in his purchases ledger control account?

A credit $100
B credit $200
C debit $100
D debit $200

13 Motor vehicle repairs, $2000, were debited to the motor vehicles account.

Motor vehicles are depreciated at 20% per annum on the balance of the account at the year end.

What was the effect of the error?

effect on motor vehicles


effect on
in statement of financial
profit for the year
position

$ $

A overstated 1600 overstated 1600


B overstated 2000 overstated 2000
C understated 1600 understated 1600
D understated 2000 understated 2000

14 Mandeep depreciates his motor vehicles at the rate of 20% using the straight-line method.

A full year’s depreciation is provided in the year of purchase.

Mandeep bought a motor vehicle on 1 January 2017 for $20 000. On 1 June 2020 he bought a
second motor vehicle for $10 000.

What was the depreciation charge on motor vehicles for the year ended 31 December 2020?

A $2000 B $4000 C $5000 D $6000

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21 [Turn over


6

15 The following ledger account appeared in the books of a trader.

Rates account
$ $

Jan 1 Balance b / d 240 Dec 31 Income statement 2880


June 30 Bank 2160
Dec 31 Balance c / d 480
2880 2880

Which statement is correct?

A Rates are accrued at both the start and the end of the year.
B Rates are accrued at the start of the year and prepaid at the end of the year.
C Rates are prepaid at both the start and the end of the year.
D Rates are prepaid at the start of the year and accrued at the end of the year.

16 A book-keeper made the following ledger entry.

account debited account credited


bank debts recovered

Which transaction has been recorded?

A A credit customer has paid his account by the due date.


B A late payment has been received for a debt not yet written off.
C A payment has been received for a debt that had been written off.
D An irrecoverable debt has been written off.

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


7

17 The following accounts appeared in the ledger of Delta Limited.

Total trade receivables account


$ $

Jan 1 Balance b / d 30 000 Dec 31 Bank 109 000


Dec 31 Sales 101 000 Balance c / d 22 000
131 000 131 000

Provision for doubtful debts account


$ $

Dec 31 Income statement 100 Jan 1 Balance b / d 1 200


Balance c / d 1 100
1 200 1 200

How had the total of trade receivables and the rate of provision for doubtful debts changed by
the end of the year?

total of trade rate of provision


receivables for doubtful debts

A decreased decreased
B decreased increased
C increased decreased
D increased increased

18 On 31 December 2020 Helmut had the following liabilities.

bank loan repayable 1 September 2021 1500


bank overdraft repayable on demand 1000
loan from finance company repayable 30 June 2024 5000
mortgage repayable 1 March 2022 2000

What was the total of Helmut’s non-current liabilities on 31 December 2020?

A $5000 B $7000 C $8500 D $9500

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21 [Turn over


8

19 Vinita’s credit customer paid the amount owing in cash, after deducting 2% discount for prompt
payment.

How did this affect Vinita’s financial statements?

statement of financial
income statement
position

A increase expenses decrease current assets


B increase expenses increase current assets
C increase revenue decrease current assets
D increase revenue increase current assets

20 Mohan and Dipak are in partnership. They provided the following information at the end of the
financial year.

$ $

profit for the year 30 600


interest on capital Mohan 1 000
Dipak 1 500 2 500
interest on drawings Mohan 40
Dipak 320 360
salary Mohan 4 000

How much was available for distribution to the partners?

A $23 740 B $24 460 C $27 740 D $29 460

21 Raj and Rohit are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2 : 1. Raj is entitled to an
annual salary of $3000. The profit for the year ended 31 December 2020 was $14 100.

On 1 January 2020, Raj’s current account had a debit balance of $1800.

What was the credit balance on Raj’s current account on 1 January 2021?

A $8600 B $10 400 C $12 200 D $12 400

22 Which items appear in the capital and reserves section of a statement of financial position of a
limited company?

A debentures, ordinary share dividend, general reserve


B debentures, retained earnings, general reserve
C ordinary share capital, debentures, retained earnings
D ordinary share capital, general reserve, retained earnings

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


9

23 The issued share capital of AN Limited consists of ordinary shares.

On 1 January 2020, the retained earnings were $78 000.

For the year ended 31 December 2020, the company earned a profit of $65 000.

An ordinary share dividend of $20 000 was paid during the year and a further dividend for the
year of $15 000 was proposed. A transfer was made to general reserve of $40 000.

What was the balance of retained earnings at 31 December 2020?

A $3000 B $5000 C $68 000 D $83 000

24 Which group contains only items which may be recorded in both the income statement of a
trading business and the income and expenditure account of a club?

A bank charges, depreciation, wages


B bank charges, gross profit, sales revenue
C deficit, sales revenue, treasurer’s expenses
D depreciation, treasurer’s expenses, wages

25 The following ledger account appeared in the books of a club for the year ended
31 December 2020.

Subscriptions account
$ $

2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b / d 2 000 Dec 31 Bank 29 000
Dec 31 Income and expenditure 24 000
Balance c / d 3 000
29 000 29 000

Which statement is correct?

A Subscriptions prepaid on 1 January 2020 amounted to $2000.


B Subscriptions prepaid on 31 December 2020 amounted to $3000.
C Subscriptions received during the year ended 31 December 2020 amounted to $24 000.
D Subscriptions relating to the year ended 31 December 2020 amounted to $29 000.

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21 [Turn over


10

26 The following costs were incurred by a clothing manufacturer.

1 purchase of fabric
2 purchase of buttons
3 repairs to sewing machine
4 wages of factory supervisors
5 wages of sewing machinists

Which costs are indirect costs?

A 1, 2 and 5 B 1, 4 and 5 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

27 A manufacturer calculated the cost of production for the year at $57 000.

It was found that lighting and heating, $2000, had been omitted from the financial statements.

Lighting and heating is allocated 75% to the factory and 25% to the offices.

What was the correct cost of production?

A $55 500 B $56 500 C $57 500 D $58 500

28 Tariq provided the following information.

31 January 2020 31 January 2021


$ $

non-current assets 60 000 70 000


current assets 20 000 25 000
current liabilities 15 000 19 000

Tariq’s drawings for the year ended 31 January 2021 were $5000.

What was the profit for the year ended 31 January 2021?

A $6000 B $11 000 C $14 000 D $16 000

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


11

29 Nour does not keep full accounting records. She provided the following information at the end of
the financial year.

decrease in trade receivables during the year 2 000


receipts from trade receivables 58 000
discount allowed 1 200
sales returns 1 500

What were the credit sales for the year?

A $55 700 B $57 300 C $58 700 D $62 700

30 A trader provided the following information.

non-current assets 132 000


current assets 28 000
current liabilities 12 000
interest paid on loan 2 000

Return on capital employed was 12.5%.

What was the profit for the year before loan interest?

A $16 500 B $18 250 C $18 500 D $20 500

31 Which change would cause an increase in the liquid (acid test) ratio?

A a decrease in inventory
B an increase in inventory
C a decrease in the provision for doubtful debts
D an increase in the provision for doubtful debts

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21 [Turn over


12

32 Abhinav provided the following information.

year ended year ended


31 December 2019 31 December 2020
$ $

purchases 112 500 124 000


cost of sales 115 500 120 000

inventory $

1 January 2019 7000


31 December 2019 4000
31 December 2020 8000

What was the rate of turnover of inventory for the year ended 31 December 2020?

A 15 times B 20 times C 21 times D 30 times

33 Which action will improve the gross margin?

A increasing expenses
B increasing selling price
C reducing expenses
D reducing selling price

34 Amaira depreciates her non-current assets by the same rate and using the same method every
year.

Which group of accounting principles is she applying?

A business entity, consistency, matching


B business entity, prudence, realisation
C consistency, matching, prudence
D matching, prudence, realisation

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


13

35 Kamika’s financial statements did not comply with the accounting principle of money
measurement.

What had Kamika done?

A included a value for the skill of her employees


B forgot to include prepaid insurance
C recorded her drawings in wages and salaries
D valued her inventory above original cost

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/F/M/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 March 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 C 1

2 C 1

3 A 1

4 D 1

5 D 1

6 B 1

7 D 1

8 A 1

9 A 1

10 B 1

11 B 1

12 C 1

13 A 1

14 D 1

15 D 1

16 C 1

17 B 1

18 B 1

19 A 1

20 B 1

21 A 1

22 D 1

23 D 1

24 A 1

25 B 1

26 D 1

27 D 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 3


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 C 1

30 C 1

31 C 1

32 B 1

33 B 1

34 C 1

35 A 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 2 1 8 5 9 7 1 3 4 1 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper February/March 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (PQ) 200799/4
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Shilpa is a trader. The following transactions took place in January 2021.

January 2 Paid rent, $450, by direct debit

3 Bought goods on credit from Dilip, list price $120, subject to a trade discount of
25%

6 Sold goods on credit to Kabir, list price $200, subject to a trade discount of 20%

9 Sold surplus office fittings for $110 which was paid by credit transfer

10 Returned goods to Dilip, list price $20. These goods had been purchased on
3 January

11 Paid $50 to Dilip in cash

15 Cash sales, $85, were immediately paid into the bank

17 Paid office expenses, $30, by credit transfer

20 Sold goods on credit to Pari, $150

21 Kabir paid by cheque for the goods he purchased on 6 January, after deducting
cash discount of 7½%

24 Pari paid $141, by cheque, in full settlement of the purchases made on 20 January

26 Sold goods on credit to Yash, $62, offering him a discount of 5% if he paid within
21 days

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Shilpa’s sales journal for January 2021.


Total the journal and indicate the ledger account to which the total would be posted.

Shilpa
Sales journal
Date Details $ $

................... .......................................................................... ................... ...................

................... .......................................................................... ................... ...................

................... .......................................................................... ................... ...................

................... .......................................................................... ................... ...................

................... .......................................................................... ................... ...................

................... .......................................................................... ................... ...................

[4]

(b) Complete Shilpa’s cash book on the page opposite.


Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 February 2021.
© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21
Shilpa
Cash Book
Date Details Discount Cash Bank Date Details Discount Cash Bank

© UCLES 2021
allowed received
2021 $ $ $ 2021 $ $ $

Jan 1 Balance b/d ................ 200 814 ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
3

0452/22/F/M/21
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................

[11]

[Turn over
4

(c) Prepare the ledger account of Dilip for January 2021. Balance the account and bring down
the balance on 1 February 2021.
There was no balance on Dilip’s account on 1 January 2021.

Shilpa
Dilip account
Date Details $ Date Details $

……….. ………......................... ………... ……….. ………......................... ………..

……….. ………......................... ………... ……….. ………......................... ………..

……….. ………......................... ………... ……….. ………......................... ………..

……….. ………......................... ………... ……….. ………......................... ………..

……….. ………......................... ………... ……….. ………......................... ………..

……….. ………......................... ………... ……….. ………......................... ………..

……….. ………......................... ………... ……….. ………......................... ………..

[4]

(d) Complete the table by placing a tick (3) to indicate which document Dilip would send to
Shilpa for the return of goods on 10 January.

Debit note

Credit note
[1]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


5

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21 [Turn over


6

2 Zamir is in business providing legal services. Zamir provided the following balances from his
books of account at 31 December 2020.

$
Fee income 151 750
Rent and rates 26 000
Salaries 55 000
Stationery and advertising 6 450
Electricity 8 000
Bank charges 4 100
Office equipment – cost 60 000
Office equipment – provision for depreciation 22 500
Proceeds of disposal of office equipment 1 000
Bank overdraft 7 900
Trade receivables 15 600
Capital 57 000
Drawings 65 000

Additional information

1 The annual rent is $16 000. On 31 December 2020 rent was paid to cover the period from
1 January to 31 March 2021.
There was no accrual or prepayment of rent at 1 January 2020.

2 Rates of $6000 were paid during the year to 31 December 2020. This payment covered the
period 1 January 2020 to 31 October 2020 only. From 1 November 2020 annual rates were
$7560.

3 Depreciation is to be charged on office equipment at 15% per annum using the straight-line
method. No depreciation is charged in the year of disposal.

4 In February 2020 office equipment was sold for $1000. This equipment had been purchased
for $1800 on 1 January 2018. The sales proceeds have been debited to the bank account
and credited to the proceeds of disposal of office equipment account. No other entries have
been made in respect of the disposal.

5 One of Zamir’s clients has become bankrupt. The client owed $1885. Zamir does not expect
to recover this amount.

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


7

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Zamir’s income statement for the year ended 31 December 2020.

Zamir
Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

[10]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21 [Turn over


8

(b) Prepare the assets section of Zamir’s statement of financial position at 31 December 2020.

Zamir
Statement of Financial Position (assets section) at 31 December 2020

$ $ $

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................... ................... ................... ...................

[3]

(c) Suggest two possible reasons why Zamir required a bank overdraft.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


9

Zamir employs Sharif, who is another lawyer. Sharif also keeps the books of account for the
business. Zamir would like to ensure that Sharif does not leave to start work for a rival legal
business.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Zamir whether he should offer Sharif an increase in salary or invite him to become a
partner in the business. Justify your answer with two advantages of each course of action.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21 [Turn over


10

3 Rachel prepared her trial balance at 31 January. The total of the debit side was more than the total
of the credit side. Rachel entered the difference in a suspense account.

(a) Explain how the use of a suspense account allows a draft statement of financial position to be
prepared.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

Rachel later discovered the following errors.

1 A repair to the premises, $220, had been debited to the premises account.

2 The purchase of a motor vehicle, $3400, on credit from Neil’s Wheels, had not been recorded
in the accounting records.

3 Both the sales journal and the purchases journal had been overcast by $100.

4 Returns inwards, $19, had not been recorded in the returns inwards account.

5 Bank interest received, $25, had been debited to the bank charges account. The entry in the
bank account had been correctly made.

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare the journal entries to correct errors 1–5. Narratives are not required.

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


11

Rachel
Journal
Error Details Debit Credit
number $ $

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............ ................................................................................ ................... ...................

[11]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21 [Turn over


12

(c) State the number of the error which is

(i) a compensating error

.................................... [1]

(ii) an error of omission

.................................... [1]

(d) Complete the table to indicate the effect of each error on gross profit and on profit for the
year. The first one has been completed as an example.

Gross Profit Profit for the year


Error
number No effect Understated Overstated No effect Understated Overstated
$ $ $ $
1 3 220

5
[4]

(e) State why a balance may remain on the suspense account after errors 1–5 have been
corrected.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


13

4 Chaaya provided the following information.

$
For the year to 31 December 2020
Credit sales 114 400
Credit purchases 63 110
Gross profit 51 480

At 31 December 2020
Inventory 2 850
Trade receivables 15 400
Trade payables 7 430
Bank overdraft 6 190

REQUIRED

(a) Complete the following table.

ratio working answer


gross margin

trade receivables
turnover days
(round up to next whole day)

current ratio
(correct to two decimal places)

[6]

Chaaya is comparing her ratios with those of Sara, her main competitor. Based on Sara’s most
recent financial statements, her trade receivables turnover is 28 days.

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21 [Turn over


14

REQUIRED

(b) (i) Compare Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover with Sara’s trade receivables turnover.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) State two problems with the inter-firm comparison in 4(b)(i).

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

Chaaya is considering stopping selling on credit and instead selling on a cash only basis. Chaaya
would offer a trade discount of 12% to regular customers in order to maintain a good relationship
with customers.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise Chaaya whether she should start to make cash sales only and offer the trade discount.
Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


15

(d) (i) State two reasons why Chaaya’s employees would be interested in her financial
statements.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) State two types of users of Chaaya’s financial statements, other than Chaaya and her
employees.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21 [Turn over


16

5 Maira opened a shop on 1 January 2020.

She provided the following trading information.

Gross margin: 40%


Purchase price: $70 per unit
Carriage inwards: $2 per unit
Inventory: 130 units at 31 December 2020

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the cost of Maira’s inventory at 31 December 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

Maira has not kept a full set of accounting records, but provided the following information.

1 All sales were made on cash terms. The sales for the first year were:

for the first two months: $10 800 each month


for the next eight months: $12 000 each month
for the last two months: $16 200 each month

2 During the year Maira purchased 1400 units. Carriage was paid on these units.

3 Maira took goods from the business during the year ended 31 December 2020. No record
was kept of these drawings.

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


17

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare Maira’s income statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2020.

Maira
Income Statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

.......................................................................................... ................... ...................

[8]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21 [Turn over


18

Maira has been too busy to keep a full set of accounting records. However, she is now considering
using double-entry book-keeping for her business.

(c) Advise Maira on whether or not she should start to keep a full set of accounting records.
Justify your answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

(d) Place a tick (3) in the correct column to indicate to Maira the book of prime entry in which
each of the following should be recorded.

Cash book Purchases journal Purchases


returns journal
Discount received from a
supplier for prompt payment
Credit note received from a
supplier
Direct debit paid to a
supplier
[3]

(e) Complete the table by placing a tick (3) in the correct column to indicate to Maira the
accounting objective which is described in each statement.

Comparability Relevance Reliability


Maira’s financial statements should be
free from significant errors.
Maira’s financial statements should be
provided in time for her to use them
when making decisions about her shop.
[2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/F/M/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 March 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 19 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Social Science-Specific Marking Principles
(for point-based marking)

1 Components using point-based marking:


• Point marking is often used to reward knowledge, understanding and application of skills. We give credit where the candidate’s answer
shows relevant knowledge, understanding and application of skills in answering the question. We do not give credit where the answer
shows confusion.

From this it follows that we:

a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark
scheme requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)

2 Presentation of mark scheme:


• Slashes (/) or the word ‘or’ separate alternative ways of making the same point.
• Semi colons (;) bullet points (•) or figures in brackets (1) separate different points.
• Content in the answer column in brackets is for examiner information/context to clarify the marking but is not required to earn the mark
(except Accounting syllabuses where they indicate negative numbers).

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
3 Calculation questions:
• The mark scheme will show the steps in the most likely correct method(s), the mark for each step, the correct answer(s) and the mark
for each answer
• If working/explanation is considered essential for full credit, this will be indicated in the question paper and in the mark scheme. In all
other instances, the correct answer to a calculation should be given full credit, even if no supporting working is shown.
• Where the candidate uses a valid method which is not covered by the mark scheme, award equivalent marks for reaching equivalent
stages.
• Where an answer makes use of a candidate’s own incorrect figure from previous working, the ‘own figure rule’ applies: full marks will be
given if a correct and complete method is used. Further guidance will be included in the mark scheme where necessary and any
exceptions to this general principle will be noted.

4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners
who marked that paper.

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Shilpa 4
Sales journal

Date Details $

2021
Jan 6 Kabir (200 – 40) 160 (1)
20 Pari 150 (1)
26 Yash 62 (1)
31 Transfer to sales account 372 (1) OF

1(b) Shilpa 11
Cash Book

Disc. Cash Bank Disc. Cash Bank


Alld Recd
2021 $ $ $ 2021 $ $ $

Jan 1 Balance b/d 200 814 Jan 2 Rent (1) 450


9 Disposal 11 Dilip (1) 50
of office fittings (1) 110 17 Office
15 Sales (1) 85 expenses (1) 30
21 Kabir (1) 12 148 31 Balance c/d 150 818
24 Pari (1) 9 ___ 141 ___ ____
21 200 1298 200 1298
Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 150 818
(1)OF (1)OF

+ (1) dates

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) Shilpa 4
Dilip account
Date Details $ Date Details $

2021 2021
Jan 10 Purchases returns (1) 15 Jan 3 Purchases (1) 90
(20–5) (120 – 30)
11 Cash (1) 50
31 Balance c/d 25
90 90
Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 25

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(d) 1
Debit note

Credit note (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(a) Zamir 10
Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2020

$ $
Fee income 151 750
Less Expenses
*Rent and rates
(26 000 – 4 000 (1) + 1 260 (1)) 23 260
Salaries 55 000 }
Stationery and advertising 6 450 } (1)
Electricity 8 000 }
Bank charges 4 100 } (1)
Irrecoverable debts 1 885 (1)
Loss on disposal of office equipment
(1 000 – (1 260) (1) 260 (1)OF
Depreciation of office equipment
(60 000 – 1 800 = 58 200 × 15% (1) 8 730 (1)OF 107 685
Profit for the year 44 065 (1)OF

* Rent and rates alternative calculation


rent 4 000 × 4 16 000 (1)
rates 6 000 + (2/12 × 7 560) 7 260 (1)
23 260

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(b) Zamir 3
Statement of Financial Position (assets section) at 31 December 2020

$ $ $
Assets
Non-current Assets Cost Accumulated Net book
depreciation value
*Office equipment 58 200 (1) 30 690 (1)OF 27 510 OF

Current Assets
Trade receivables (15 600 – 1 885) 13 715 } (1)
Other receivables 4 000 }
17 715
Total assets 45 225

* workings: cost 60 000 – 1800 = 58 200


acc dep (22 500 – 540) = 21 960 + 8730 OF = 30 690 OF

2(c) High level of drawings (1) 2


High level of trade receivables/trade receivables slow to settle debts (1)
Expenses not controlled efficiently (1)
To meet short-term debts when they fall due (1)
To improve cash flow/liquidity (1)
To be able to take advantage of business opportunities as they arise (1)
To purchase additional non-current assets/expand the business (1)
Accept other valid answers
Max (2)

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(d) Salary increase – advantages 5


Sharif would only be entitled to his salary and not a share of the profit (1)
Zamir would not need to consult Sharif before making decisions (1)
Disagreements about decisions etc. would not arise (1)
Sharif’s motivation and commitment may improve (1)
No changes would be required to the (legal) structure of the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Partnership offer – advantages


Sharif may be required to introduce capital (1)
The risks/losses and responsibilities would be shared (1)
The decision-making would be shared (1)
Sharif’s salary as an employee would not need to be paid (1)
Sharif may be more committed (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) The suspense account balance is entered on the trial balance (1) 2
This means that there are equal debits and credits on the trial balance/the trial balance will balance (1)

3(b) Rachel 11
Journal
Error Details Debit Credit
number $ $

Premises repairs 220 (1)


1
Premises 220 (1)

Motor vehicles 3400 (1)


2
Neil’s Wheels 3400 (1)

Sales 100 (1)


3
Purchases 100 (1)

Sales returns 19 (1)


4
Suspense 19 (1)

Suspense 50 (1)
5 Bank interest received 25 (1)
Bank charges 25 (1)

3(c)(i) Error 3 (1). 1

3(c)(ii) Error 2 (1). 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(d) 4
Gross Profit Profit for the year
Error
number

No effect Understated Overstated No effect Understated Overstated


$ $ $ $

1  220

2   (1)

3   (1)

4 19 19 (1)

5  50 (1)

3(e) The accounting records may contain other errors which have not yet been found (1) 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) 6
ratio working answer

51 480 100
gross margin × (1) whole formula 45% (1)
114 400 1

trade receivables 15 400 365


turnover (days) × (1) whole formula 50 days (1)
114 400 1
(round up to next whole day)

current ratio 2 850 + 15 400 18 250


= (1) whole formula 1.34:1 (1)
(correct to two decimal places) 7 430 + 6 190 13 620

4(b)(i) If Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover (in answer to (a)) is greater than Sara’s (Sara’s was 28 days) 3
Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover is slower than Sara’s (1)
Chaaya may be allowing her credit customers longer to pay (1)
Chaaya’s credit customers may not be paying within a stated credit period (1)
Chaaya’s credit control policy may not be efficient (1)
This may be causing Chaaya to have more cash flow problems than Sara (1)
This may result in Chaaya having more irrecoverable debts than Sara (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

If Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover (in answer to (a)) is less than Sara’s (Sara’s was 28 days)
Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover is faster than Sara’s (1)
Chaaya may be allowing her credit customers less time to pay (1)
Chaaya’s customers may be paying within a stated credit period (1)
Chaaya is less likely to have irrecoverable debts than Sara (1)
Chaaya’s credit control policy is more efficient than Sara’s (1)
This may be causing Chaaya to have fewer cash flow problems than Sara (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(b)(ii) Chaaya and Sara may allow different credit periods (1) 2
Chaaya and Sara may use different accounting policies (1)
Chaaya and Sara may have different year-ends (1)
The figures relate to one year only. It would be more meaningful to look at trends (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

4(c) Advantages 5
Cash would be received quicker (1)
The bank overdraft may be reduced (1)
Overdraft interest may be reduced (1)
There would be no irrecoverable debts (1)
There would be fewer administration costs (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
May lose customers who prefer to buy on credit / damage relationship with customers (1)
Less profit due to trade discount/reduction in selling price/reduction in sales(revenue) (1)
If sales are usually one-off rather than regular, the trade discount may have little effect (1)
Increased risk of fraud or theft/ increased security measures required (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(d)(i) If the business has sufficient profitability/liquidity to continue to offer them employment (1) 2
Whether Chaaya could afford to pay them an increase in wages (1)

4(d)(ii) Bank manager (1) 2


Trade payables (1)
Customers (1)
Government departments/tax office (1)
Potential buyers of Chaaya’s business/potential partner (1)
Investors/potential investors (1)
Accept other valid answers
Max (2)

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) (70 + 2) (1) × 130 = 9360 (1)OF 2

5(b) Maira 8
Income Statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2020

$ $

Revenue 150 000 (1)


Cost of sales
Purchases (1 400 × 70) 98 000 (1)
Carriage inwards (1400 × 2) 2 800 (1)
100 800
Less Goods taken for own use 1 440 (2)CF/(1)OF
99 360
Less Closing inventory 9 360 (1)OF from (a)
90 000 (1)OF
Gross profit 60 000 (1)OF (40% × revenue)

Revenue
2 × 10 800 = 21 600
8 × 12 000 = 96 000
2 × 16 200 = 32 400
150 000

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(c) Advantages 5
Maira would have all the necessary figures e.g. balances of individual ledger accounts (1)
If the business grows, it will be more difficult to prepare financial statements from incomplete records (1)
Detailed records would be available for future reference (1)
More accurate comparisons year-on-year/with other businesses is possible (1)
More informed decision making will be possible (1)
The government/tax office may require an adequate amount of accounting records (1)
If Maira wishes to sell the business, a potential buyer may wish to see full accounting records (1)
Lenders/potential lenders can be provided with adequate information (1)
Maira should be able to prepare financial statements more easily (1)
Maira should be able to prepare financial statements more accurately (1)
Assist in location of errors/checking procedures, e.g. control accounts may be used (1)
The possibility of fraud would be minimised (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Maira’s financial statements may be prepared from incomplete records (1)
Maira is busy so she may not have time for book-keeping (1)
It may take Maira time to learn double-entry book-keeping (1)
Any spare time which Maira can find may be better spent on e.g. marketing (1)
If Maira pays a book-keeper to write up her books, the cost of this will reduce her profits (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 18 of 19


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d) 3
Cash book Purchases Purchases
journal returns journal

Discount received from a


(1)
supplier for prompt payment

Credit note received from a


 (1)
supplier

Direct debit paid to a supplier (1)

5(e) 2
Comparability Relevance Reliability

Maira’s inventory valuation should be free


(1)
from significant errors.

Maira’s financial statements should be


provided in time for her to use them when (1)
making decisions about her shop.

© UCLES 2021 Page 19 of 19


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*9287386594*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

IB20 06_0452_11/4RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Which statement is correct?

A Accounting involves measuring profits and losses.


B Accounting is the recording of financial transactions.
C Book-keeping involves communicating financial data.
D Book-keeping requires the use of ratio analysis.

2 The balances remaining on the books of a business after the preparation of the income statement
included the following.

loan from XY Finance 10 000


wages due 620
rent prepaid 240
trade receivables 3 300
trade payables 4 650
motor vehicles 8 000
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 2 000

What was the total of the liabilities?

A $13 920 B $14 890 C $15 270 D $17 270

3 On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.

What entry would Nina make on 12 April?

account to be debited account to be credited

A irrecoverable debts bank


B irrecoverable debts Zaffar
C provision for doubtful debts Zaffar
D Zaffar bank

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


3

4 Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.

April 2 Ann returned goods, $30, to Cindy.


14 Ann bought goods, $210, from Cindy, and paid in cash.

Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?

A Ann owes Cindy $490.


B Ann owes Cindy $700.
C Cindy owes Ann $490.
D Cindy owes Ann $700.

5 Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.

Where will Tumelo record the return of goods?

A cash book and sales ledger


B general ledger only
C general ledger and purchases ledger
D purchases ledger only

6 Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.

April 7 invoice 360


12 cheque (after deducting $11 cash discount) 429
13 debit note 50
15 credit note 50

What was the closing balance on the statement of account on 30 April?

A $260 B $310 C $321 D $421

7 What is recorded in the sales journal?

A all money received from sales


B all sales transactions
C cash sales transactions
D credit sales transactions

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


4

8 Which statement about a two-column cash book is correct?

A It is a ledger account for bank transactions only.


B It is a ledger account for cash transactions only.
C It is a book of prime entry.
D It records cash discounts.

9 Which statements about trade discount are correct?

1 It is debited to the supplier’s account.


2 It is only given if the invoice is paid within the period allowed by the supplier.
3 It is shown as a deduction from the price of the goods on an invoice.
4 It is used to encourage bulk buying.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

10 Why is a trial balance prepared?

A to analyse the financial information


B to assist preparation of financial statements
C to control the costs of the business
D to evaluate the performance of the business

11 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.

1 No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid, $480.


2 No entry had been made for bank charges, $620.

What was the correct loss for the year?

A $14 900 B $15 860 C $16 140 D $17 100

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


5

12 Peter’s bank statement showed a debit balance of $600 on 1 April. The following transactions
took place in April.

total cheque deposits 7400


total cheque payments 6200
direct debit for insurance premium 180
credit transfer from customer 450

What was the bank statement balance on 30 April?

A $870 credit
B $870 debit
C $2070 credit
D $2070 debit

13 A sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $10 000.

It was found that a $2000 contra entry to the purchases ledger control account had been entered
on the wrong side of the sales ledger control account.

What was the correct debit balance on the sales ledger control account?

A $6000 B $8000 C $12 000 D $14 000

14 A business had a new extension to its workshop premises. It incurred the following expenditure.

building cost 65 000


legal fees 1 800
air conditioning system for the original workshop 2 300
air conditioning system for the new workshop extension 1 100
decorating the original workshop 1 400
decorating the new workshop extension 800

What was the total capital expenditure of the business?

A $67 900 B $70 200 C $71 000 D $72 400

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


6

15 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.

cost $20 000


working life 4 years
residual value $4000

It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.

What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?

A decrease by $2000
B increase by $2000
C decrease by $6000
D increase by $6000

16 A company’s financial year ended on 31 December 2019. On 1 December 2019 it paid rent,
$8000, for the four months ending 31 March 2020.

What was the opening balance on the rent account on 1 January 2020?

A $2000 credit
B $2000 debit
C $6000 credit
D $6000 debit

17 Alice’s financial year ends on 31 December.

The balances on her books on 1 January 2020 included the following.

commission receivable 250 debit


rent receivable 500 credit

What do these balances represent?

commission receivable rent receivable

A income outstanding income outstanding


B income outstanding income prepaid
C income prepaid income outstanding
D income prepaid income prepaid

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


7

18 Joseph sells goods on credit and maintains a provision for doubtful debts. He wants to increase
his provision for doubtful debts by $250.

Which journal entry records an increase in the provision for doubtful debts?

debit credit
$ $
A credit customer 250
income statement 250
B income statement 250
credit customer 250
C income statement 250
provision for doubtful debts 250
D provision for doubtful debts 250
income statement 250

19 Which items are deducted from the gross profit when calculating the profit for the year?

1 balance on the provision for doubtful debts account


2 carriage paid on goods supplied to customers
3 drawings made by the owner during the year
4 wages paid to employees during the year

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 only D 2 and 4

20 On 31 December 2019 John had net assets of $2000 and capital of $2000.

On 1 January 2020, goods costing $140 were sold on credit for $220.

What was the effect of this transaction on the statement of financial position?

net assets capital

$ $
A 80 decrease 80 decrease
B 80 increase 80 increase
C 220 decrease 220 decrease
D 220 increase 220 increase

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


8

21 At the end of his financial year, Raminder made an adjustment for rent owed by a tenant.

How did this affect Raminder’s financial statements?

profit for
current assets
the year

A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase

22 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.

What was the effect of this error?

profit for the year capital employed

A overstated no effect
B overstated understated
C understated no effect
D understated overstated

23 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.

They provided the following information.

Rajid Sunil

capital introduced 1 January 2019 $40 000 $20 000


during the year ended 31 December 2019
drawings $5 000 $3 500
share of work 50% 50%

They decided to draw up a partnership agreement for future years.

Which item would be most beneficial to Rajid in 2020?

A interest on capital
B interest on drawings
C limit on annual drawings
D partnership salaries

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


9

24 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.

salary 8000
drawings 2800
share of profit 4600

The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.

What was the closing balance on his current account?

A $30 000 B $38 000 C $40 800 D $43 600

25 Which item is shown in the income statement of a company and statement of changes in equity?

A interest on debentures accrued


B ordinary share dividend paid
C profit for the year
D transfer to general reserve

26 Hassan’s capital decreased by $200 over the year, even though he made a profit of $7000.

Which transactions caused this?

capital introduced drawings


$ $

A 1000 8200
B 1200 6000
C 2000 8800
D 2200 4600

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


10

27 Ahmed provided the following information.

trade receivables at 1 January 2019 15 000


for the year ended 31 December 2019:
credit sales 85 000
cash sales 12 000
cheques received from trade receivables 65 000
irrecoverable debts 2 000

By how much had the trade receivables increased by the end of the financial year?

A $18 000 B $30 000 C $33 000 D $45 000

28 Gordon provided the following information for the year.

revenue $90 000


opening inventory $8 000
closing inventory $2 000
mark up 50%

Gordon took goods, $7000, for his own use.

What were the purchases?

A $43 000 B $47 000 C $54 000 D $61 000

29 A trader provided the following information.

for the year ended 31 March 2020


revenue 250 000
purchases: cash 125 000
credit 115 000
at March 2020
trade payables 9 765

What was the trade payables turnover?

A 14 days B 15 days C 29 days D 31 days

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


11

30 On 1 January 2019 current assets totalled $16 000 and the current ratio was 2 : 1.

On 31 December 2019 the current liabilities had increased by 50% and the current ratio was
1.5 : 1.

What was the value of the current assets on 31 December 2019?

A $16 000 B $18 000 C $32 000 D $36 000

31 A company provided the following information about its liquid (acid test) ratio.

Year 1 1.2 : 1
Year 2 1.4 : 1
Year 3 1.6 : 1

Which would explain the changes in the ratio?

A Inventory is increasing.
B Other payables are decreasing.
C Trade payables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.

32 Which user of accounting statements is interested in past performance and taking remedial action
where necessary?

A government
B investors
C managers
D suppliers

33 Rashid’s financial year ends on 31 December. He paid rent on 1 February, 1 May, 1 August and
1 November.

An adjustment was made in the income statement for rent prepaid.

Which accounting principle was applied?

A duality
B matching
C money measurement
D prudence

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


12

34 Which statement describes the going concern principle?

A Accounting methods must be used consistently from one accounting period to the next.
B It is assumed that the business will continue to operate for the foreseeable future.
C Revenue is earned when legal title to goods passes from the seller to the buyer.
D The business is treated as being completely separate from the owner of the business.

35 Brad purchased a machine for $1000 on 1 January 2019. The machine was expected to last for
four years and have no residual value. On 31 December 2019 the same machine cost $1200 to
purchase.

At which value should the machine be included in the statement of financial position on
31 December 2019?

A current cost with no depreciation


B current cost with one year’s depreciation
C original purchase price with no depreciation
D original purchase price with one year’s depreciation

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 A 1

2 C 1

3 D 1

4 A 1

5 C 1

6 B 1

7 D 1

8 C 1

9 D 1

10 B 1

11 C 1

12 A 1

13 A 1

14 C 1

15 A 1

16 D 1

17 B 1

18 C 1

19 D 1

20 B 1

21 D 1

22 C 1

23 A 1

24 B 1

25 C 1

26 A 1

27 A 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 3


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 D 1

30 B 1

31 B 1

32 C 1

33 B 1

34 B 1

35 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*9287386594*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

IB20 06_0452_11/4RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Which statement is correct?

A Accounting involves measuring profits and losses.


B Accounting is the recording of financial transactions.
C Book-keeping involves communicating financial data.
D Book-keeping requires the use of ratio analysis.

2 The balances remaining on the books of a business after the preparation of the income statement
included the following.

loan from XY Finance 10 000


wages due 620
rent prepaid 240
trade receivables 3 300
trade payables 4 650
motor vehicles 8 000
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 2 000

What was the total of the liabilities?

A $13 920 B $14 890 C $15 270 D $17 270

3 On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.

What entry would Nina make on 12 April?

account to be debited account to be credited

A irrecoverable debts bank


B irrecoverable debts Zaffar
C provision for doubtful debts Zaffar
D Zaffar bank

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


3

4 Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.

April 2 Ann returned goods, $30, to Cindy.


14 Ann bought goods, $210, from Cindy, and paid in cash.

Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?

A Ann owes Cindy $490.


B Ann owes Cindy $700.
C Cindy owes Ann $490.
D Cindy owes Ann $700.

5 Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.

Where will Tumelo record the return of goods?

A cash book and sales ledger


B general ledger only
C general ledger and purchases ledger
D purchases ledger only

6 Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.

April 7 invoice 360


12 cheque (after deducting $11 cash discount) 429
13 debit note 50
15 credit note 50

What was the closing balance on the statement of account on 30 April?

A $260 B $310 C $321 D $421

7 What is recorded in the sales journal?

A all money received from sales


B all sales transactions
C cash sales transactions
D credit sales transactions

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


4

8 Which statement about a two-column cash book is correct?

A It is a ledger account for bank transactions only.


B It is a ledger account for cash transactions only.
C It is a book of prime entry.
D It records cash discounts.

9 Which statements about trade discount are correct?

1 It is debited to the supplier’s account.


2 It is only given if the invoice is paid within the period allowed by the supplier.
3 It is shown as a deduction from the price of the goods on an invoice.
4 It is used to encourage bulk buying.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

10 Why is a trial balance prepared?

A to analyse the financial information


B to assist preparation of financial statements
C to control the costs of the business
D to evaluate the performance of the business

11 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.

1 No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid, $480.


2 No entry had been made for bank charges, $620.

What was the correct loss for the year?

A $14 900 B $15 860 C $16 140 D $17 100

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


5

12 Peter’s bank statement showed a debit balance of $600 on 1 April. The following transactions
took place in April.

total cheque deposits 7400


total cheque payments 6200
direct debit for insurance premium 180
credit transfer from customer 450

What was the bank statement balance on 30 April?

A $870 credit
B $870 debit
C $2070 credit
D $2070 debit

13 A sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $10 000.

It was found that a $2000 contra entry to the purchases ledger control account had been entered
on the wrong side of the sales ledger control account.

What was the correct debit balance on the sales ledger control account?

A $6000 B $8000 C $12 000 D $14 000

14 A business had a new extension to its workshop premises. It incurred the following expenditure.

building cost 65 000


legal fees 1 800
air conditioning system for the original workshop 2 300
air conditioning system for the new workshop extension 1 100
decorating the original workshop 1 400
decorating the new workshop extension 800

What was the total capital expenditure of the business?

A $67 900 B $70 200 C $71 000 D $72 400

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


6

15 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.

cost $20 000


working life 4 years
residual value $4000

It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.

What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?

A decrease by $2000
B increase by $2000
C decrease by $6000
D increase by $6000

16 A company’s financial year ended on 31 December 2019. On 1 December 2019 it paid rent,
$8000, for the four months ending 31 March 2020.

What was the opening balance on the rent account on 1 January 2020?

A $2000 credit
B $2000 debit
C $6000 credit
D $6000 debit

17 Alice’s financial year ends on 31 December.

The balances on her books on 1 January 2020 included the following.

commission receivable 250 debit


rent receivable 500 credit

What do these balances represent?

commission receivable rent receivable

A income outstanding income outstanding


B income outstanding income prepaid
C income prepaid income outstanding
D income prepaid income prepaid

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


7

18 Joseph sells goods on credit and maintains a provision for doubtful debts. He wants to increase
his provision for doubtful debts by $250.

Which journal entry records an increase in the provision for doubtful debts?

debit credit
$ $
A credit customer 250
income statement 250
B income statement 250
credit customer 250
C income statement 250
provision for doubtful debts 250
D provision for doubtful debts 250
income statement 250

19 Which items are deducted from the gross profit when calculating the profit for the year?

1 balance on the provision for doubtful debts account


2 carriage paid on goods supplied to customers
3 drawings made by the owner during the year
4 wages paid to employees during the year

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 only D 2 and 4

20 On 31 December 2019 John had net assets of $2000 and capital of $2000.

On 1 January 2020, goods costing $140 were sold on credit for $220.

What was the effect of this transaction on the statement of financial position?

net assets capital

$ $
A 80 decrease 80 decrease
B 80 increase 80 increase
C 220 decrease 220 decrease
D 220 increase 220 increase

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


8

21 At the end of his financial year, Raminder made an adjustment for rent owed by a tenant.

How did this affect Raminder’s financial statements?

profit for
current assets
the year

A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase

22 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.

What was the effect of this error?

profit for the year capital employed

A overstated no effect
B overstated understated
C understated no effect
D understated overstated

23 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.

They provided the following information.

Rajid Sunil

capital introduced 1 January 2019 $40 000 $20 000


during the year ended 31 December 2019
drawings $5 000 $3 500
share of work 50% 50%

They decided to draw up a partnership agreement for future years.

Which item would be most beneficial to Rajid in 2020?

A interest on capital
B interest on drawings
C limit on annual drawings
D partnership salaries

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


9

24 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.

salary 8000
drawings 2800
share of profit 4600

The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.

What was the closing balance on his current account?

A $30 000 B $38 000 C $40 800 D $43 600

25 Which item is shown in the income statement of a company and statement of changes in equity?

A interest on debentures accrued


B ordinary share dividend paid
C profit for the year
D transfer to general reserve

26 Hassan’s capital decreased by $200 over the year, even though he made a profit of $7000.

Which transactions caused this?

capital introduced drawings


$ $

A 1000 8200
B 1200 6000
C 2000 8800
D 2200 4600

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


10

27 Ahmed provided the following information.

trade receivables at 1 January 2019 15 000


for the year ended 31 December 2019:
credit sales 85 000
cash sales 12 000
cheques received from trade receivables 65 000
irrecoverable debts 2 000

By how much had the trade receivables increased by the end of the financial year?

A $18 000 B $30 000 C $33 000 D $45 000

28 Gordon provided the following information for the year.

revenue $90 000


opening inventory $8 000
closing inventory $2 000
mark up 50%

Gordon took goods, $7000, for his own use.

What were the purchases?

A $43 000 B $47 000 C $54 000 D $61 000

29 A trader provided the following information.

for the year ended 31 March 2020


revenue 250 000
purchases: cash 125 000
credit 115 000
at March 2020
trade payables 9 765

What was the trade payables turnover?

A 14 days B 15 days C 29 days D 31 days

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


11

30 On 1 January 2019 current assets totalled $16 000 and the current ratio was 2 : 1.

On 31 December 2019 the current liabilities had increased by 50% and the current ratio was
1.5 : 1.

What was the value of the current assets on 31 December 2019?

A $16 000 B $18 000 C $32 000 D $36 000

31 A company provided the following information about its liquid (acid test) ratio.

Year 1 1.2 : 1
Year 2 1.4 : 1
Year 3 1.6 : 1

Which would explain the changes in the ratio?

A Inventory is increasing.
B Other payables are decreasing.
C Trade payables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.

32 Which user of accounting statements is interested in past performance and taking remedial action
where necessary?

A government
B investors
C managers
D suppliers

33 Rashid’s financial year ends on 31 December. He paid rent on 1 February, 1 May, 1 August and
1 November.

An adjustment was made in the income statement for rent prepaid.

Which accounting principle was applied?

A duality
B matching
C money measurement
D prudence

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20 [Turn over


12

34 Which statement describes the going concern principle?

A Accounting methods must be used consistently from one accounting period to the next.
B It is assumed that the business will continue to operate for the foreseeable future.
C Revenue is earned when legal title to goods passes from the seller to the buyer.
D The business is treated as being completely separate from the owner of the business.

35 Brad purchased a machine for $1000 on 1 January 2019. The machine was expected to last for
four years and have no residual value. On 31 December 2019 the same machine cost $1200 to
purchase.

At which value should the machine be included in the statement of financial position on
31 December 2019?

A current cost with no depreciation


B current cost with one year’s depreciation
C original purchase price with no depreciation
D original purchase price with one year’s depreciation

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/M/J/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 A 1

2 C 1

3 D 1

4 A 1

5 C 1

6 B 1

7 D 1

8 C 1

9 D 1

10 B 1

11 C 1

12 A 1

13 A 1

14 C 1

15 A 1

16 D 1

17 B 1

18 C 1

19 D 1

20 B 1

21 D 1

22 C 1

23 A 1

24 B 1

25 C 1

26 A 1

27 A 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 3


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 D 1

30 B 1

31 B 1

32 C 1

33 B 1

34 B 1

35 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*3976346872*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

IB20 06_0452_12/3RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Which are examples of book-keeping?

1 entering details of a cheque received from a customer in a cash book


2 entering details of goods purchased on credit in a purchases journal
3 producing an income statement to calculate the profit for the year
4 recording details of credit sales in the account of a credit customer

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 2 and 4 C 1 and 2 only D 3 and 4

2 How does a trader use the information provided by financial statements?

A to calculate the amount of cash drawings taken


B to calculate the amount that is owed by trade receivables
C to check the balance shown on a bank statement
D to compare the business performance over a number of years

3 A trader bought new fixtures. He paid half of the purchase price in cash and agreed to pay the
balance in two months’ time.

How does this purchase affect the accounting equation?

owner’s
assets liabilities
equity

A decrease decrease no effect


B decrease no effect increase
C increase decrease increase
D increase no effect increase

4 On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.

What entry would Nina make on 12 April?

account to be debited account to be credited

A irrecoverable debts bank


B irrecoverable debts Zaffar
C provision for doubtful debts Zaffar
D Zaffar bank

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20


3

5 Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.

April 2 Ann returned goods, $30, to Cindy.


14 Ann bought goods, $210, from Cindy, and paid in cash.

Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?

A Ann owes Cindy $490.


B Ann owes Cindy $700.
C Cindy owes Ann $490.
D Cindy owes Ann $700.

6 Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.

Where will Tumelo record the return of goods?

A cash book and sales ledger


B general ledger only
C general ledger and purchases ledger
D purchases ledger only

7 Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.

April 7 invoice 360


12 cheque (after deducting $11 cash discount) 429
13 debit note 50
15 credit note 50

What was the closing balance on the statement of account on 30 April?

A $260 B $310 C $321 D $421

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20 [Turn over


4

8 A business sold goods with a list price of $50 each.

The terms of trade were:

trade discount for more than 20 items bought 10%


cash discount if customer pays within 30 days 4%

How much was received in full settlement from a customer who bought 25 items and paid after
35 days?

A $900 B $1075 C $1125 D $1200

9 Paul rents premises from John and pays the rent by credit transfer.

How would John record this?

account debited account credited

A bank rent receivable


B cash rent receivable
C rent receivable bank
D rent receivable cash

10 Sita discovers that $1000 received from the sale of fixtures had been entered in the sales
account.

Which journal entry corrected this error?

debit credit
$ $

bank 1000
A
disposal of fixtures 1000
bank 1000
B
fixtures 1000
sales 1000
C
disposal of fixtures 1000
sales 1000
D
fixtures 1000

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20


5

11 The totals of a trial balance did not agree and $200 was debited to a suspense account. On
checking the books it was found that two errors had been made.

1 A sales invoice for $700 had been recorded in the sales journal as $770.
2 The sales journal had been totalled incorrectly.

What was the error made in totalling the sales journal?

A overcast by $130
B overcast by $200
C undercast by $130
D undercast by $200

12 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.

1 No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid, $480.


2 No entry had been made for bank charges, $620.

What was the correct loss for the year?

A $14 900 B $15 860 C $16 140 D $17 100

13 What would result in a cash book balance being lower than the balance showing on a bank
statement?

A A cheque received from a customer was not recorded in the bank statement.
B A customer’s cheque dishonoured by the bank appeared only on the bank statement.
C Payment by a customer directly into the bank was not recorded in the cash book.
D Payment of insurance by standing order was not recorded in the cash book.

14 Thembi is preparing her sales ledger control account. She needs to know:

1 The total for goods which have been returned by credit customers.
2 The amount owed by credit customers which have been written off as irrecoverable.

Where can she obtain this information?

goods returned irrecoverable debts

A purchase returns account irrecoverable debts account


B purchase returns journal general journal
C sales returns account irrecoverable debts account
D sales returns journal general journal

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20 [Turn over


6

15 The following payments were made when a new machine was purchased.

cost of the machine 32 000


charge for delivering the machine 1 800
insurance of the machine 2 000
wages of employees installing the machine 1 300

How much was the capital expenditure?

A $32 000 B $33 300 C $35 100 D $37 100

16 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.

cost $20 000


working life 4 years
residual value $4000

It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.

What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?

A decrease by $2000
B increase by $2000
C decrease by $6000
D increase by $6000

17 Elzevir purchased a motor vehicle costing $8000 on 1 January 2018. It is depreciated at 40% on
the reducing balance basis.

Which journal entry records the depreciation for the year ended 31 December 2019?

debit credit
A income statement 1920
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 1920
B income statement 3200
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 3200
C provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 1920
motor vehicles 1920
D provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 3200
motor vehicles 3200

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20


7

18 Alice’s financial year ends on 31 December.

The balances on her books on 1 January 2020 included the following.

commission receivable 250 debit


rent receivable 500 credit

What do these balances represent?

commission receivable rent receivable

A income outstanding income outstanding


B income outstanding income prepaid
C income prepaid income outstanding
D income prepaid income prepaid

19 Annual rental income due from Kumar, a tenant, is $3600. At the start of the year Kumar had
prepaid rent of $900. At the end of the year he owed two months’ rent.

How much rent was received from Kumar during the year?

A $2100 B $3300 C $3900 D $5100

20 Joel’s inventory on 31 December 2019 was valued at $4800. It was discovered that:

1 Goods, cost $100, had not been included.


2 Goods, cost $170, had been included at net realisable value $210.

What was the effect of the incorrect inventory valuation on Joel’s financial statements at
31 December 2019?

profit for
$ inventory $ equity $
the year

A overstated 40 understated 40 nil


B overstated 60 understated 60 nil
C understated 40 understated 40 understated 40
D understated 60 understated 60 understated 60

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20 [Turn over


8

21 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.

What was the effect of this error?

profit for the year capital employed

A overstated no effect
B overstated understated
C understated no effect
D understated overstated

22 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.

They provided the following information.

Rajid Sunil

capital introduced 1 January 2019 $40 000 $20 000


during the year ended 31 December 2019
drawings $5 000 $3 500
share of work 50% 50%

They decided to draw up a partnership agreement for future years.

Which item would be most beneficial to Rajid in 2020?

A interest on capital
B interest on drawings
C limit on annual drawings
D partnership salaries

23 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.

salary 8000
drawings 2800
share of profit 4600

The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.

What was the closing balance on his current account?

A $30 000 B $38 000 C $40 800 D $43 600

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20


9

24 The statement of financial position of X Limited at 31 December 2018 included the following:

ordinary share capital 40 000


general reserve 8 000
retained earnings 65 000
8% debentures (repayable 2025) 30 000

Profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 was $42 000 and dividends paid totalled $10 000.

What was the total equity on 31 December 2019?

A $137 000 B $145 000 C $155 000 D $175 000

25 Which is a feature of debentures?

A are a long-term liability of a company


B carry a fixed rate of dividend
C carry voting rights
D on liquidation are paid back after shareholders

26 Which cost is part of the prime cost for a manufacturing business?

A carriage inwards
B carriage outwards
C factory rent
D factory supervisor’s salary

27 A manufacturing business provided the following information.

prime cost 236 000


factory overheads 42 000
opening work in progress 8 000
closing work in progress 6 000

What was the factory cost of production?

A $234 000 B $238 000 C $276 000 D $280 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20 [Turn over


10

28 A trader provided the following information.

trade receivables at start of the year 5 000


trade receivables at end of the year 8 500
cash received from trade receivables 34 700
irrecoverable debts written off 200
discount allowed 185

What was the amount of the credit sales?

A $38 200 B $38 385 C $38 400 D $38 585

29 Gordon provided the following information for the year.

revenue $90 000


opening inventory $8 000
closing inventory $2 000
mark up 50%

Gordon took goods, $7000, for his own use.

What were the purchases?

A $43 000 B $47 000 C $54 000 D $61 000

30 Sabelo’s liquid (acid test) ratio was higher on 1 January 2019 than it was on 31 December 2019.

What could have caused this?

A bank overdraft decreased


B inventory decreased
C other payables decreased
D trade receivables decreased

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20


11

31 The following ratios have been calculated for a trader.

year 1 year 2

profit margin 15% 20%


return on capital employed (ROCE) 9% 6%

What explains these changes?

A Drawings have increased by more than profit for the year.


B Gross profit has increased but profit for the year has decreased.
C Profit for the year has increased and capital has been introduced.
D Profit for the year has increased and a long-term loan has been repaid.

32 Which external parties would be interested in the accounting ratios of a business?

A government
B investors
C managers
D tax authorities

33 At the end of the financial year, a company did not account for the unused stationary valued
at $50.

Which accounting principle did the company apply?

A matching
B materiality
C money measurement
D prudence

34 A trader wrote off the balance on a credit customer’s account as irrecoverable.

Which accounting principle was applied?

A business entity
B consistency
C money measurement
D prudence

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20 [Turn over


12

35 A limited company applied the accounting objective of comparability in preparing its financial
statements.

What is the effect of this on the interested parties?

A They can be sure that information in the financial statements is up to date.


B They can identify similarities with the financial statements of other businesses.
C They can understand the financial statements easily.
D They can use the financial statements in decision-making.

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/M/J/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 B 1

2 D 1

3 D 1

4 D 1

5 A 1

6 C 1

7 B 1

8 C 1

9 A 1

10 C 1

11 B 1

12 C 1

13 C 1

14 D 1

15 C 1

16 A 1

17 A 1

18 B 1

19 A 1

20 D 1

21 C 1

22 A 1

23 B 1

24 B 1

25 A 1

26 A 1

27 D 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 3


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 D 1

30 D 1

31 C 1

32 B 1

33 B 1

34 D 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*4322546424*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

IB20 06_0452_13/FP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Which are examples of book-keeping?

1 entering details of a cheque received from a customer in a cash book


2 entering details of goods purchased on credit in a purchases journal
3 producing an income statement to calculate the profit for the year
4 recording details of credit sales in the account of a credit customer

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 2 and 4 C 1 and 2 only D 3 and 4

2 How does a trader use the information provided by financial statements?

A to calculate the amount of cash drawings taken


B to calculate the amount that is owed by trade receivables
C to check the balance shown on a bank statement
D to compare the business performance over a number of years

3 A trader bought new fixtures. He paid half of the purchase price in cash and agreed to pay the
balance in two months’ time.

How does this purchase affect the accounting equation?

owner’s
assets liabilities
equity

A decrease decrease no effect


B decrease no effect increase
C increase decrease increase
D increase no effect increase

4 On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.

What entry would Nina make on 12 April?

account to be debited account to be credited

A irrecoverable debts bank


B irrecoverable debts Zaffar
C provision for doubtful debts Zaffar
D Zaffar bank

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20


3

5 Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.

April 2 Ann returned goods, $30, to Cindy.


14 Ann bought goods, $210, from Cindy, and paid in cash.

Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?

A Ann owes Cindy $490.


B Ann owes Cindy $700.
C Cindy owes Ann $490.
D Cindy owes Ann $700.

6 Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.

Where will Tumelo record the return of goods?

A cash book and sales ledger


B general ledger only
C general ledger and purchases ledger
D purchases ledger only

7 Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.

April 7 invoice 360


12 cheque (after deducting $11 cash discount) 429
13 debit note 50
15 credit note 50

What was the closing balance on the statement of account on 30 April?

A $260 B $310 C $321 D $421

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20 [Turn over


4

8 A business sold goods with a list price of $50 each.

The terms of trade were:

trade discount for more than 20 items bought 10%


cash discount if customer pays within 30 days 4%

How much was received in full settlement from a customer who bought 25 items and paid after
35 days?

A $900 B $1075 C $1125 D $1200

9 Paul rents premises from John and pays the rent by credit transfer.

How would John record this?

account debited account credited

A bank rent receivable


B cash rent receivable
C rent receivable bank
D rent receivable cash

10 Sita discovers that $1000 received from the sale of fixtures had been entered in the sales
account.

Which journal entry corrected this error?

debit credit
$ $

bank 1000
A
disposal of fixtures 1000
bank 1000
B
fixtures 1000
sales 1000
C
disposal of fixtures 1000
sales 1000
D
fixtures 1000

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20


5

11 The totals of a trial balance did not agree and $200 was debited to a suspense account. On
checking the books it was found that two errors had been made.

1 A sales invoice for $700 had been recorded in the sales journal as $770.
2 The sales journal had been totalled incorrectly.

What was the error made in totalling the sales journal?

A overcast by $130
B overcast by $200
C undercast by $130
D undercast by $200

12 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.

1 No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid, $480.


2 No entry had been made for bank charges, $620.

What was the correct loss for the year?

A $14 900 B $15 860 C $16 140 D $17 100

13 What would result in a cash book balance being lower than the balance showing on a bank
statement?

A A cheque received from a customer was not recorded in the bank statement.
B A customer’s cheque dishonoured by the bank appeared only on the bank statement.
C Payment by a customer directly into the bank was not recorded in the cash book.
D Payment of insurance by standing order was not recorded in the cash book.

14 Thembi is preparing her sales ledger control account. She needs to know:

1 The total for goods which have been returned by credit customers.
2 The amount owed by credit customers which have been written off as irrecoverable.

Where can she obtain this information?

goods returned irrecoverable debts

A purchase returns account irrecoverable debts account


B purchase returns journal general journal
C sales returns account irrecoverable debts account
D sales returns journal general journal

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20 [Turn over


6

15 The following payments were made when a new machine was purchased.

cost of the machine 32 000


charge for delivering the machine 1 800
insurance of the machine 2 000
wages of employees installing the machine 1 300

How much was the capital expenditure?

A $32 000 B $33 300 C $35 100 D $37 100

16 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.

cost $20 000


working life 4 years
residual value $4000

It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.

What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?

A decrease by $2000
B increase by $2000
C decrease by $6000
D increase by $6000

17 Elzevir purchased a motor vehicle costing $8000 on 1 January 2018. It is depreciated at 40% on
the reducing balance basis.

Which journal entry records the depreciation for the year ended 31 December 2019?

debit credit
A income statement 1920
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 1920
B income statement 3200
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 3200
C provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 1920
motor vehicles 1920
D provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 3200
motor vehicles 3200

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20


7

18 Alice’s financial year ends on 31 December.

The balances on her books on 1 January 2020 included the following.

commission receivable 250 debit


rent receivable 500 credit

What do these balances represent?

commission receivable rent receivable

A income outstanding income outstanding


B income outstanding income prepaid
C income prepaid income outstanding
D income prepaid income prepaid

19 Annual rental income due from Kumar, a tenant, is $3600. At the start of the year Kumar had
prepaid rent of $900. At the end of the year he owed two months’ rent.

How much rent was received from Kumar during the year?

A $2100 B $3300 C $3900 D $5100

20 Joel’s inventory on 31 December 2019 was valued at $4800. It was discovered that:

1 Goods, cost $100, had not been included.


2 Goods, cost $170, had been included at net realisable value $210.

What was the effect of the incorrect inventory valuation on Joel’s financial statements at
31 December 2019?

profit for
$ inventory $ equity $
the year

A overstated 40 understated 40 nil


B overstated 60 understated 60 nil
C understated 40 understated 40 understated 40
D understated 60 understated 60 understated 60

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20 [Turn over


8

21 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.

What was the effect of this error?

profit for the year capital employed

A overstated no effect
B overstated understated
C understated no effect
D understated overstated

22 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.

They provided the following information.

Rajid Sunil

capital introduced 1 January 2019 $40 000 $20 000


during the year ended 31 December 2019
drawings $5 000 $3 500
share of work 50% 50%

They decided to draw up a partnership agreement for future years.

Which item would be most beneficial to Rajid in 2020?

A interest on capital
B interest on drawings
C limit on annual drawings
D partnership salaries

23 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.

salary 8000
drawings 2800
share of profit 4600

The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.

What was the closing balance on his current account?

A $30 000 B $38 000 C $40 800 D $43 600

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20


9

24 The statement of financial position of X Limited at 31 December 2018 included the following:

ordinary share capital 40 000


general reserve 8 000
retained earnings 65 000
8% debentures (repayable 2025) 30 000

Profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 was $42 000 and dividends paid totalled $10 000.

What was the total equity on 31 December 2019?

A $137 000 B $145 000 C $155 000 D $175 000

25 Which is a feature of debentures?

A are a long-term liability of a company


B carry a fixed rate of dividend
C carry voting rights
D on liquidation are paid back after shareholders

26 Which cost is part of the prime cost for a manufacturing business?

A carriage inwards
B carriage outwards
C factory rent
D factory supervisor’s salary

27 A manufacturing business provided the following information.

prime cost 236 000


factory overheads 42 000
opening work in progress 8 000
closing work in progress 6 000

What was the factory cost of production?

A $234 000 B $238 000 C $276 000 D $280 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20 [Turn over


10

28 A trader provided the following information.

trade receivables at start of the year 5 000


trade receivables at end of the year 8 500
cash received from trade receivables 34 700
irrecoverable debts written off 200
discount allowed 185

What was the amount of the credit sales?

A $38 200 B $38 385 C $38 400 D $38 585

29 Gordon provided the following information for the year.

revenue $90 000


opening inventory $8 000
closing inventory $2 000
mark up 50%

Gordon took goods, $7000, for his own use.

What were the purchases?

A $43 000 B $47 000 C $54 000 D $61 000

30 Sabelo’s liquid (acid test) ratio was higher on 1 January 2019 than it was on 31 December 2019.

What could have caused this?

A bank overdraft decreased


B inventory decreased
C other payables decreased
D trade receivables decreased

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20


11

31 The following ratios have been calculated for a trader.

year 1 year 2

profit margin 15% 20%


return on capital employed (ROCE) 9% 6%

What explains these changes?

A Drawings have increased by more than profit for the year.


B Gross profit has increased but profit for the year has decreased.
C Profit for the year has increased and capital has been introduced.
D Profit for the year has increased and a long-term loan has been repaid.

32 Which external parties would be interested in the accounting ratios of a business?

A government
B investors
C managers
D tax authorities

33 At the end of the financial year, a company did not account for the unused stationary valued
at $50.

Which accounting principle did the company apply?

A matching
B materiality
C money measurement
D prudence

34 A trader wrote off the balance on a credit customer’s account as irrecoverable.

Which accounting principle was applied?

A business entity
B consistency
C money measurement
D prudence

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20 [Turn over


12

35 A limited company applied the accounting objective of comparability in preparing its financial
statements.

What is the effect of this on the interested parties?

A They can be sure that information in the financial statements is up to date.


B They can identify similarities with the financial statements of other businesses.
C They can understand the financial statements easily.
D They can use the financial statements in decision-making.

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/M/J/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/13 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 B 1

2 D 1

3 D 1

4 D 1

5 A 1

6 C 1

7 B 1

8 C 1

9 A 1

10 C 1

11 B 1

12 C 1

13 C 1

14 D 1

15 C 1

16 A 1

17 A 1

18 B 1

19 A 1

20 D 1

21 C 1

22 A 1

23 B 1

24 B 1

25 A 1

26 A 1

27 D 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 3


0452/13 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 D 1

30 D 1

31 C 1

32 B 1

33 B 1

34 D 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 9 1 1 3 1 4 5 8 2 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 24 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (RCL (GO)) 186085/2


© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 The ZED Sports Club has a shop which sells sportswear. The following details relate to the shop
for the year ended 29 February 2020.

$
Opening inventory 900
Closing inventory 970
Purchases 7600

Mark-up 40%

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the shop sales for year ended 29 February 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

All the shop sales and purchases are for cash. All the club’s receipts are paid into the bank and
all payments are made by cheque. On 1 March 2019 the club’s bank balance was overdrawn by
$845.

In addition to the shop sales and purchases, the following receipts and payments were made
during the year ended 29 February 2020.

$
Subscriptions received 11 400
Competition fees received 915
Payments for competition prizes 390
Purchases of fittings 4 000
Rent and insurance 4 575
Wages of shop assistant 2 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


3

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare the receipts and payments account for the ZED Sports Club for the year ended
29 February 2020. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 March 2020.

ZED Sports Club


Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 29 February 2020

Date Details $ Date Details $

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ……...

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………

……… …….………………… ……… ……… …….………………… ………


[8]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over


4

The club’s bank statement at 29 February 2020 showed a positive balance of $7162.

On comparing the bank statement with the cash book, the treasurer found:

1 Competition fees, $260, had not been recorded by the bank.

2 A cheque paid for $25 for competition prizes had been charged twice by the bank.

3 The payment for fittings, $4000, was made on 27 February 2020, and had not been recorded
on the bank statement.

REQUIRED

(c) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement for ZED Sports Club at 29 February 2020.

ZED Sports Club


Bank Reconciliation Statement at 29 February 2020

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

(d) State three differences between a receipts and payments account and an income and
expenditure account.

Receipts and payments account Income and expenditure account

[3]

[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20
5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over


6

2 Ame provided the following balances from his books at 31 March 2020.

$
Capital 10 369
Drawings 4 000
Equipment at cost 15 500
Provision for depreciation of equipment 3 100
Inventory at 1 April 2019 1 765
Trade receivables 1 290
Bank overdraft 475
Trade payables 1 600
Sales 31 250
Purchases 18 330
Purchases returns 910
Carriage inwards 640
Discount received 815
Commission receivable 1 500
Rent and insurance 5 700
Office expenses 2 425

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


7

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Ame’s trial balance at 31 March 2020.

Show the difference in the trial balance totals as a suspense account balance.

Ame
Trial Balance at 31 March 2020

Debit Credit
$ $

Capital …………………… ……………………

Drawings …………………… ……………………

Equipment at cost …………………… ……………………

Provision for depreciation of equipment …………………… ……………………

Inventory at 1 April 2019 …………………… ……………………

Trade receivables …………………… ……………………

Bank overdraft …………………… ……………………

Trade payables …………………… ……………………

Sales …………………… ……………………

Purchases …………………… ……………………

Purchases returns …………………… ……………………

Carriage inwards …………………… ……………………

Discount received …………………… ……………………

Commission receivable …………………… ……………………

Rent and insurance …………………… ……………………

Office expenses …………………… ……………………

Suspense …………………… ……………………

…………………… ……………………

______________ ______________

______________ ______________

[6]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over


8

Ame later discovered several errors had been made in the accounting records.

REQUIRED

(b) Complete the table to show the entries required to correct each error.
The first one has been completed as an example.

Entries required to correct the error


Error Debit Credit
Account $ Account $

No entry had been made for cash Cash 60 Sales 60


sales, $60.

Office expenses, $240, had been …………….. ………. …………… ………..


credited to the wages account.
No debit entry had been made. ……………… ………. …………….. ……….

The purchases journal total for


March 2020 was $2165. This ……………… ………. …………….. ……….
amount was incorrectly recorded
in the purchases account as ……………… ………. …………….. ……….
$2651.

An insurance payment, $375, had


been correctly recorded in the ……………… ………. …………….. ……….
cash book but no other entry had
been made. ……………… ………. …………….. ……….

The purchase of equipment,


$800, was correctly recorded in ……………… ………. …………….. ……….
the cash book but debited to the
office expenses account. ……………… ………. …………….. ……….

[9]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


9

(c) Prepare the suspense account. Start with the difference on the trial balance prepared in
Part (a). Balance or total the account as necessary.

Ame
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ……...


[5]

[Total 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over


10

3 Chippo owns a manufacturing business which produces product S. She provided the following
information for the year ended 30 April 2020.

$
Revenue 254 000
Purchases of raw materials 46 500
Purchases of finished goods 59 000
Wages of factory operatives 38 250
Royalties paid to the inventor of product S 7 690
Factory general expenses 4 500
Factory fuel and power 5 325
Rent and insurance 28 000
Factory machinery at cost 60 000
Provision for depreciation of factory machinery 21 600
Inventory at 1 May 2019: raw materials 3 120
work in progress 5 400
finished goods 8 220

Additional information

1 Factory machinery is depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing balance method.

2 Rent and insurance is to be split equally between the factory and the office.

3 The annual salary of the factory supervisor is $28 500.

4 Closing inventory at 30 April 2020 was:


$
Raw materials 3000
Work in progress 5590
Finished goods 7885

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Chippo’s manufacturing account for the year ended 30 April 2020.

Chippo
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 30 April 2020
$ $

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

[10]
© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over
12

(b) Prepare Chippo’s income statement (trading account section) for the year ended
30 April 2020.

Chippo
Income Statement (Trading Account section) for the year ended 30 April 2020

$ $

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………………… ……………… ………………

[4]

(c) Complete the table by placing a tick (ü) in the correct column, to indicate whether each of the
following actions would increase or decrease Chippo’s gross margin.

Action Increase gross margin Decrease gross margin


Increase wages of
factory supervisor
Reduce trade discount
allowed to customers
[2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


13

Chippo is considering converting her sole trader business into a limited company because she
thinks that this will make it easier for her to obtain finance for future expansion.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Chippo whether or not she should convert her business to a limited company, in order
to obtain finance. Justify your answer by providing advantages and disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over


14

4 Rani is a trader. Her financial year ends on 31 March.

She provided the following information about her three types of inventory at 31 March 2020.

Inventory Number Cost Selling price Selling expenses


item of units per unit per unit per unit
$ $ $
A 110 17 20 2
B 85 18 19 1
C 90 15 16 2

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the total value of Rani’s inventory at 31 March 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

Rani later discovered that she had an amount of inventory of item D at 31 March 2020. This
inventory originally cost $1660. She considered this inventory to be obsolete.

REQUIRED

(b) Explain to Rani how the value of the inventory of item D affected the profit for the year ended
31 March 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


15

(c) Advise Rani whether or not she should stop purchasing item D to avoid having obsolete
inventory in the future. Justify your answer by providing advantages and disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over


16

Rani earns advertising income by placing advertising boards in her shop window. The
following details relate to her advertising income.

On 1 April 2019 Rani had received $420 in advance, and $300 was owed to her.

During the year ended 31 March 2020, Rani received cheque payments totalling $6000. She
decided to write off the amount of $300 due to her.

On 31 March 2020 Rani had received $500 in advance, and $400 was owed to her.

REQUIRED

(d) Prepare the advertising income account in the ledger of Rani for the year ended 31 March
2020. Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 April 2020.

Rani
Advertising income account

Date Details $ Date Details $

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ……...

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………

……… ……………………… ……… ……… …………………… ………


[7]

(e) Explain to Rani the effect on gross profit of recording sales of inventory as advertising income.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


17

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over


18

5 MPT Limited prepares its financial statements to 30 April each year.

The company’s retained earnings at 1 May 2019 were $14 000. The general reserve was $35 000.

During the year ended 30 April 2020 the following took place.

1 The company made a profit for the year of $28 000 after charging debenture interest.

2 A transfer of $5000 was made to the general reserve.

3 A dividend of $4500 was paid. No other dividends were payable for the year.

MPT Limited provided the following balances at 30 April 2020.

$
Fixtures and equipment at book value 152 000
Motor vehicles at book value 60 400
Inventory 30 330
Bank overdraft 6 200
Trade payables 24 900
Trade receivables 31 500
Provision for doubtful debts 630
5% Debentures (repayable 2025) 20 000
Ordinary share capital 150 000

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the retained earnings of MPT Limited at 30 April 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


19

(b) Prepare the statement of financial position for MPT Limited at 30 April 2020.

MPT Limited
Statement of Financial Position at 30 April 2020

$ $ $

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

………………………………………………… ……………… ……………… ………………

[7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over


20

The directors of MPT Limited are considering using the general reserve to repay the bank
overdraft.

REQUIRED

(c) State why it is not appropriate to use the general reserve to repay the bank overdraft.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) Calculate the return on capital employed (ROCE) for the year ended 30 April 2020. The
calculation should be correct to two decimal places and should be based on closing capital
employed.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


21

The directors are considering increasing dividend in 2021 as a way of increasing return on capital
employed (ROCE).

REQUIRED

(e) Advise the directors how the return on capital employed (ROCE) can be increased. Justify
your answer by commenting on both profit and capital employed.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


22

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


23

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


24

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 120

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 18 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) $ $ 4
Sales 10 542 (2)CF/(1)OF
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 900 *
Purchases 7 600
8 500
Less Closing inventory 970 *(1) 7 530 (1)OF
Gross profit 3 012

* mark for opening and closing inventory


Any format acceptable

1(b) ZED Sports Club 8


Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 29 February 2020

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2019
Feb 29 Shop sales (1)OF 10 542 Mar 1 Balance b/d (1) 845
Subscriptions } 11 400 2020
Competition fees }(1) 915 Feb 29 Shop purchases (1) 7 600
Competition prizes } 390
Fittings }(1) 4 000
Rent and insurance } 4 575
Wages – shop assistant }(1) 2 000
Balance c/d 3 447
22 857 22 857
2020
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 3 447

(1) Dates

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) ZED Sports Club 5


Bank Reconciliation Statement at 29 February 2020

$ $

Balance on bank statement 7 162 (1)


Add: Amount not yet credited – competition fees 260 (1)
Bank error 25 (1) 285
7 447
Less Cheque not yet presented – fittings 4 000 (1)
Balance in cash book 3 447 (1) OF

Alternative presentation

$ $

Balance in cash book 3 447 (1) OF


Add: Cheque not yet presented – fittings 4 000 (1)
7 447
Less: Amount not yet credited – competition fees 260 (1)
Bank error 25 (1) 285
Balance on bank statement 7 162 (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(d) 3
Receipts and payments account Income and expenditure account

Includes all money received and paid Includes income and expenses (1)

No adjustment made for accruals or Adjustments made for accruals and (1)
prepayments prepayments

Includes only monetary items Includes non-monetary items (1)


Includes only revenue receipts and
expenditure

Includes both capital and revenue items Balancing figure represents surplus/deficit (1)

Balancing figure represents bank balance (1)


Accept other valid points
Max (3) for comparative statements

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(a) Ame 6
Trial Balance at 31 March 2020

Debit Credit
$ $

Capital 10 369 }
Drawings 4 000 }(1)
Equipment at cost 15 500 }
Provision for depreciation of equipment 3 100 }(1)
Inventory at 1 April 2019 1 765
Trade receivables 1 290
Bank overdraft 475 (1)
Trade payables 1 600
Sales 31 250
Purchases 18 330
Purchases returns 910 }(1)
Carriage inwards 640 }
Discount received 815 }
Commission receivable 1 500 }(1)
Rent and Insurance 5 700
Office expenses 2 425
Suspense 369
50 019 50 019 (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(b) 9

Entries required to correct the error

Error Debit Credit

Account $ Account $

No entry had been made for cash sales, $60. Cash 60 Sales 60

Office expenses 240 (1) Suspense 480 (1)


Office expenses, $240, had been credited to the
wages account. No debit entry had been made.
Wages 240 (1)

The purchases journal total for March 2020 was Suspense 486 (1) Purchases 486 (1)
$2165. This amount was incorrectly recorded in
the purchases account as $2651.

An insurance payment, $375, had been correctly Rent and 375 (1) Suspense 375 (1)
recorded in the cash book but no other entry has insurance
been made.

The purchase of equipment, $800, was correctly Equipment 800 (1) Office expenses 800 (1)
recorded in the cash book but debited to the
office expenses account.

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c) Ame 5
Suspense account
Date Details $ Date Details $

2020 2020

Mar 31 Difference on trial balance (1) OF 369 Mar 31 Office expenses (1) 240

Wages (1) 240

Purchases (1) 486 Rent and insurance (1) 375

855 855

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) Chippo 10
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 30 April 2020

$ $
Cost of material consumed
Opening inventory of raw material 3 120
Purchases of raw material 46 500
49 620
Less Closing inventory of raw material 3 000 46 620 (1)
Direct wages 38 250 (1)
Direct expenses – royalties 7 690 (1)
Prime cost 92 560 (1)OF
Factory overheads
Wages – factory supervisor 28 500 (1)
Factory general expenses 4 500
Factory fuel and power 5 325
Rent and insurance (28 000 × 50%) 14 000 (1)
Depreciation of machinery (60 000 – 21 600) × 20% 7 680 (1) 60 005
152 565 (1)OF
Add opening work in progress 5 400 *
157 965
Less closing work in progress 5 590 *(1) both
Cost of production 152 375 (1) OF

*mark for both opening and closing work-in-progress

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Chippo 4
Income Statement (Trading Account section) for the year ended 30 April 2020

$ $
Revenue 254 000
Less Cost of sales
Opening inventory of finished goods 8 220
Cost of production 152 375 (1)OF
Purchases of finished goods 59 000 (1)
219 595
Less Closing inventory of finished goods 7 885 211 710 (1) OF
Gross profit 42 290 (1)OF

3(c) 2
Action Increase gross profit Decrease gross profit

Increase wages of factory


(1)
supervisor

Reduce trade discount


(1)
allowed to customers

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(d) Advantages 4
A manufacturing business such as Chippo’s, which requires machinery as well as premises, would usually operate as a
limited company (1)
Chippo would be able to raise some money by issuing shares (1)
It may be easier for Chippo to obtain finance for the proposed expansion if the business is a limited company (1)
If Chippo converts the business to a limited company, her personal assets will be safer (1)
If Chippo continues to manufacture as a sole trader, the lender could take her personal assets if the assets of the business
were insufficient to cover any loans (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
The lender is likely to require security over the company’s assets (1)
The lender could take possession of the assets of the business if payments were not made in accordance with the agreed
terms (1)
There will be costs involved in setting up and running a limited company (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Max (3) overall for advantages and disadvantages

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) 4
Item Net realisable Lower of cost and Number of units
value net realisable Total value
value
$ $ $

A 20 – 2 = 18 17 110 1 870 (1)

B 19 – 1 = 18 18 85 1 530 (1)

C 16 – 2 = 14 14 90 1 260 (1)

Total 4 660 (1)

4(b) The net realisable value is lower than the cost so item D should be recorded at its net realisable of zero (1) 2
There will be no effect on profit (1)

4(c) Advantages 5
The obsolete inventory is a loss to Rani’s business (1)
She will wish to avoid such losses in the future (1)
Holding inventory necessitates storage costs (1)
If Rani stops buying item D, she may have funds available for other business opportunities (1)
Rani had difficulty in monitoring four types of inventory (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Rani needs to consider that it may be risky to stock only three of the four lines of inventory in the future (1)
There may be customer demand in future for item D (1)
Customers who have to start buying item D from another supplier may also buy items A, B and C from them (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(d) Rani 7
Advertising income account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2019 2019
Apl 1 Balance b/d *(1) 300 Apl 1 Balance b/d* 420
2020 2020
Mar 31 Income statement (1)OF 6 320 Mar 31 Bank (1) 6 000
Balance c/d 500 Irrecoverable debts (1) 300
Balance c/d 400
7 120 7 120
2020 2020
Apl 1 Balance b/d (1) 400 Apl 1 Balance b/d (1) 500
(1) Dates
* mark for both balances

4(e) Sales of inventory are included in calculation of the gross profit (1) 2
Advertising income is included as other income after the calculation of the gross profit (1)
If sales of inventory are included as advertising income the gross profit will be understated (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) $ $ 3
Retained earnings 1 May 2019 14 000 }
Profit for the year 28 000 } (1)
42 000
Less Transfer to general reserve 5 000 }
Dividend 4 500 }(1) 9 500
Retained earnings 30 April 2020 32 500 (1) OF

Any format acceptable

© UCLES 2020 Page 15 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(b) MPT Limited 7


Statement of Financial Position at 30 April 2020

$ $
Assets
Non-current Assets
Fixtures and equipment at book value 152 000
Motor vehicles at book value 60 400
212 400 (1)
Current Assets
Inventory 30 330
Trade receivables 31 500
Less Provision for doubtful debts 630 30 870 (1)
61 200 (1)OF
Total assets 273 600

Equity and Liabilities


Equity
Ordinary share capital 150 000
General reserve (35 000 + 5 000) 40 000 (1)
Retained earnings 32 500 (1)OF
222 500

Non-current Liabilities
5% Debentures 20 000 (1)

Current Liabilities
Trade payables 24 900
Bank 6 200
31 100 (1)
Total Equity and Liabilities 273 600

5(c) General reserves may not necessarily be matched by cash balances (1) 1

Accept other valid points

© UCLES 2020 Page 16 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d) Either 4

28 000 + 1000 (1) 100


×
150 000 + 40 000 (1)OF + 32 500OF + 20 000 (1) 1

29 000 100
= ×
242 500 1

= 11.96% (1)OF

Or

28 000 + 1000 (1) 100


×
273 600 (1)OF − 31100 (1) 1

= 11.96% (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 17 of 18


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(e) Basic statements – Increase profit for the year (1) 5


Reduce capital employed (1)
Use capital employed more effectively (1)
Max (3)

Expansion of basic statements –


Ways to increase profit for the year – Increase profit by increasing gross profit (1)
Reduce expenses (1)
Increase other income (1)
Max (2)

Ways to reduce capital employed – Increase dividend (so reducing reserves) (1)
Reduce non-current liabilities (1)
Max (2)

Ways to use capital employed more effectively – combine lower costs with higher sales (1)
sell off surplus/inefficient assets that generate little revenue/increase costs (1)

Max (2)

Max (5)

© UCLES 2020 Page 18 of 18


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 7 2 7 2 2 3 5 6 0 7 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (RCL (GO)) 186086/3


© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Bilal is a trader. He buys goods on credit and for cash. He sells goods on a cash basis only.

The following transactions took place in April 2020.

April 4 Bought goods on credit from Milly, list price $320, subject to a trade discount of 20%

5 Bought goods on credit from EHL Limited, $500

6 Bought stationery, $145, paying by cheque

8 Cash sales, $280, were paid immediately into Bilal’s bank account

10 Paid $128 cash to Milly

12 Cash sales, $110

13 Bought goods on credit, $250, from Todd who offers 4% cash discount for payments
made within 14 days

17 Bought office equipment, $500, paying by bank transfer

21 Paid by cheque for the goods purchased from Todd on 13 April after deducting the cash
discount

24 Paid $485 to EHL Limited by telephone transfer, having deducted 3% cash discount

28 Sold old office equipment for $50 cash

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the purchases journal for April 2020.

Total the journal and indicate the ledger account to which the total would be posted.

Bilal
Purchases journal

Date Details $ $

……..….... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... …………..

……..….... ………………………………………………............. …………... …………..

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. ………….. …………...

[4]

(b) Complete Bilal’s cash book on the page opposite.

Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 May 2020.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


Bilal
Cash Book

© UCLES 2020
Date Details Discount Cash Bank Date Details Discount Cash Bank
allowed received
2020 $ $ $ 2020 $ $ $

April 1 Balance b/d ................ 160 1960 ........... ......................................... ............... ............... …...........

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... .......... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
3

........... ........................................ ................ ............... .............. ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

0452/22/M/J/20
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
.
.......... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... …....... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............

…....... …..................................... …............ …............ …............ …....... …..................................... ............... …........... …...........

……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........

……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........

[12]

[Turn over
4

(c) Name one accounting principle applied by Bilal in each of the following situations.

accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled.
This is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial
statements was based on its purchase price.
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20 [Turn over


6

2 The K Music Club provides facilities for listening to music and also provides a refreshment bar for
members. The club had the following assets and liabilities at 1 April 2019.

$
Subscriptions in advance 250
Subscriptions in arrears 845
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Wages outstanding (refreshment bar) 140
Inventory (refreshment bar) 615
Fixtures and fittings at book value 11 200

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the accumulated fund at 1 April 2019.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) State how the accumulated fund of a club is built up over time.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

The following information is available for the year ended 31 March 2020.

$
Subscriptions received (all by cheque) 8 500
Subscriptions written off as irrecoverable 155
Wages paid to refreshments bar staff 1 250

Balances at 31 March 2020 included the following.


$
Subscriptions in advance 215
Subscriptions in arrears 975
Wages outstanding (refreshments bar) 115

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


7

REQUIRED

(c) Calculate the refreshment bar staff wages for the year ended 31 March 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

……………………………………………........ …………………………………………………… [2]

(d) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2020. Balance the account
and bring down the balances on 1 April 2020.

K Music Club
Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

[7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20 [Turn over


8

(e) Advise the club treasurer whether or not club members should be required to pay their
subscriptions by direct debit. Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two
disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


9

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20 [Turn over


10

3 Gok is a wholesaler. He prepares his financial statements to the end of February each year.

At 29 February 2020, Gok’s ledger account balances included the following.

$
Revenue 420 000
Purchases 311 400
Sales returns 12 000
Discount allowed 9 000
Wages 12 360
Rent and rates 11 750
General expenses 4 220
Irrecoverable debts 8 600
Insurance 4 500
Telephone expenses 4 565
Inventory at 1 March 2019 26 700
Drawings 9 500
Fixtures and equipment at cost 120 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 43 200

Additional information

1 Gok did not have time to count and value his inventory at 29 February 2020. His margin is
25%.

2 A loan of $60 000 was obtained from the bank on 1 July 2019. Interest is charged at 7% per
annum.

3 The fixtures and equipment are being depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing
balance method.

4 The insurance includes $1500 which covers the period from 1 March to 30 September 2020.

5 Drawings include a payment of $1660 for Gok’s personal telephone expenses. One quarter
of this amount was for business use.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Gok’s income statement for the year ended 29 February 2020.

Gok
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020

$ $
……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ................... …………….

[15]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20 [Turn over


12

The wages paid by Gok are to his part-time warehouse assistant, Aiman.

REQUIRED

(b) Advise Gok whether or not he should offer Aiman a partnership in the business. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


13

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20 [Turn over


14

4 Nadia is a trader. Her financial year ends on 31 March. She extracted a trial balance at 31 March
2020. The debit and credit totals did not agree. The difference was entered into a suspense
account.

After Nadia prepared draft financial statements, she discovered the following errors.

1 The purchases account was overcast by $110.

2 $13 for discount allowed in February 2020 had been credited to the discount allowed account
as $15.

3 A payment for insurance, $220, was correctly recorded in the cash book, but was recorded as
$202 in the insurance account.

4 Commission received, $65, had been debited to the account for commission payable. The
entry to the cash book had been correctly made.

5 Cash drawings, $85, were correctly entered in the cash book but were credited to the
drawings account.

6 The cost of a vehicle repair, $190, had been debited to the motor vehicles account.

7 A payment of $100 to Robert had been posted to the account of Roberta.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance as a
balancing figure.

Nadia
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..


[7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


15

(b) Identify the type of error made in

(i) Error 6

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Error 7

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Complete the following statement to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting
errors 2–7. If there is no effect on profit write ‘nil’ in the ‘no effect’ column. Calculate the
corrected profit for the year. Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.

The first correction has been completed as an example.

Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Draft profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
Effect in profit in profit
$ $

Error 1 110

Error 2 ............... ............... ...............

Error 3 ............... ............... ...............

Error 4 ............... ............... ...............

Error 5 ............... ............... ...............

Error 6 ............... ............... ...............

Error 7 ............... ............... ...............

Corrected profit for the year [7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20 [Turn over


16

At 31 March 2020 Nadia’s trade receivables owed $14 500. After the preparation of the draft
financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2020, Nadia discovered the following.

1 $300 owed by DD Supplies should have been written off as irrecoverable.

2 A provision of doubtful debts of 2% of trade receivables should have been created.

REQUIRED

(d) Prepare journal entries to record 1 and 2 above. Narratives are not required.

Nadia
Journal

Date Details Debit Credit


$ $

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

………… ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


17

5 The directors of JKY Limited provided the following information.

For the year to 30 April 2020:


$

Revenue 209 510


Purchases 121 618

At 30 April 2020:

Inventory 11 050
Trade receivables 28 700
Bank overdraft 6 280

All sales and purchases were made on credit terms.

Inventory at 1 May 2019 was valued at $8000

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the following ratios. Show your workings.

Rate of inventory turnover


workings answer (to two decimal places)

Trade receivables turnover (days)


workings answer (round up to nearest whole day)

[5]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20 [Turn over


18

The rate of inventory turnover for the year ended 30 April 2020 was lower than that of the previous
year.

The trade receivables turnover (days) for the year ended 30 April 2020 was higher than that of the
previous year.

REQUIRED

(b) Explain the effects of the change in:

(i) inventory turnover

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) trade receivables turnover (days)

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


19

The directors are concerned about the level of trade receivables. They are considering introducing
cash discount of 1% for payment within 21 days or charging interest on amounts outstanding after
30 days.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise the directors whether they should introduce the cash discount policy or the interest
charge policy. Justify your answer by providing one advantage and one disadvantage of
each policy.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

The information in the accounting statements is affected by the company’s accounting policies.

REQUIRED

(d) Explain to the directors of JKY Limited the importance of the following objectives in selecting
the company’s accounting policies.

(i) comparability

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20 [Turn over


20

(ii) relevance

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 20]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/M/J/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 120

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Bilal 4
Purchases journal

Date Details $

2020
April 4 Milly (320 – 64) 256 (1)
5 EHL Limited 500 (1)
13 Todd 250 (1)
30 Transfer to purchases account 1 006 (1)OF

1(b) Bilal 12
Cash Book
Disc. Cash Bank Disc. Cash Bank
Alld Recd
$ $ $ $ $ $
2020 2020
Apr 1 Balance b/d 160 1 960 Apr 6 Stationery (1) 145
8 Sales (1) 280 10 Milly (1) 128
12 Sales (1) 110 17 Office equip. (1) 500
28 Disposal (1) 50 21 Todd (1) 10 240
24 EHL Limited (1) 15 485
30 Balance c/d 192 870
320 2 240 25(1) 320 2 240
2020
May 1 Balance b/d 192 870
(1)OF (1)OF

Dates (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) 4
accounting principle

The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal duality (1)
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.

The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods business entity (1)
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.

The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled. This money measurement (1)
is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.

The value of office equipment shown in the financial historic cost (1)
statements was based on its purchase price.

Question Answer Marks

2(a) $ $ 4
Subscriptions in arrears 845 (1)
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Inventory 615
Fixtures and fittings 11 200
14 360 (1)
Subscriptions in advance 250
Wages outstanding 140 390 (1)
Accumulated fund 13 970 (1)(OF)

2(b) The accumulated fund is built up from the annual surpluses (1) less any annual deficits (1) 2
Accept other valid points

2(c) 1250 + 115 – 140 (1) = 1225 (1)OF 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(d) K Music Club 7


Subscriptions account

2019 $ 2019 $
Apr 1 Balance b/d 845 (1) Apr 1 Balance b/d 250 (1)
2020 2020
Mar 31 Income and Expenditure 8 820 (1)OF Mar 31 Bank 8 500 (1)
Balance c/d 215 Irrecoverable debts 155 (1)
Balance c/d 975
9 880 9 880
2020 2020
Apl 1 Balance b/d 975 (1)OF Apl 1 Balance b/d 215 (1)OF

2(e) Advantages 5
Subscriptions in arrears have risen from $845 to $975, so this may be a concern (1)
Subscriptions in arrears are significantly higher than subscriptions in advance (1)
Irrecoverable debts would be minimised particularly if the direct debits were set up for the start of the year (1)
The timing of cash receipts from members will be known (1)
Administration costs may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Members may prefer to choose their own method of payment (1)
They may prefer to pay their subscription at a time of their choosing (1)
Some members may decide not to renew their membership (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) Gok 15
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $

Revenue 420 000


Less Sales returns 12 000 408 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 26 700
Purchases 311 400
338 100
Less Closing inventory 32 100 (1)OF 306 000 (1) OF
Gross profit 102 000 (1)

Less Expenses
Discount allowed 9 000 (1)
Wages 12 360 }
Rent and rates 11 750 }(1)
General expenses 4 220 }
Irrecoverable debts 8 600 (1)
Insurance (4 500 – 1 500) 3 000 (1)
Telephone expenses (4 565(1) + [1 660/4] (1)) 4 980
Depreciation on Fixtures and equipment (20% × 76 800) (1) 15 360 (1)OF 69 270
Profit from operations 32 730
Loan interest (60 000 × 7%)(1) × 8/12(1) 2 800
Profit for the year 29 930 (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Advantages 5
Gok would no longer need to pay wages to Aiman as he would not be an employee (1)
Aiman may invest capital into the business (1)
Gok would consider how much capital would be introduced by Aiman (1)
The risks and responsibilities would be shared with Aiman (1)
Aiman may have skills which could be used in the business, other than those which he currently uses as a warehouse
assistant (1)
Aiman may be prepared to work longer hours in the business if he became a partner (1)
Currently Gok has not had time to carry out an inventory count so it seems that any extra hours which Aiman may work would
be helpful (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Gok would no longer be able to take all the decisions on his own (1)
Aiman would be entitled to a share of the profits (1)
Gok would consider how profits and losses are to be shared (1)
Aiman would expect to take drawings from the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

Question Answer Marks

4(a) Nadia 7
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Mar 31 Purchases 110 (1) Mar 31 Difference on trial balance 24 (1)OF
Commission payable 65 (1) Discount allowed 28 (1)
Insurance 18 (1)
Commission receivable 65 (1) Drawings 170 (1)
240 240

4(b)(i) Error of principle (1) 1


© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 12
0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(b)(ii) Error of commission (1) 1

4(c) 7
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020

$
Profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
Error 2 28 (1)
Error 3 18 (1)
Error 4 130 (1)
Error 5 nil (1)
Error 6 190 (1)
Error 7 nil (1) ___ ___ 4(1)(OF)
Corrected profit for the year 240 236 6724

4(d) Nadia 4
Journal
Debit Credit
Date Details
$ $

2020
March 31 Irrecoverable debts 300 (1)
DD Supplies 300 (1)

March 31 Income statement 284 (1)


Provision for doubtful debts 284 (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) Rate of inventory turnover 5


(8 000 + 121618 − 11050)(1) 118 568
= = 12.45 times (1)OF
(8 000 + 11050 / 2(1) 9 525

Trade receivables turnover

28 700 365
× (1) whole formula = 50 days (1)OF
209 510 1

5(b)(i) Risk of obsolete inventory (1) 3


Risk of damage to inventory (1)
Increased storage costs (1)
May need to reduce selling price to sell old inventory (1)
Cash is tied up longer in inventory (1)
May mean missed business opportunities if insufficient cash (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

5(b)(ii) Risk of irrecoverable debts (1) 3


A provision for doubtful debts may be required (1)
Credit control may need to be reviewed (1)
Cash tied up in trade receivables (1)
May mean missed business opportunities if insufficient cash (1)
Effect may be significant as all sales are on credit (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(c) Cash discount 5


Advantages Cash will be received significantly earlier (1)
Good customer relationships are maintained (1)
Credit control costs may be reduced (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Less cash will be received (1)
1% may not be enough to encourage earlier payment (1)
If customers have insufficient funds to pay the cash discount may have no effect (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Interest
Advantages More cash may be received (1)
Cash may be received earlier (1)
Interest received will increase profit (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Customer relationships may worsen (1)
Increased administration costs (1)
Customers may refuse to pay the interest (1)
Customers may find an alternative supplier (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 12


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d)(i) Accounting policies should be applied consistently so that financial statements can be compared from year to year (1) 2
Financial statements can be compared with similar businesses (1)
Any change in the company’s accounting policies, and the effect of the change, should be disclosed (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

5(d)(ii) Information is relevant if it is capable of influencing the decisions being made (1) 2
Information must be available in time for decisions to be taken (1)
Relevant information helps the directors to evaluate past, present and future events (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 12


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 0 9 6 8 3 2 6 7 1 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (DH) 198491
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Bilal is a trader. He buys goods on credit and for cash. He sells goods on a cash basis only.

The following transactions took place in April 2020.

April 4 Bought goods on credit from Milly, list price $320, subject to a trade discount of 20%

5 Bought goods on credit from EHL Limited, $500

6 Bought stationery, $145, paying by cheque

8 Cash sales, $280, were paid immediately into Bilal’s bank account

10 Paid $128 cash to Milly

12 Cash sales, $110

13 Bought goods on credit, $250, from Todd who offers 4% cash discount for payments
made within 14 days

17 Bought office equipment, $500, paying by bank transfer

21 Paid by cheque for the goods purchased from Todd on 13 April after deducting the cash
discount

24 Paid $485 to EHL Limited by telephone transfer, having deducted 3% cash discount

28 Sold old office equipment for $50 cash

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the purchases journal for April 2020.

Total the journal and indicate the ledger account to which the total would be posted.

Bilal
Purchases journal

Date Details $ $

……..….... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... …………..

……..….... ………………………………………………............. …………... …………..

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. ………….. …………...

[4]

(b) Complete Bilal’s cash book on the page opposite.

Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 May 2020.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


Bilal
Cash Book

© UCLES 2020
Date Details Discount Cash Bank Date Details Discount Cash Bank
allowed received
2020 $ $ $ 2020 $ $ $

April 1 Balance b/d ................ 160 1960 ........... ......................................... ............... ............... …...........

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... .......... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
3

........... ........................................ ................ ............... .............. ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

0452/23/M/J/20
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
.
.......... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... …....... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............

…....... …..................................... …............ …............ …............ …....... …..................................... ............... …........... …...........

……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........

……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........

[12]

[Turn over
4

(c) Name one accounting principle applied by Bilal in each of the following situations.

accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled.
This is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial
statements was based on its purchase price.
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


6

2 The K Music Club provides facilities for listening to music and also provides a refreshment bar for
members. The club had the following assets and liabilities at 1 April 2019.

$
Subscriptions in advance 250
Subscriptions in arrears 845
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Wages outstanding (refreshment bar) 140
Inventory (refreshment bar) 615
Fixtures and fittings at book value 11 200

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the accumulated fund at 1 April 2019.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) State how the accumulated fund of a club is built up over time.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

The following information is available for the year ended 31 March 2020.

$
Subscriptions received (all by cheque) 8 500
Subscriptions written off as irrecoverable 155
Wages paid to refreshments bar staff 1 250

Balances at 31 March 2020 included the following.


$
Subscriptions in advance 215
Subscriptions in arrears 975
Wages outstanding (refreshments bar) 115

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


7

REQUIRED

(c) Calculate the refreshment bar staff wages for the year ended 31 March 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

……………………………………………........ …………………………………………………… [2]

(d) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2020. Balance the account
and bring down the balances on 1 April 2020.

K Music Club
Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

[7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


8

(e) Advise the club treasurer whether or not club members should be required to pay their
subscriptions by direct debit. Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two
disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


9

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


10

3 Gok is a wholesaler. He prepares his financial statements to the end of February each year.

At 29 February 2020, Gok’s ledger account balances included the following.

$
Revenue 420 000
Purchases 311 400
Sales returns 12 000
Discount allowed 9 000
Wages 12 360
Rent and rates 11 750
General expenses 4 220
Irrecoverable debts 8 600
Insurance 4 500
Telephone expenses 4 565
Inventory at 1 March 2019 26 700
Drawings 9 500
Fixtures and equipment at cost 120 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 43 200

Additional information

1 Gok did not have time to count and value his inventory at 29 February 2020. His margin is
25%.

2 A loan of $60 000 was obtained from the bank on 1 July 2019. Interest is charged at 7% per
annum.

3 The fixtures and equipment are being depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing
balance method.

4 The insurance includes $1500 which covers the period from 1 March to 30 September 2020.

5 Drawings include a payment of $1660 for Gok’s personal telephone expenses. One quarter
of this amount was for business use.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Gok’s income statement for the year ended 29 February 2020.

Gok
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020

$ $
……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ................... …………….

[15]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


12

The wages paid by Gok are to his part-time warehouse assistant, Aiman.

REQUIRED

(b) Advise Gok whether or not he should offer Aiman a partnership in the business. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


13

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


14

4 Nadia is a trader. Her financial year ends on 31 March. She extracted a trial balance at 31 March
2020. The debit and credit totals did not agree. The difference was entered into a suspense
account.

After Nadia prepared draft financial statements, she discovered the following errors.

1 The purchases account was overcast by $110.

2 $13 for discount allowed in February 2020 had been credited to the discount allowed account
as $15.

3 A payment for insurance, $220, was correctly recorded in the cash book, but was recorded as
$202 in the insurance account.

4 Commission received, $65, had been debited to the account for commission payable. The
entry to the cash book had been correctly made.

5 Cash drawings, $85, were correctly entered in the cash book but were credited to the
drawings account.

6 The cost of a vehicle repair, $190, had been debited to the motor vehicles account.

7 A payment of $100 to Robert had been posted to the account of Roberta.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance as a
balancing figure.

Nadia
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..


[7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


15

(b) Identify the type of error made in

(i) Error 6

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Error 7

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Complete the following statement to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting
errors 2–7. If there is no effect on profit write ‘nil’ in the ‘no effect’ column. Calculate the
corrected profit for the year. Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.

The first correction has been completed as an example.

Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Draft profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
Effect in profit in profit
$ $

Error 1 110

Error 2 ............... ............... ...............

Error 3 ............... ............... ...............

Error 4 ............... ............... ...............

Error 5 ............... ............... ...............

Error 6 ............... ............... ...............

Error 7 ............... ............... ...............

Corrected profit for the year [7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


16

At 31 March 2020 Nadia’s trade receivables owed $14 500. After the preparation of the draft
financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2020, Nadia discovered the following.

1 $300 owed by DD Supplies should have been written off as irrecoverable.

2 A provision of doubtful debts of 2% of trade receivables should have been created.

REQUIRED

(d) Prepare journal entries to record 1 and 2 above. Narratives are not required.

Nadia
Journal

Date Details Debit Credit


$ $

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

………… ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


17

5 The directors of JKY Limited provided the following information.

For the year to 30 April 2020:


$

Revenue 209 510


Purchases 121 618

At 30 April 2020:

Inventory 11 050
Trade receivables 28 700
Bank overdraft 6 280

All sales and purchases were made on credit terms.

Inventory at 1 May 2019 was valued at $8000

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the following ratios. Show your workings.

Rate of inventory turnover


workings answer (to two decimal places)

Trade receivables turnover (days)


workings answer (round up to nearest whole day)

[5]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


18

The rate of inventory turnover for the year ended 30 April 2020 was lower than that of the previous
year.

The trade receivables turnover (days) for the year ended 30 April 2020 was higher than that of the
previous year.

REQUIRED

(b) Explain the effects of the change in:

(i) inventory turnover

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) trade receivables turnover (days)

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


19

The directors are concerned about the level of trade receivables. They are considering introducing
cash discount of 1% for payment within 21 days or charging interest on amounts outstanding after
30 days.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise the directors whether they should introduce the cash discount policy or the interest
charge policy. Justify your answer by providing one advantage and one disadvantage of
each policy.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

The information in the accounting statements is affected by the company’s accounting policies.

REQUIRED

(d) Explain to the directors of JKY Limited the importance of the following objectives in selecting
the company’s accounting policies.

(i) comparability

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


20

(ii) relevance

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 20]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 120

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Bilal 4
Purchases journal

Date Details $

2020
April 4 Milly (320 – 64) 256 (1)
5 EHL Limited 500 (1)
13 Todd 250 (1)
30 Transfer to purchases account 1 006 (1)OF

1(b) Bilal 12
Cash Book
Disc. Cash Bank Disc. Cash Bank
Alld Recd
$ $ $ $ $ $
2020 2020
Apr 1 Balance b/d 160 1 960 Apr 6 Stationery (1) 145
8 Sales (1) 280 10 Milly (1) 128
12 Sales (1) 110 17 Office equip. (1) 500
28 Disposal (1) 50 21 Todd (1) 10 240
24 EHL Limited (1) 15 485
30 Balance c/d 192 870
320 2 240 25(1) 320 2 240
2020
May 1 Balance b/d 192 870
(1)OF (1)OF

Dates (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) 4
accounting principle

The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal duality (1)
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.

The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods business entity (1)
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.

The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled. This money measurement (1)
is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.

The value of office equipment shown in the financial historic cost (1)
statements was based on its purchase price.

Question Answer Marks

2(a) $ $ 4
Subscriptions in arrears 845 (1)
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Inventory 615
Fixtures and fittings 11 200
14 360 (1)
Subscriptions in advance 250
Wages outstanding 140 390 (1)
Accumulated fund 13 970 (1)(OF)

2(b) The accumulated fund is built up from the annual surpluses (1) less any annual deficits (1) 2
Accept other valid points

2(c) 1250 + 115 – 140 (1) = 1225 (1)OF 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(d) K Music Club 7


Subscriptions account

2019 $ 2019 $
Apr 1 Balance b/d 845 (1) Apr 1 Balance b/d 250 (1)
2020 2020
Mar 31 Income and Expenditure 8 820 (1)OF Mar 31 Bank 8 500 (1)
Balance c/d 215 Irrecoverable debts 155 (1)
Balance c/d 975
9 880 9 880
2020 2020
Apl 1 Balance b/d 975 (1)OF Apl 1 Balance b/d 215 (1)OF

2(e) Advantages 5
Subscriptions in arrears have risen from $845 to $975, so this may be a concern (1)
Subscriptions in arrears are significantly higher than subscriptions in advance (1)
Irrecoverable debts would be minimised particularly if the direct debits were set up for the start of the year (1)
The timing of cash receipts from members will be known (1)
Administration costs may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Members may prefer to choose their own method of payment (1)
They may prefer to pay their subscription at a time of their choosing (1)
Some members may decide not to renew their membership (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) Gok 15
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $

Revenue 420 000


Less Sales returns 12 000 408 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 26 700
Purchases 311 400
338 100
Less Closing inventory 32 100 (1)OF 306 000 (1) OF
Gross profit 102 000 (1)

Less Expenses
Discount allowed 9 000 (1)
Wages 12 360 }
Rent and rates 11 750 }(1)
General expenses 4 220 }
Irrecoverable debts 8 600 (1)
Insurance (4 500 – 1 500) 3 000 (1)
Telephone expenses (4 565(1) + [1 660/4] (1)) 4 980
Depreciation on Fixtures and equipment (20% × 76 800) (1) 15 360 (1)OF 69 270
Profit from operations 32 730
Loan interest (60 000 × 7%)(1) × 8/12(1) 2 800
Profit for the year 29 930 (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Advantages 5
Gok would no longer need to pay wages to Aiman as he would not be an employee (1)
Aiman may invest capital into the business (1)
Gok would consider how much capital would be introduced by Aiman (1)
The risks and responsibilities would be shared with Aiman (1)
Aiman may have skills which could be used in the business, other than those which he currently uses as a warehouse
assistant (1)
Aiman may be prepared to work longer hours in the business if he became a partner (1)
Currently Gok has not had time to carry out an inventory count so it seems that any extra hours which Aiman may work would
be helpful (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Gok would no longer be able to take all the decisions on his own (1)
Aiman would be entitled to a share of the profits (1)
Gok would consider how profits and losses are to be shared (1)
Aiman would expect to take drawings from the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

Question Answer Marks

4(a) Nadia 7
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Mar 31 Purchases 110 (1) Mar 31 Difference on trial balance 24 (1)OF
Commission payable 65 (1) Discount allowed 28 (1)
Insurance 18 (1)
Commission receivable 65 (1) Drawings 170 (1)
240 240

4(b)(i) Error of principle (1) 1


© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 12
0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(b)(ii) Error of commission (1) 1

4(c) 7
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020

$
Profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
Error 2 28 (1)
Error 3 18 (1)
Error 4 130 (1)
Error 5 nil (1)
Error 6 190 (1)
Error 7 nil (1) ___ ___ 4(1)(OF)
Corrected profit for the year 240 236 6724

4(d) Nadia 4
Journal
Debit Credit
Date Details
$ $

2020
March 31 Irrecoverable debts 300 (1)
DD Supplies 300 (1)

March 31 Income statement 284 (1)


Provision for doubtful debts 284 (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) Rate of inventory turnover 5


(8 000 + 121618 − 11050)(1) 118 568
= = 12.45 times (1)OF
(8 000 + 11050 / 2(1) 9 525

Trade receivables turnover

28 700 365
× (1) whole formula = 50 days (1)OF
209 510 1

5(b)(i) Risk of obsolete inventory (1) 3


Risk of damage to inventory (1)
Increased storage costs (1)
May need to reduce selling price to sell old inventory (1)
Cash is tied up longer in inventory (1)
May mean missed business opportunities if insufficient cash (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

5(b)(ii) Risk of irrecoverable debts (1) 3


A provision for doubtful debts may be required (1)
Credit control may need to be reviewed (1)
Cash tied up in trade receivables (1)
May mean missed business opportunities if insufficient cash (1)
Effect may be significant as all sales are on credit (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(c) Cash discount 5


Advantages Cash will be received significantly earlier (1)
Good customer relationships are maintained (1)
Credit control costs may be reduced (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Less cash will be received (1)
1% may not be enough to encourage earlier payment (1)
If customers have insufficient funds to pay the cash discount may have no effect (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Interest
Advantages More cash may be received (1)
Cash may be received earlier (1)
Interest received will increase profit (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Customer relationships may worsen (1)
Increased administration costs (1)
Customers may refuse to pay the interest (1)
Customers may find an alternative supplier (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d)(i) Accounting policies should be applied consistently so that financial statements can be compared from year to year (1) 2
Financial statements can be compared with similar businesses (1)
Any change in the company’s accounting policies, and the effect of the change, should be disclosed (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

5(d)(ii) Information is relevant if it is capable of influencing the decisions being made (1) 2
Information must be available in time for decisions to be taken (1)
Relevant information helps the directors to evaluate past, present and future events (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 12


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 0 9 6 8 3 2 6 7 1 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (DH) 198491
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Bilal is a trader. He buys goods on credit and for cash. He sells goods on a cash basis only.

The following transactions took place in April 2020.

April 4 Bought goods on credit from Milly, list price $320, subject to a trade discount of 20%

5 Bought goods on credit from EHL Limited, $500

6 Bought stationery, $145, paying by cheque

8 Cash sales, $280, were paid immediately into Bilal’s bank account

10 Paid $128 cash to Milly

12 Cash sales, $110

13 Bought goods on credit, $250, from Todd who offers 4% cash discount for payments
made within 14 days

17 Bought office equipment, $500, paying by bank transfer

21 Paid by cheque for the goods purchased from Todd on 13 April after deducting the cash
discount

24 Paid $485 to EHL Limited by telephone transfer, having deducted 3% cash discount

28 Sold old office equipment for $50 cash

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the purchases journal for April 2020.

Total the journal and indicate the ledger account to which the total would be posted.

Bilal
Purchases journal

Date Details $ $

……..….... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... …………..

……..….... ………………………………………………............. …………... …………..

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. …………... ………......

………...... ………………………………………………............. ………….. …………...

[4]

(b) Complete Bilal’s cash book on the page opposite.

Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 May 2020.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


Bilal
Cash Book

© UCLES 2020
Date Details Discount Cash Bank Date Details Discount Cash Bank
allowed received
2020 $ $ $ 2020 $ $ $

April 1 Balance b/d ................ 160 1960 ........... ......................................... ............... ............... …...........

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... .......... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
3

........... ........................................ ................ ............... .............. ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............

0452/23/M/J/20
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
.
.......... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... …....... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............

…....... …..................................... …............ …............ …............ …....... …..................................... ............... …........... …...........

……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........

……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........

[12]

[Turn over
4

(c) Name one accounting principle applied by Bilal in each of the following situations.

accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled.
This is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial
statements was based on its purchase price.
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


6

2 The K Music Club provides facilities for listening to music and also provides a refreshment bar for
members. The club had the following assets and liabilities at 1 April 2019.

$
Subscriptions in advance 250
Subscriptions in arrears 845
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Wages outstanding (refreshment bar) 140
Inventory (refreshment bar) 615
Fixtures and fittings at book value 11 200

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the accumulated fund at 1 April 2019.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) State how the accumulated fund of a club is built up over time.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

The following information is available for the year ended 31 March 2020.

$
Subscriptions received (all by cheque) 8 500
Subscriptions written off as irrecoverable 155
Wages paid to refreshments bar staff 1 250

Balances at 31 March 2020 included the following.


$
Subscriptions in advance 215
Subscriptions in arrears 975
Wages outstanding (refreshments bar) 115

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


7

REQUIRED

(c) Calculate the refreshment bar staff wages for the year ended 31 March 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

……………………………………………........ …………………………………………………… [2]

(d) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2020. Balance the account
and bring down the balances on 1 April 2020.

K Music Club
Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

……… …………………………... ……….. ……… …………………………... ………..

[7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


8

(e) Advise the club treasurer whether or not club members should be required to pay their
subscriptions by direct debit. Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two
disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


9

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


10

3 Gok is a wholesaler. He prepares his financial statements to the end of February each year.

At 29 February 2020, Gok’s ledger account balances included the following.

$
Revenue 420 000
Purchases 311 400
Sales returns 12 000
Discount allowed 9 000
Wages 12 360
Rent and rates 11 750
General expenses 4 220
Irrecoverable debts 8 600
Insurance 4 500
Telephone expenses 4 565
Inventory at 1 March 2019 26 700
Drawings 9 500
Fixtures and equipment at cost 120 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 43 200

Additional information

1 Gok did not have time to count and value his inventory at 29 February 2020. His margin is
25%.

2 A loan of $60 000 was obtained from the bank on 1 July 2019. Interest is charged at 7% per
annum.

3 The fixtures and equipment are being depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing
balance method.

4 The insurance includes $1500 which covers the period from 1 March to 30 September 2020.

5 Drawings include a payment of $1660 for Gok’s personal telephone expenses. One quarter
of this amount was for business use.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Gok’s income statement for the year ended 29 February 2020.

Gok
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020

$ $
……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………............ ................... …………….

[15]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


12

The wages paid by Gok are to his part-time warehouse assistant, Aiman.

REQUIRED

(b) Advise Gok whether or not he should offer Aiman a partnership in the business. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


13

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


14

4 Nadia is a trader. Her financial year ends on 31 March. She extracted a trial balance at 31 March
2020. The debit and credit totals did not agree. The difference was entered into a suspense
account.

After Nadia prepared draft financial statements, she discovered the following errors.

1 The purchases account was overcast by $110.

2 $13 for discount allowed in February 2020 had been credited to the discount allowed account
as $15.

3 A payment for insurance, $220, was correctly recorded in the cash book, but was recorded as
$202 in the insurance account.

4 Commission received, $65, had been debited to the account for commission payable. The
entry to the cash book had been correctly made.

5 Cash drawings, $85, were correctly entered in the cash book but were credited to the
drawings account.

6 The cost of a vehicle repair, $190, had been debited to the motor vehicles account.

7 A payment of $100 to Robert had been posted to the account of Roberta.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance as a
balancing figure.

Nadia
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..

………. .……………………… ……….. ………. .……………………… ………..


[7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


15

(b) Identify the type of error made in

(i) Error 6

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Error 7

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Complete the following statement to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting
errors 2–7. If there is no effect on profit write ‘nil’ in the ‘no effect’ column. Calculate the
corrected profit for the year. Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.

The first correction has been completed as an example.

Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Draft profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
Effect in profit in profit
$ $

Error 1 110

Error 2 ............... ............... ...............

Error 3 ............... ............... ...............

Error 4 ............... ............... ...............

Error 5 ............... ............... ...............

Error 6 ............... ............... ...............

Error 7 ............... ............... ...............

Corrected profit for the year [7]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


16

At 31 March 2020 Nadia’s trade receivables owed $14 500. After the preparation of the draft
financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2020, Nadia discovered the following.

1 $300 owed by DD Supplies should have been written off as irrecoverable.

2 A provision of doubtful debts of 2% of trade receivables should have been created.

REQUIRED

(d) Prepare journal entries to record 1 and 2 above. Narratives are not required.

Nadia
Journal

Date Details Debit Credit


$ $

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

……….. ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

………… ……………………………………………........... ……………… ………………

[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


17

5 The directors of JKY Limited provided the following information.

For the year to 30 April 2020:


$

Revenue 209 510


Purchases 121 618

At 30 April 2020:

Inventory 11 050
Trade receivables 28 700
Bank overdraft 6 280

All sales and purchases were made on credit terms.

Inventory at 1 May 2019 was valued at $8000

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the following ratios. Show your workings.

Rate of inventory turnover


workings answer (to two decimal places)

Trade receivables turnover (days)


workings answer (round up to nearest whole day)

[5]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


18

The rate of inventory turnover for the year ended 30 April 2020 was lower than that of the previous
year.

The trade receivables turnover (days) for the year ended 30 April 2020 was higher than that of the
previous year.

REQUIRED

(b) Explain the effects of the change in:

(i) inventory turnover

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) trade receivables turnover (days)

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


19

The directors are concerned about the level of trade receivables. They are considering introducing
cash discount of 1% for payment within 21 days or charging interest on amounts outstanding after
30 days.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise the directors whether they should introduce the cash discount policy or the interest
charge policy. Justify your answer by providing one advantage and one disadvantage of
each policy.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

The information in the accounting statements is affected by the company’s accounting policies.

REQUIRED

(d) Explain to the directors of JKY Limited the importance of the following objectives in selecting
the company’s accounting policies.

(i) comparability

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20 [Turn over


20

(ii) relevance

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 20]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/M/J/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 120

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Bilal 4
Purchases journal

Date Details $

2020
April 4 Milly (320 – 64) 256 (1)
5 EHL Limited 500 (1)
13 Todd 250 (1)
30 Transfer to purchases account 1 006 (1)OF

1(b) Bilal 12
Cash Book
Disc. Cash Bank Disc. Cash Bank
Alld Recd
$ $ $ $ $ $
2020 2020
Apr 1 Balance b/d 160 1 960 Apr 6 Stationery (1) 145
8 Sales (1) 280 10 Milly (1) 128
12 Sales (1) 110 17 Office equip. (1) 500
28 Disposal (1) 50 21 Todd (1) 10 240
24 EHL Limited (1) 15 485
30 Balance c/d 192 870
320 2 240 25(1) 320 2 240
2020
May 1 Balance b/d 192 870
(1)OF (1)OF

Dates (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) 4
accounting principle

The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal duality (1)
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.

The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods business entity (1)
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.

The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled. This money measurement (1)
is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.

The value of office equipment shown in the financial historic cost (1)
statements was based on its purchase price.

Question Answer Marks

2(a) $ $ 4
Subscriptions in arrears 845 (1)
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Inventory 615
Fixtures and fittings 11 200
14 360 (1)
Subscriptions in advance 250
Wages outstanding 140 390 (1)
Accumulated fund 13 970 (1)(OF)

2(b) The accumulated fund is built up from the annual surpluses (1) less any annual deficits (1) 2
Accept other valid points

2(c) 1250 + 115 – 140 (1) = 1225 (1)OF 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(d) K Music Club 7


Subscriptions account

2019 $ 2019 $
Apr 1 Balance b/d 845 (1) Apr 1 Balance b/d 250 (1)
2020 2020
Mar 31 Income and Expenditure 8 820 (1)OF Mar 31 Bank 8 500 (1)
Balance c/d 215 Irrecoverable debts 155 (1)
Balance c/d 975
9 880 9 880
2020 2020
Apl 1 Balance b/d 975 (1)OF Apl 1 Balance b/d 215 (1)OF

2(e) Advantages 5
Subscriptions in arrears have risen from $845 to $975, so this may be a concern (1)
Subscriptions in arrears are significantly higher than subscriptions in advance (1)
Irrecoverable debts would be minimised particularly if the direct debits were set up for the start of the year (1)
The timing of cash receipts from members will be known (1)
Administration costs may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Members may prefer to choose their own method of payment (1)
They may prefer to pay their subscription at a time of their choosing (1)
Some members may decide not to renew their membership (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) Gok 15
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $

Revenue 420 000


Less Sales returns 12 000 408 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 26 700
Purchases 311 400
338 100
Less Closing inventory 32 100 (1)OF 306 000 (1) OF
Gross profit 102 000 (1)

Less Expenses
Discount allowed 9 000 (1)
Wages 12 360 }
Rent and rates 11 750 }(1)
General expenses 4 220 }
Irrecoverable debts 8 600 (1)
Insurance (4 500 – 1 500) 3 000 (1)
Telephone expenses (4 565(1) + [1 660/4] (1)) 4 980
Depreciation on Fixtures and equipment (20% × 76 800) (1) 15 360 (1)OF 69 270
Profit from operations 32 730
Loan interest (60 000 × 7%)(1) × 8/12(1) 2 800
Profit for the year 29 930 (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Advantages 5
Gok would no longer need to pay wages to Aiman as he would not be an employee (1)
Aiman may invest capital into the business (1)
Gok would consider how much capital would be introduced by Aiman (1)
The risks and responsibilities would be shared with Aiman (1)
Aiman may have skills which could be used in the business, other than those which he currently uses as a warehouse
assistant (1)
Aiman may be prepared to work longer hours in the business if he became a partner (1)
Currently Gok has not had time to carry out an inventory count so it seems that any extra hours which Aiman may work would
be helpful (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Gok would no longer be able to take all the decisions on his own (1)
Aiman would be entitled to a share of the profits (1)
Gok would consider how profits and losses are to be shared (1)
Aiman would expect to take drawings from the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

Question Answer Marks

4(a) Nadia 7
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Mar 31 Purchases 110 (1) Mar 31 Difference on trial balance 24 (1)OF
Commission payable 65 (1) Discount allowed 28 (1)
Insurance 18 (1)
Commission receivable 65 (1) Drawings 170 (1)
240 240

4(b)(i) Error of principle (1) 1


© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 12
0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(b)(ii) Error of commission (1) 1

4(c) 7
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020

$
Profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
Error 2 28 (1)
Error 3 18 (1)
Error 4 130 (1)
Error 5 nil (1)
Error 6 190 (1)
Error 7 nil (1) ___ ___ 4(1)(OF)
Corrected profit for the year 240 236 6724

4(d) Nadia 4
Journal
Debit Credit
Date Details
$ $

2020
March 31 Irrecoverable debts 300 (1)
DD Supplies 300 (1)

March 31 Income statement 284 (1)


Provision for doubtful debts 284 (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) Rate of inventory turnover 5


(8 000 + 121618 − 11050)(1) 118 568
= = 12.45 times (1)OF
(8 000 + 11050 / 2(1) 9 525

Trade receivables turnover

28 700 365
× (1) whole formula = 50 days (1)OF
209 510 1

5(b)(i) Risk of obsolete inventory (1) 3


Risk of damage to inventory (1)
Increased storage costs (1)
May need to reduce selling price to sell old inventory (1)
Cash is tied up longer in inventory (1)
May mean missed business opportunities if insufficient cash (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

5(b)(ii) Risk of irrecoverable debts (1) 3


A provision for doubtful debts may be required (1)
Credit control may need to be reviewed (1)
Cash tied up in trade receivables (1)
May mean missed business opportunities if insufficient cash (1)
Effect may be significant as all sales are on credit (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(c) Cash discount 5


Advantages Cash will be received significantly earlier (1)
Good customer relationships are maintained (1)
Credit control costs may be reduced (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Less cash will be received (1)
1% may not be enough to encourage earlier payment (1)
If customers have insufficient funds to pay the cash discount may have no effect (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Interest
Advantages More cash may be received (1)
Cash may be received earlier (1)
Interest received will increase profit (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Customer relationships may worsen (1)
Increased administration costs (1)
Customers may refuse to pay the interest (1)
Customers may find an alternative supplier (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 12


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d)(i) Accounting policies should be applied consistently so that financial statements can be compared from year to year (1) 2
Financial statements can be compared with similar businesses (1)
Any change in the company’s accounting policies, and the effect of the change, should be disclosed (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

5(d)(ii) Information is relevant if it is capable of influencing the decisions being made (1) 2
Information must be available in time for decisions to be taken (1)
Relevant information helps the directors to evaluate past, present and future events (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 12


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*0300798858*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB21 06_0452_11/3RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Which statements about book-keeping and accounting are correct?

1 Accounting is performed periodically rather than daily.


2 Accounting relies on having accurate book-keeping records.
3 Book-keeping includes the preparation of financial statements.
4 Book-keeping involves the recording of financial transactions.

A 1, 2 and 4 B 1 and 3 C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 4 only

2 What increases owner’s capital?

A bank loan extended from five to ten years


B purchase of inventory on credit
C purchase of machinery by cheque
D transfer of vehicle to business from private use

3 Carl, a trader, took goods from the business for his own use. These goods had cost $100, and
$8 carriage had been paid for them to be delivered to the business.

How would this be recorded in Carl’s accounts in the books of the business?

A debit Carl’s capital account $100


B debit Carl’s capital account $108
C debit Carl’s drawings account $100
D debit Carl’s drawings account $108

4 Shula’s financial year ends on 31 March. On 1 April 2021 there was a credit balance of $100 on
Yasmin’s account in Shula’s purchases ledger.

What does this mean?

A Shula had paid $100 to Yasmin.


B Shula owed $100 to Yasmin.
C Yasmin had paid $100 to Shula.
D Yasmin owed $100 to Shula.

5 Hasina buys radios from Nazneen at a list price of $10 each. Hasina bought 12 radios and was
offered 20% trade discount and 4% cash discount. Two radios were faulty and were returned to
Nazneen.

What was the total of the credit note issued by Nazneen?

A $15.36 B $16.00 C $19.20 D $20.00

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21


3

6 Which items would be recorded in the general journal of a bakery?

1 correction of an error of principle relating to an oven repair


2 purchase of a delivery vehicle on credit
3 purchase of flour on credit
4 return by a customer of a faulty batch of bread

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

7 Alisha entered the credit notes she received in March in the correct returns journal.

How was the total of this journal recorded in the ledger at the end of the month?

A credit purchases returns account


B credit sales returns account
C debit purchases returns account
D debit sales returns account

8 Which item would not be shown on a bank statement?

A a cheque returned by the bank marked as ‘refer to drawer’


B a monthly payment made for electricity by direct debit
C bank charges
D unpresented cheques

9 Which statement about a purchases ledger control account is not correct?

A It acts as a check on the balance of the purchases account.


B It includes transactions relating to all the credit suppliers.
C It is prepared using information from the books of prime entry.
D It provides proof of the arithmetical accuracy of the purchases ledger.

10 Javid’s sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $12 000. Interest on an overdue
account, $40, and discount allowed, $150, had been omitted.

What was the correct balance on the sales ledger control account?

A $11 810 B $11 890 C $12 110 D $12 190

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21 [Turn over


4

11 What is the effect of treating an item of capital expenditure as revenue expenditure?

1 Cost of non-current assets is overstated.


2 Cost of non-current assets is understated.
3 Depreciation for the year is overstated.
4 Depreciation for the year is understated.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

12 Why does a business provide for depreciation on non-current assets?

A to charge the cost of non-current assets against profit in the year of purchase
B to ensure that non-current assets appear at book value in the statement of financial position
C to ensure that the matching principle is applied when preparing financial statements
D to retain cash in the business for replacement of non-current assets

13 Machinery which had cost $6290 was sold for $3100. The disposal account showed a profit on
disposal of $584.

How much was the depreciation up to the date of disposal and on which side of the disposal
account was it recorded?

A $2606 on the credit side


B $2606 on the debit side
C $3774 on the credit side
D $3774 on the debit side

14 The following ledger account appeared in the books of a trader.

Rent receivable account


$ $

2020 2020
Dec 31 balance c / d 600 Jan 1 balance b / d 400
Dec 31 bank 3600

Which entry was made in the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2020 for rent
receivable?

A $3400 credit
B $3400 debit
C $3800 credit
D $3800 debit

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21


5

15 Why does a business maintain a provision for doubtful debts account?

A to apply the accounting principle of prudence


B to avoid profit for the year being understated
C to have an accurate forecast of debts which will be uncollectible
D to reduce the expense of irrecoverable debts in the future

16 How should inventory be valued?

A cost
B higher of cost and net realisable value
C lower of cost and net realisable value
D net realisable value

17 What are the advantages of being a sole trader?

easy to raise entitled to has total has unlimited


finance all profit control liability

A  
B  
C   
D  

18 Which items would appear in the income statement of a service business?

profit for
gross profit surplus
the year

A   
B   
C   
D   

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21 [Turn over


6

19 A business provided the following information.

long-term loan 20 000


trade receivables 12 000
trade payables 9 700
bank overdraft 2 000
prepaid insurance 400
accrued wages 1 000
rent receivable prepaid 500

What was the total of the current liabilities?

A $13 200 B $15 400 C $31 200 D $32 700

20 What is added to owner’s capital to calculate capital employed?

A current assets
B current liabilities
C non-current assets
D non-current liabilities

21 On 1 April 2020 Ahmed had a provision for doubtful debts of $290. The following journal entry
was made on 31 March 2021.

debit credit
$ $

provision for doubtful debts 25


income statement 25

What was the provision for doubtful debts deducted from trade receivables in Ahmed’s statement
of financial position on 31 March 2021?

A $25 B $265 C $290 D $315

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21


7

22 X Limited started the year with an ordinary share capital of $100 000.

An ordinary share dividend of $3000 was paid during the year.

Later a further $10 000 of ordinary shares were issued.

The profit for the year was $8000.

By how much had equity increased at the end of the year?

A $7000 B $10 000 C $15 000 D $18 000

23 Which providers of funds to a limited liability company receive a fixed rate of return on their
investment?

ordinary preference debenture


shareholders shareholders holders

A   
B   
C   
D   

24 Every member of a sports club is required to pay an annual subscription of $50. The
subscriptions account showed the following.

Subscriptions account
$ $

2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b / d 350 Dec 31 Bank 10 950
Dec 31 Income and 10 900 Balance c / d 750
expenditure account
Balance c / d 450
11 700 11 700
2021 2021
Jan 1 Balance b / d 750 Jan 1 Balance b / d 450

What was the increase in the number of members in arrears between 1 January and
31 December 2020?

A 2 members
B 6 members
C 8 members
D 17 members

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21 [Turn over


8

25 Which term is used to describe the surpluses which have been earned by a club over its lifetime?

A accumulated fund
B capital
C retained earnings
D subscriptions

26 Nula provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2021.

drawings for the year 3 900


net assets at 1 April 2020 60 500
net assets at 31 March 2021 72 275

What was the profit or loss for the year ended 31 March 2021?

A $7875 loss
B $7875 profit
C $15 675 loss
D $15 675 profit

27 A trader who does not keep full accounting records was able to supply the following information.

amount owed by trade receivables at 1 April 2020 3 000


cheques received from trade receivables during the year 28 000
cash discounts given to trade receivables 1 500
amount owed by trade receivables at 31 March 2021 4 200

How much were the credit sales for the year ended 31 March 2021?

A $25 300 B $27 700 C $28 300 D $30 700

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21


9

28 A trader provided the following information.

revenue 120 000


inventory at the start of the year 9 600
inventory at the end of the year 10 200

A mark-up of 25% is applied.

What were the purchases for the year?

A $89 400 B $90 600 C $95 400 D $96 600

29 George provided the following information.

non-current assets 15 000


inventory 12 000
trade receivables 18 000
trade payables 8 000

His liquid (acid test) ratio was 1.2 : 1.

What was his bank overdraft?

A $7000 B $15 000 C $17 000 D $29 500

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21 [Turn over


10

30 A trader provided the following information.

$ $

revenue 3600
opening inventory 100
purchases 2600
2700
closing inventory 300 2400
gross profit 1200

It was found that the closing inventory should have been $400.

What was the correct rate of inventory turnover?

A 6 times
B 8 times
C 9.2 times
D 14.4 times

31 The current ratio of X is 2 : 1. The current ratio of Y is 1.3 : 1.

What does a comparison of these ratios show?

A X has fewer liabilities than Y.


B X has more liquidity than Y.
C Y has fewer current assets than X.
D Y has more inventory than X.

32 Which external parties would be interested in the financial statements of a trader?

1 a bank manager considering a request by the trader for a loan


2 a trade union seeking a wage increase for the employees
3 the business manager making decisions about how to increase profits
4 the trader deciding if drawings could be increased

A 1, 3 and 4 B 1 and 2 only C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21


11

33 Sabeena runs a retail business. She plans to close her business in a few weeks’ time.

How should her fixtures and fittings be valued in the statement of financial position?

A at book value
B at expected sales value
C at original cost
D at replacement cost

34 Why should a trader match his costs for a financial year with the revenues for the same period?

A to account for all liabilities


B to account for money that has been paid in advance
C to make sure outstanding income is included
D to show the correct profit figure

35 Which international accounting objectives are described by the following statements?

1 Information in financial statements must be free from material error and bias.
2 Users must be able to identify differences and similarities between information in
different financial statements.

statement 1 statement 2

A comparability understandability
B reliability comparability
C reliability understandability
D understandability reliability

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/11/M/J/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 A 1

2 D 1

3 D 1

4 B 1

5 B 1

6 A 1

7 A 1

8 D 1

9 A 1

10 B 1

11 D 1

12 C 1

13 C 1

14 A 1

15 A 1

16 C 1

17 D 1

18 C 1

19 A 1

20 D 1

21 B 1

22 C 1

23 C 1

24 C 1

25 A 1

26 D 1

27 D 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 3


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 A 1

30 C 1

31 B 1

32 B 1

33 B 1

34 D 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*4973334389*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB21 06_0452_12/4RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Which statements about book-keeping and accounting are correct?

1 Accounting is performed periodically rather than daily.


2 Accounting relies on having accurate book-keeping records.
3 Book-keeping includes the preparation of financial statements.
4 Book-keeping involves the recording of financial transactions.

A 1, 2 and 4 B 1 and 3 C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 4 only

2 What increases owner’s capital?

A bank loan extended from five to ten years


B purchase of inventory on credit
C purchase of machinery by cheque
D transfer of vehicle to business from private use

3 William paid $500 in cash to Sonia for rent.

How did Sonia record this?

account debited account credited

A cash rent receivable


B rent receivable cash
C rent receivable William
D William rent receivable

4 Abdul buys all his machinery on credit. He provided the following information.

at 30 April 2020 at 30 April 2021


$ $

machinery at cost 30 000 42 000


amounts owing to suppliers of machinery 19 000 ?

During the year Abdul paid $25 000 to the suppliers of his machinery.

How much did he owe them on 30 April 2021?

A $6000 B $13 000 C $17 000 D $32 000

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21


3

5 Shula’s financial year ends on 31 March. On 1 April 2021 there was a credit balance of $100 on
Yasmin’s account in Shula’s purchases ledger.

What does this mean?

A Shula had paid $100 to Yasmin.


B Shula owed $100 to Yasmin.
C Yasmin had paid $100 to Shula.
D Yasmin owed $100 to Shula.

6 Hasina buys radios from Nazneen at a list price of $10 each. Hasina bought 12 radios and was
offered 20% trade discount and 4% cash discount. Two radios were faulty and were returned to
Nazneen.

What was the total of the credit note issued by Nazneen?

A $15.36 B $16.00 C $19.20 D $20.00

7 Jameel sold goods on credit.

Where did he first record the invoice he issued?

A general journal
B general ledger
C sales journal
D sales ledger

8 Which statements about a three-column cash book are correct?

1 It contains ledger accounts for bank and cash.


2 It contains ledger accounts for discounts allowed and received.
3 It records transactions before they are recorded in the ledgers.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 3 D 3 only

9 Which statement is not true about a trial balance?

A It is a list of ledger account balances at a certain date.


B It can assist in finding arithmetical errors.
C It is part of the double entry system.
D It is useful in preparing financial statements.

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21 [Turn over


4

10 Which error is an error of original entry?

A sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered as $320 in both the
disposal account and Janet’s account
B sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered in the office equipment
account and Jason’s account
C sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered in the sales account and
Janet’s account
D sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 not entered in any accounts

11 A cheque, $85, received from Shakeel, was credited to the account of Shamz.

Which journal entry corrects this error?

debit credit
$ $
A bank 85
Shakeel 85
B Shakeel 85
Shamz 85
C Shamz 85
bank 85
D Shamz 85
Shakeel 85

12 Jamal’s bank statement at 1 May 2021 showed a bank overdraft of $1460.

At that date there were unpresented cheques of $385 and uncredited deposits of $255.

What was the cash book balance on 1 May 2021?

A $1330 credit
B $1330 debit
C $1590 credit
D $1590 debit

13 What is included in a purchases ledger control account?

A cash purchases
B debts written off as irrecoverable
C discount allowed
D goods returned to credit suppliers

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21


5

14 Javid’s sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $12 000. Interest on an overdue
account, $40, and discount allowed, $150, had been omitted.

What was the correct balance on the sales ledger control account?

A $11 810 B $11 890 C $12 110 D $12 190

15 Which statements about capital expenditure are correct?

1 It is money spent on day-to-day business operations.


2 It is money spent on purchasing non-current assets.
3 It is recorded in the statement of financial position.
4 It includes expenses relating to non-current assets.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

16 Nia sold equipment with a net book value of $200. The proceeds of the sale, $250, were credited
to the sales account and debited in the cash book.

What was the effect of this error on Nia’s gross profit and profit for the year?

gross profit $ profit for the year $

A overstated 50 overstated 50
B overstated 200 understated 250
C overstated 250 overstated 200
D understated 250 understated 200

17 Why does a business provide for depreciation on non-current assets?

A to charge the cost of non-current assets against profit in the year of purchase
B to ensure that non-current assets appear at book value in the statement of financial position
C to ensure that the matching principle is applied when preparing financial statements
D to retain cash in the business for replacement of non-current assets

18 A machine with an original cost of $10 000 had been depreciated for two years at the rate of 10%
per annum using the straight-line basis. It was then sold for cash with the loss on disposal
amounting to $700.

A replacement machine was bought on the same day for $12 400 cash.

What was the net decrease in the cash balance?

A $3700 B $5100 C $11 700 D $13 100

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21 [Turn over


6

19 Why would a bakery business not include a value for inventory of stationery in the statement of
financial position?

A It was expected it would be used in the next few months.


B It was purchased regularly and paid for in cash.
C It was not for resale.
D It was of very low value.

20 Shilpa’s financial year ends on 30 April. On 31 March 2021 she wrote off a debt owed by Tahir as
irrecoverable.

Which entry did Shilpa make on 31 March 2021?

debit credit

A income statement Tahir


B irrecoverable debts income statement
C irrecoverable debts Tahir
D Tahir irrecoverable debts

21 How should inventory be valued?

A cost
B higher of cost and net realisable value
C lower of cost and net realisable value
D net realisable value

22 James is an accountant and operates as a sole trader.

Which items would not appear in his statement of financial position?

1 long-term loan
2 retained earnings
3 trade payables

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 only D 2 and 3

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21


7

23 Zaha is a consultant who receives fees from clients.

How would Zaha calculate his profit for the year?

A fees received – cost of sales

B fees received – cost of sales + expenses


C fees received + expenses
D fees received – expenses

24 What is added to owner’s capital to calculate capital employed?

A current assets
B current liabilities
C non-current assets
D non-current liabilities

25 What is an advantage of forming a partnership?

A Decisions have to be recognised by all partners.


B Each partner is responsible for actions of other partners.
C Profits have to be shared among the partners.
D Responsibilities can be shared between the partners.

26 Ann and Ben are in partnership sharing profits and losses equally.

They provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2021.

profit for the year 20 000


interest on capital: Ann 5 000
Ben 4 000
drawings: Ann 8 000
Ben 7 000

What was Ben’s share of the residual profit?

A $5500 B $10 000 C $13 000 D $14 500

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21 [Turn over


8

27 Which statement about a receipts and payments account is incorrect?

A It includes amounts prepaid at the end of the year.


B It shows the surplus for the year.
C Non-monetary items are excluded.
D The balance represents cash and bank balances.

28 How does a manufacturer calculate prime cost?

A direct material + direct labour


B direct material + direct labour + direct expenses
C direct material + direct labour + direct expenses + factory overheads
D direct material + direct labour + factory overheads

29 Nula provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2021.

drawings for the year 3 900


net assets at 1 April 2020 60 500
net assets at 31 March 2021 72 275

What was the profit or loss for the year ended 31 March 2021?

A $7875 loss
B $7875 profit
C $15 675 loss
D $15 675 profit

30 A trader provided the following information.

cost of sales 80 000


expenses 4 000
profit for the year 16 000

What was the profit margin?

A 16% B 20% C 21.05% D 26.67%

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21


9

31 A trader provided the following information.

$ $

revenue 3600
opening inventory 100
purchases 2600
2700
closing inventory 300 2400
gross profit 1200

It was found that the closing inventory should have been $400.

What was the correct rate of inventory turnover?

A 6 times
B 8 times
C 9.2 times
D 14.4 times

32 Sally’s business has reached the overdraft limit set by the bank of $1500 and is not able to pay its
debts when they fall due.

Sally is considering the following proposals.

1 asking the bank to increase the bank overdraft limit to $2000


2 borrowing $2000 from a relative and paying the money back in six months
3 obtaining a loan from the bank of $2000 repayable in two years
4 paying $2000 from Sally’s personal bank account into the business bank account

Which proposals will improve the working capital of the business?

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21 [Turn over


10

33 Company X and Company Y provided the following information.

Company X Company Y

gross margin 36.7% 42.6%


profit margin 5.4% 5.4%

Which statement is correct?

A Both companies earned the same amount of profit for the year.
B Company X had a better gross margin than Company Y.
C Company Y had a larger proportion of expenses than Company X.
D The cost of sales of Company X was lower than that of Company Y.

34 The current ratio of X is 2 : 1. The current ratio of Y is 1.3 : 1.

What does a comparison of these ratios show?

A X has fewer liabilities than Y.


B X has more liquidity than Y.
C Y has fewer current assets than X.
D Y has more inventory than X.

35 Which international accounting objectives are described by the following statements?

1 Information in financial statements must be free from material error and bias.
2 Users must be able to identify differences and similarities between information in
different financial statements.

statement 1 statement 2

A comparability understandability
B reliability comparability
C reliability understandability
D understandability reliability

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/12/M/J/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 A 1

2 D 1

3 A 1

4 A 1

5 B 1

6 B 1

7 C 1

8 B 1

9 C 1

10 A 1

11 D 1

12 C 1

13 D 1

14 B 1

15 C 1

16 C 1

17 C 1

18 B 1

19 D 1

20 C 1

21 C 1

22 D 1

23 D 1

24 D 1

25 D 1

26 A 1

27 B 1

28 B 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 3


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 D 1

30 A 1

31 C 1

32 D 1

33 C 1

34 B 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*8476545783*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB21 06_0452_13/FP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Which statements about book-keeping and accounting are correct?

1 Accounting is performed periodically rather than daily.


2 Accounting relies on having accurate book-keeping records.
3 Book-keeping includes the preparation of financial statements.
4 Book-keeping involves the recording of financial transactions.

A 1, 2 and 4 B 1 and 3 C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 4 only

2 What increases owner’s capital?

A bank loan extended from five to ten years


B purchase of inventory on credit
C purchase of machinery by cheque
D transfer of vehicle to business from private use

3 William paid $500 in cash to Sonia for rent.

How did Sonia record this?

account debited account credited

A cash rent receivable


B rent receivable cash
C rent receivable William
D William rent receivable

4 Abdul buys all his machinery on credit. He provided the following information.

at 30 April 2020 at 30 April 2021


$ $

machinery at cost 30 000 42 000


amounts owing to suppliers of machinery 19 000 ?

During the year Abdul paid $25 000 to the suppliers of his machinery.

How much did he owe them on 30 April 2021?

A $6000 B $13 000 C $17 000 D $32 000

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21


3

5 Shula’s financial year ends on 31 March. On 1 April 2021 there was a credit balance of $100 on
Yasmin’s account in Shula’s purchases ledger.

What does this mean?

A Shula had paid $100 to Yasmin.


B Shula owed $100 to Yasmin.
C Yasmin had paid $100 to Shula.
D Yasmin owed $100 to Shula.

6 Hasina buys radios from Nazneen at a list price of $10 each. Hasina bought 12 radios and was
offered 20% trade discount and 4% cash discount. Two radios were faulty and were returned to
Nazneen.

What was the total of the credit note issued by Nazneen?

A $15.36 B $16.00 C $19.20 D $20.00

7 Jameel sold goods on credit.

Where did he first record the invoice he issued?

A general journal
B general ledger
C sales journal
D sales ledger

8 Which statements about a three-column cash book are correct?

1 It contains ledger accounts for bank and cash.


2 It contains ledger accounts for discounts allowed and received.
3 It records transactions before they are recorded in the ledgers.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 3 D 3 only

9 Which statement is not true about a trial balance?

A It is a list of ledger account balances at a certain date.


B It can assist in finding arithmetical errors.
C It is part of the double entry system.
D It is useful in preparing financial statements.

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21 [Turn over


4

10 Which error is an error of original entry?

A sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered as $320 in both the
disposal account and Janet’s account
B sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered in the office equipment
account and Jason’s account
C sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered in the sales account and
Janet’s account
D sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 not entered in any accounts

11 A cheque, $85, received from Shakeel, was credited to the account of Shamz.

Which journal entry corrects this error?

debit credit
$ $
A bank 85
Shakeel 85
B Shakeel 85
Shamz 85
C Shamz 85
bank 85
D Shamz 85
Shakeel 85

12 Jamal’s bank statement at 1 May 2021 showed a bank overdraft of $1460.

At that date there were unpresented cheques of $385 and uncredited deposits of $255.

What was the cash book balance on 1 May 2021?

A $1330 credit
B $1330 debit
C $1590 credit
D $1590 debit

13 What is included in a purchases ledger control account?

A cash purchases
B debts written off as irrecoverable
C discount allowed
D goods returned to credit suppliers

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21


5

14 Javid’s sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $12 000. Interest on an overdue
account, $40, and discount allowed, $150, had been omitted.

What was the correct balance on the sales ledger control account?

A $11 810 B $11 890 C $12 110 D $12 190

15 Which statements about capital expenditure are correct?

1 It is money spent on day-to-day business operations.


2 It is money spent on purchasing non-current assets.
3 It is recorded in the statement of financial position.
4 It includes expenses relating to non-current assets.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

16 Nia sold equipment with a net book value of $200. The proceeds of the sale, $250, were credited
to the sales account and debited in the cash book.

What was the effect of this error on Nia’s gross profit and profit for the year?

gross profit $ profit for the year $

A overstated 50 overstated 50
B overstated 200 understated 250
C overstated 250 overstated 200
D understated 250 understated 200

17 Why does a business provide for depreciation on non-current assets?

A to charge the cost of non-current assets against profit in the year of purchase
B to ensure that non-current assets appear at book value in the statement of financial position
C to ensure that the matching principle is applied when preparing financial statements
D to retain cash in the business for replacement of non-current assets

18 A machine with an original cost of $10 000 had been depreciated for two years at the rate of 10%
per annum using the straight-line basis. It was then sold for cash with the loss on disposal
amounting to $700.

A replacement machine was bought on the same day for $12 400 cash.

What was the net decrease in the cash balance?

A $3700 B $5100 C $11 700 D $13 100

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21 [Turn over


6

19 Why would a bakery business not include a value for inventory of stationery in the statement of
financial position?

A It was expected it would be used in the next few months.


B It was purchased regularly and paid for in cash.
C It was not for resale.
D It was of very low value.

20 Shilpa’s financial year ends on 30 April. On 31 March 2021 she wrote off a debt owed by Tahir as
irrecoverable.

Which entry did Shilpa make on 31 March 2021?

debit credit

A income statement Tahir


B irrecoverable debts income statement
C irrecoverable debts Tahir
D Tahir irrecoverable debts

21 How should inventory be valued?

A cost
B higher of cost and net realisable value
C lower of cost and net realisable value
D net realisable value

22 James is an accountant and operates as a sole trader.

Which items would not appear in his statement of financial position?

1 long-term loan
2 retained earnings
3 trade payables

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 only D 2 and 3

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21


7

23 Zaha is a consultant who receives fees from clients.

How would Zaha calculate his profit for the year?

A fees received – cost of sales

B fees received – cost of sales + expenses


C fees received + expenses
D fees received – expenses

24 What is added to owner’s capital to calculate capital employed?

A current assets
B current liabilities
C non-current assets
D non-current liabilities

25 What is an advantage of forming a partnership?

A Decisions have to be recognised by all partners.


B Each partner is responsible for actions of other partners.
C Profits have to be shared among the partners.
D Responsibilities can be shared between the partners.

26 Ann and Ben are in partnership sharing profits and losses equally.

They provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2021.

profit for the year 20 000


interest on capital: Ann 5 000
Ben 4 000
drawings: Ann 8 000
Ben 7 000

What was Ben’s share of the residual profit?

A $5500 B $10 000 C $13 000 D $14 500

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21 [Turn over


8

27 Which statement about a receipts and payments account is incorrect?

A It includes amounts prepaid at the end of the year.


B It shows the surplus for the year.
C Non-monetary items are excluded.
D The balance represents cash and bank balances.

28 How does a manufacturer calculate prime cost?

A direct material + direct labour


B direct material + direct labour + direct expenses
C direct material + direct labour + direct expenses + factory overheads
D direct material + direct labour + factory overheads

29 Nula provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2021.

drawings for the year 3 900


net assets at 1 April 2020 60 500
net assets at 31 March 2021 72 275

What was the profit or loss for the year ended 31 March 2021?

A $7875 loss
B $7875 profit
C $15 675 loss
D $15 675 profit

30 A trader provided the following information.

cost of sales 80 000


expenses 4 000
profit for the year 16 000

What was the profit margin?

A 16% B 20% C 21.05% D 26.67%

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21


9

31 A trader provided the following information.

$ $

revenue 3600
opening inventory 100
purchases 2600
2700
closing inventory 300 2400
gross profit 1200

It was found that the closing inventory should have been $400.

What was the correct rate of inventory turnover?

A 6 times
B 8 times
C 9.2 times
D 14.4 times

32 Sally’s business has reached the overdraft limit set by the bank of $1500 and is not able to pay its
debts when they fall due.

Sally is considering the following proposals.

1 asking the bank to increase the bank overdraft limit to $2000


2 borrowing $2000 from a relative and paying the money back in six months
3 obtaining a loan from the bank of $2000 repayable in two years
4 paying $2000 from Sally’s personal bank account into the business bank account

Which proposals will improve the working capital of the business?

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21 [Turn over


10

33 Company X and Company Y provided the following information.

Company X Company Y

gross margin 36.7% 42.6%


profit margin 5.4% 5.4%

Which statement is correct?

A Both companies earned the same amount of profit for the year.
B Company X had a better gross margin than Company Y.
C Company Y had a larger proportion of expenses than Company X.
D The cost of sales of Company X was lower than that of Company Y.

34 The current ratio of X is 2 : 1. The current ratio of Y is 1.3 : 1.

What does a comparison of these ratios show?

A X has fewer liabilities than Y.


B X has more liquidity than Y.
C Y has fewer current assets than X.
D Y has more inventory than X.

35 Which international accounting objectives are described by the following statements?

1 Information in financial statements must be free from material error and bias.
2 Users must be able to identify differences and similarities between information in
different financial statements.

statement 1 statement 2

A comparability understandability
B reliability comparability
C reliability understandability
D understandability reliability

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/M/J/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/13 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 A 1

2 D 1

3 A 1

4 A 1

5 B 1

6 B 1

7 C 1

8 B 1

9 C 1

10 A 1

11 D 1

12 C 1

13 D 1

14 B 1

15 C 1

16 C 1

17 C 1

18 B 1

19 D 1

20 C 1

21 C 1

22 D 1

23 D 1

24 D 1

25 D 1

26 A 1

27 B 1

28 B 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 3


0452/13 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

29 D 1

30 A 1

31 C 1

32 D 1

33 C 1

34 B 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 3 0 0 9 0 8 0 3 3 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 24 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (PQ) 200793/6
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Rahat is a trader.

The following transactions took place in March 2021.

March 3 Cash sales, $580, were paid directly into Rahat’s business bank account

6 Paid insurance, $360, by direct debit

9 Paid $196 to GH Limited by telephone transfer, having deducted 2% cash


discount from the amount due

13 Paid $75 cash for stationery

17 Cash sales, $140

27 Sold old office equipment to Burgess, who paid $50 by cheque in full settlement

30 Paid $340 to Colin by cheque in full settlement of a debt of $350

REQUIRED

(a) Complete Rahat’s cash book on the page opposite.


Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 April 2021.

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


Rahat
Cash Book
Date Details Discount Cash Bank Date Details Discount Cash Bank

© UCLES 2021
allowed received
2021 $ $ $ 2021 $ $ $

March 1 Balance b/d .............. 150 ................ March 1 Balance b/d .............. ................ 1980

.............. ...................................... .............. ................ ................ .............. ...................................... .............. ................ ................

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
3

0452/21/M/J/21
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............

.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
[11]

[Turn over
4

(b) Complete the following table by placing a tick (3) in the correct column to indicate whether
each item would be used to update the cash book or would appear in the bank reconciliation
statement.

Update the Bank


cash book reconciliation
statement
Cheque from Burgess dishonoured

Cheque to Colin unpresented

Overdraft interest

Standing order paid for rates


[4]

Rahat is concerned about the level of her bank overdraft. She is considering applying for a bank
loan. This would enable her to pay off her bank overdraft and to purchase new office furniture.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise Rahat whether she should apply for the bank loan. Justify your answer by providing
two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21 [Turn over


6

2 John and Banu are partners.

The partners provided the following list of balances at 31 March 2021.

$
Revenue 158 000
Inventory at 1 April 2020 9 400
Purchases 69 200
Rates and insurance 11 250
Wages 10 475
General expenses 9 675
Discount allowed 2 000
Commission receivable 4 800
Balance at bank 4 000
Trade receivables 14 150
Trade payables 5 835
Premises at cost 130 000
Fittings at cost 18 000
Provision for depreciation of fittings 8 100
Loan from John 10 000
Capital accounts
John 75 000
Banu 50 000
Current accounts
John 4 050
Banu 2 365
Drawings
John 19 000
Banu 21 000

Additional information

1 Inventory at 31 March 2021 was valued at $9200.

2 Rates of $650 were unpaid at 31 March 2021.

3 Commission receivable of $300 was due at 31 March 2021.

4 Depreciation on fittings is to be charged at 15% per annum using the straight-line method.

5 The partnership agreement provides for:

interest on partner’s loan of 5% per annum


interest on drawings of 6%
interest on capital of 3% per annum
a salary to John of $8500 per annum
residual profits and losses to be shared 40% to John and 60% to Banu.

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


7

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the income statement for John and Banu for the year ended 31 March 2021.

John and Banu


Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

[9]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21 [Turn over


8

(b) Prepare the appropriation account for John and Banu for the year ended 31 March 2021.

John and Banu


Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

[5]

(c) State the purpose of:

(i) charging interest on the partners’ drawings

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) paying interest on the loan from John.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


9

(d) Complete the table by placing a tick (3) against each statement which describes an advantage
to John of being in a partnership with Banu.

Continuity of existence of the business

Banu may have skills and knowledge which John does not have
John is only liable for business debts up to the amount he agreed to
contribute
Additional finance is available to the business

Risks and responsibilities are shared


John is bound by the actions of Banu carried out on behalf of the
business
John can discuss matters with Banu before making decisions
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21 [Turn over


10

3 TC Limited is a manufacturing company. The company’s year end is 31 January.


On 31 January 2021, the company’s ledger account balances included the following.

$
Inventory at 1 February 2020
Raw materials 7 500
Work in progress 11 220
Finished goods 925
Purchases
Raw materials 91 400
Finished goods 6 850
Wages
Factory operatives 52 000
Factory supervisor 23 100
Rent and rates 19 620
Insurance 4 600
General factory expenses 4 200
Carriage inwards on raw materials 6 280
Factory equipment at cost 90 000
Provision for depreciation of factory equipment 30 960

Additional information

1 Inventory at 31 January 2021

Raw materials 8 000


Work in progress 11 900
Finished goods 1 075

2 The factory equipment is to be depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing balance
method.

3 In December 2020, $3600 was paid for rent for the period 1 December 2020 to
28 February 2021.

4 At 31 January 2021 rates of $550 were unpaid.

5 Rent and rates are to be apportioned equally between the factory and the office.

6 Insurance is to be apportioned 75% to the factory and 25% to the office.

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the rent and rates account for TC Limited for the year ended 31 January 2021.
Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 February 2021.

TC Limited
Rent and rates account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[5]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21 [Turn over


12

(b) Prepare the manufacturing account for TC Limited for the year ended 31 January 2021.

TC Limited
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 January 2021
$ $

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

[10]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


13

The directors of TC Limited are considering the purchase of various low-value items of office
equipment.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise the directors whether or not they should charge depreciation on these items.
Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21 [Turn over


14

4 Neith is a trader. Her financial year ends on 31 March.


Neith prepared the following trial balance which contains errors.

Neith
Trial Balance at 31 March 2021
Debit Credit

$ $
Fixtures and equipment at cost 300 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 120 000
Inventory 9 100
Trade receivables 16 100
Provision for doubtful debts 322
Petty cash 100
Bank overdraft 11 400
Trade payables 3 200
Capital at 1 April 2020 160 000
Sales 107 498
Purchases 41 520
Rent and rates 16 000
Office expenses 9 000
General expenses 8 150
Suspense 210 594
506 492 506 492

Additional information

1 The value of inventory on 31 March 2021 was included in the trial balance.
On 1 April 2020 the inventory was valued at $8800.

2 On 30 March 2021, a motor vehicle was sold at book value, $2750. The disposal was
correctly recorded but no entry was made in the account of the purchaser. The purchaser
was expected to pay the amount due on 30 April 2021.

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


15

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the corrected trial balance at 31 March 2021.

Neith
Corrected Trial Balance at 31 March 2021
Debit Credit
$ $

Fixtures and equipment at cost ......................... .........................

Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment ......................... .........................

Inventory ......................... .........................

Trade receivables ......................... .........................

Provision for doubtful debts ......................... .........................

Petty cash ......................... .........................

Bank overdraft ......................... .........................

Trade payables ......................... .........................

Capital at 1 April 2020 ......................... .........................

Sales ......................... .........................

Purchases ......................... .........................

Rent and rates ......................... .........................

Office expenses ......................... .........................

General expenses ......................... .........................

.......................................................... ____________ ____________

____________ ____________

[6]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21 [Turn over


16

Neith later discovered the following errors.

1 The total of the general expenses column of the petty cash book, $32, for May 2020 had
been posted to the office expenses account.

2 A payment received, $75, from Anya, a credit customer, had been credited to the sales
account.

3 A credit purchase, $120, from Samir had been omitted from the books of account.

4 A cheque payment, $19, for office expenses, had been recorded as $91.

5 An invoice for office cleaning, $235, had been debited to the fixtures and equipment account.

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare the journal entry to correct each of the above errors. Narratives are not required.

Neith
Journal
Error Details Debit Credit
number $ $

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

............. .................................................................... ....................... .......................

[10]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


17

(c) Complete the table by placing a tick (3) to indicate the effect of correcting each error 2 to 5.
Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.

The effect of correcting error 1 has been shown as an example.

Error number Increases Decreases No effect


capital capital on capital
1 3
2

5
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21 [Turn over


18

5 Omer is a trader. He provided the following information.

$
For the year ended 30 April 2021
Credit sales 191 000
Credit purchases 120 000
Gross profit 80 220
Commission receivable 20 280
Expenses 29 830

At 30 April 2021
Trade receivables 12 400
Trade payables 7 000

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the following ratios.

Trade receivables turnover (days)

workings answer
(round up to next
whole day)

Trade payables turnover (days)

workings answer
(round up to next
whole day)

[4]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


19

The year ended 30 April 2021 was Omer’s first year of trading. His main competitor is Ahu who
has been trading for many years. Ahu has established a good reputation.

The following information relates to Ahu’s business for the year ended 30 April 2021.

Trade receivables turnover 36 days


Trade payables turnover 31 days

REQUIRED

(b) (i) Suggest two reasons for the difference in the trade receivables turnover of the two
businesses.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Suggest two reasons for the difference in the trade payables turnover of the two
businesses.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21 [Turn over


20

Omer wants to increase sales and is considering employing a marketing manager who would be
paid $28 000 per annum.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise Omer whether or not he should employ a marketing manager. Justify your answer.
You may include reference to the possible effects on the income and expenses of the
business.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

Omer is concerned that an increase in sales would lead to an increase in irrecoverable debts.

REQUIRED

(d) State three ways by which Omer could reduce the possibility of irrecoverable debts.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

3 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


21

By writing off any irrecoverable debts, Omer would be applying the matching and prudence
principles.

It is also important for Omer to apply other accounting principles.

REQUIRED

(e) State why Omer should apply each of the following accounting principles.

Matching

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

Prudence

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

Consistency

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

Business entity

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


22

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


23

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


24

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/M/J/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 20 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Social Science-Specific Marking Principles
(for point-based marking)

1 Components using point-based marking:


• Point marking is often used to reward knowledge, understanding and application of skills. We give credit where the candidate’s answer
shows relevant knowledge, understanding and application of skills in answering the question. We do not give credit where the answer
shows confusion.

From this it follows that we:

a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark scheme
requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)

2 Presentation of mark scheme:


• Slashes (/) or the word ‘or’ separate alternative ways of making the same point.
• Semi colons (;) bullet points (•) or figures in brackets (1) separate different points.
• Content in the answer column in brackets is for examiner information/context to clarify the marking but is not required to earn the mark
(except Accounting syllabuses where they indicate negative numbers).

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
3 Calculation questions:
• The mark scheme will show the steps in the most likely correct method(s), the mark for each step, the correct answer(s) and the mark for
each answer
• If working/explanation is considered essential for full credit, this will be indicated in the question paper and in the mark scheme. In all
other instances, the correct answer to a calculation should be given full credit, even if no supporting working is shown.
• Where the candidate uses a valid method which is not covered by the mark scheme, award equivalent marks for reaching equivalent
stages.
• Where an answer makes use of a candidate’s own incorrect figure from previous working, the ‘own figure rule’ applies: full marks will be
given if a correct and complete method is used. Further guidance will be included in the mark scheme where necessary and any
exceptions to this general principle will be noted.

4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners who
marked that paper.

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Rahat 11
Cash Book
Date Details Disc. Cash Bank Date Details Disc. Cash Bank

2021 $ $ $ 2021 $ $ $

Mar 1 Balance b/d 150 Mar 1 Balance b/d 1980


3 Sales (1) 580 6 Insurance (1) 360
17 Sales (1) 140 9 GH Limited (1) 4 196
27 Disposal (1) 50 13 Stationery (1) 75
31 Balance c/d 2246 30 Colin (1) 10 340
31 Balance c/d 215
290 2876 14 290 2876
Apr 1 Balance b/d 215 Apr 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 2246
(1)OF (1)OF

+(1) dates

1(b) 4
Updating cash Bank reconciliation
book statement

Cheque from Burgess dishonoured  (1)

Cheque to Colin unpresented  (1)

Overdraft interest  (1)

Standing order paid for rates  (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) Advantages 5
Loan interest may be lower than overdraft interest (1)
No interest on overdraft to pay (1)
Have a longer time to repay a loan (1)
May improve relationship with bank (1)
Bank balance would be improved/liquidity would be improved (1)
New office furniture should lead to a better working environment (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 2)

Disadvantages
Loan will have to be repaid (1)
Loan interest will have to be paid (1)
Early repayment may not be allowed (1)
The bank may require security (1)
No income/profit is generated from the office furniture (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(a) John and Banu 9

Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021


$ $
Revenue 158 000
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 9 400
Purchases 69 200
78 600
Less Closing inventory 9 200
69 400 (1)
Gross profit 88 600 (1)OF
Commission receivable (4 800 + 300) 5 100 (1)
93 700
Less Expenses
Rates and insurance (11 250 + 650) 11 900 (1)
Wages 10 475}
General expenses 9 675}(1)
Discount allowed 2 000 (1)
Depreciation of fittings (15% × 18 000) 2 700 (1) 36 750
Profit from operations 56 950
Loan interest 500 (1)
Profit for the year 56 450 (1)OF

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(b) John and Banu 5


Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $
Profit for the year 56 450 OF
Add interest on drawings John 1 140}
Banu 1 260} (1) 2 400
58 850
Less
Interest on capital John 2 250}
Banu 1 500}(1)
3 750
Salary John 8 500 (1)
12 250
46 600
Profit share John (40% × 46 600) 18 640 (1) OF
Banu (60% × 46 600) 27 960 (1) OF 46 600

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c)(i) To discourage the partners from taking drawings (1) 1


Accept other valid points

2(c)(ii) To reward John for lending money to the business 1


To compensate John for the interest he could have earned elsewhere (1)
(Max 1)
Accept other valid points

2(d) 4
Continuity of existence of the business

Banu may have skills and knowledge which John does not have (1)

John is only liable for business debts up to the amount he agreed to contribute

Additional finance is available to the business }

Risks and responsibilities are shared  }(1)

John is bound by the actions of Banu carried out on behalf of the business

John can discuss matters with Banu before making decisions. (1)

+ (1) if items 1, 3 and 6 are un-ticked

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) TC Limited 5
Rent and rates account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2021 2021
Jan 31 Total to date (1) 19 620 Jan 31 Manufacturing account (1)OF 9 485
Balance c/d (rates) 550 Income statement (1)OF 9 485
Balance c/d (rent) 1 200
20 170 20 170
Feb 1 Balance b/d (rent) (1) 1 200 Feb 1 Balance b/d (rates) (1) 550

Ignore dates

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) TC Limited 10
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 January 2021
$ $
Cost of material consumed
Opening inventory of raw material 7 500
Purchases of raw material 91 400
Carriage inwards 6 280 97 680
105 180
Less Closing inventory of raw material 8 000
97 180 (1)
Direct wages 52 000 (1)
Prime cost 149 180 (1) OF
Factory overheads
Wages of factory supervisor 23 100 (1)
Rent and rates 9 485 (1)OF
Insurance (75% × 4 600) 3 450 (1)
General expenses 4 200
Depreciation of factory equipment
(90 000 – 30 960) × 20% 11 808 (1) 52 043
201 223 (1)OF
Add opening work-in-progress 11 220 *
212 443
Less closing work-in-progress 11 900 *
Cost of production 200 543 (1) OF

* (1) for both opening and closing work-in-progress

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(c) Advantages 5
To apply the principle of consistency OR the other non-current assets are depreciated so these should also be depreciated
(1)
To apply the principle of matching OR to spread the cost over expected useful life (1)
Are non-current assets so should be depreciated/they lose value over their useful life so should be depreciated (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 2)

Disadvantages
The cost of the items may not be material (1)
The amount of depreciation would be insignificant (1)
The items may not last more than one year (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) Neith 6
Corrected Trial balance at 31 March 2021
$ $
Fixtures and equipment at cost 300 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 120 000 (1)
Inventory 8 800 (1)
Trade receivables 16 100 (1)
Provision for doubtful debts 322
Petty cash 100
Bank overdraft 11 400 (1)
Trade payables 3 200
Capital at 1 April 2020 160 000
Sales 107 498
Purchases 41 520
Rent and rates 16 000
Office expenses 9 000
General expenses 8 150
Other receivables 2 750 (1)
______ ______
402 420 402 420 (1)both

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(b) Neith 10
Journal
Error number Details Debit Credit
$ $

1 General expenses 32 (1)


Office expenses 32 (1)

2 Sales 75 (1)
Anya 75 (1)

3 Purchases 120 (1)


Samir 120 (1)

4 Bank 72 (1)
Office expenses 72 (1)

5 Office expenses/cleaning expenses 235 (1)


Fixtures and equipment 235 (1)

4(c) 4
Error number Increases capital Decreases capital No effect on capital

1 

2  (1)

3  (1)

4  (1)

5  (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) 4
Trade receivables turnover (days)

workings answer

12 400 365 24 days (1)


× whole formula(1)
191000 1

Trade payables turnover (days)

workings answer

7 000 365 22 days (1)


× whole formula(1)
120 000 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(b)(i) Answers to be based on OF answers to (a) 2

Ahu Omer

Allows trade receivables a longer credit period (1) Allows trade receivables a shorter credit period (1)

Has an inefficient credit control system/slower to Has a more efficient credit control system/quicker to
resort to legal action (1) resort to legal action (1)

Offers no cash discount/lower rate of cash discount Offers cash discount/higher rate of cash discount for
for prompt payment (1) prompt payment (1)

Charge no interest/lower rate of interest on overdue Charge interest/higher rate of interest on overdue
Accounts (1) Accounts (1)

Does not make use of invoice discounting and Makes use of invoice discounting and factoring (1)
factoring (1)

Accept other valid points


(Max 2)

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(b)(ii) Answers to be based on OF answers to (a) 2

Ahu Omer

Is allowed a longer credit period by trade payables(1) Is allowed a shorter credit period by trade payables (1)

Suppliers offer no cash discount/lower rate of cash Suppliers offer cash discount/higher rate of cash
discount for prompt payment (1) discount for prompt payment (1)

Suppliers charge no interest/lower rate of interest on Suppliers charge interest/higher rate of interest on
overdue accounts (1) overdue accounts (1)

Credit customers take longer to pay (1) Credit customers pay more quickly (1)

Has less liquidity/is less able to pay the suppliers (1) Has more liquidity/is more able to pay suppliers (1)

Is a more established customer so suppliers may be Is paying quickly in order to establish a good
more flexible on credit period taken (1) relationship with suppliers (1)

Accept other valid points


(Max 2)

© UCLES 2021 Page 18 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(c) 5
Advantages of employing marketing manager Disadvantages of employing marketing manager

May increase sales and may increase profit (1) Manager’s salary will increase expenses (1)

May improve business reputation/brand image (1) Increased cost of marketing/marketing expenses (1)

Can utilise experience and skills of manager (1) Manager may not be experienced/effective (1)

May increase market share (1) Increase in sales/profit may be less than salary (1)

Accept other valid points Accept other valid points

(Max 4)

Recommendation (1)

5(d) Establish a credit limit for each customer (1) 3


Issue invoices and statements promptly (1)
Improve credit control/maintain good credit control system (1)
Refuse further supplies until outstanding balance paid (1)
Take legal action if necessary (1)
Allow cash discount for prompt payment (1)
Sell on a cash basis only/reduce credit sales (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 3)

© UCLES 2021 Page 19 of 20


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(e) Matching 4
To ensure that the revenue of the accounting period is matched against the costs of the same period (1)

Prudence
Profit should not be anticipated but all possible losses should be provided for (1)
To ensure that profits and assets are not overstated (1)
To ensure that losses and liabilities are not understated (1)
(Max 1)

Consistency
To ensure that accounting methods are used consistently from one period to the next (1)
To allow comparison of financial statements from year to year (1)
(Max 1)

Business entity
To ensure that the accounting records relate only to the business (1)
To ensure that the business is treated completely separately from the owner of the business (1)
(Max 1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 20 of 20


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 5 5 4 6 6 0 3 3 8 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (PQ) 200794/3
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Leo maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The imprest amount, which is $200, is
restored on the first day of each month.

All payments of less than $100 are made from petty cash. All cash receipts of less than $100 are
paid into petty cash.

On 1 April 2021 Leo had $48 in his petty cash box. Leo provided the following information for April
2021.

April 1 Restored petty cash imprest from the business bank account

5 Paid for office cleaning, $21

7 Paid for train ticket, $13

13 Paid $72 to Hunter, a trade payable

18 Paid taxi fare, $14

25 Received cash, $11, from Conrad, a trade receivable

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Leo’s petty cash book for the month of April 2021, on page 3.

Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 May 2021.

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


Leo
Petty Cash Book
Total Date Details Total Travel Office Ledger

© UCLES 2021
received paid expenses accounts
$ 2021 $ $ $ $

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................


3

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

0452/22/M/J/21
...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

[10]

[Turn over
4

(b) (i) Name the ledger to which each of the following would be posted.

The total of the column for travel expenses ......................................................................

The payment to Hunter .....................................................................................................


[2]

(ii) Name the accounting principle which is being applied when figures from the petty cash
book are posted to the appropriate ledgers.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Leo received a statement of account from Hunter.

REQUIRED

(c) State two purposes of issuing this statement to Leo.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

Leo is considering making all payments over $50 to trade payables by credit transfer.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Leo whether he should go ahead with this change. Justify your answer by providing
two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


5

2 Tej is a trader who sells goods on credit. His year end is 28 February.
Tej provided the following information.

$
At 1 March 2020
Trade receivables 6250
Other receivables (rent prepaid) 300

For the year ended 28 February 2021


Rent charge for the year 3900
Cheque payments for rent 30 June 2020 1950
30 November 2020 2100

At 28 February 2021
Trade receivables 7000

The provision for doubtful debts was 4% of trade receivables at 1 March 2020 and 6% of trade
receivables at 28 February 2021.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the rent payable account for the year ended 28 February 2021. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 March 2021.

Tej
Rent payable account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[6]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21 [Turn over


6

(b) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 28 February 2021.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 March 2021.

Tej
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[4]

(c) Name the accounting principle applied when the income statement is adjusted for rent
prepaid.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) (i) Explain how the realisation principle is applied to the recording of Tej’s credit sales.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain how the prudence principle is applied to the maintenance of Tej’s provision for
doubtful debts.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


7

Tej sells to a small number of customers. He has good working relationships with them and they
sometimes recommend him to potential customers.

Tej is concerned that his customers are taking a long time to pay him. He is considering charging
interest on overdue accounts.

REQUIRED

(e) Advise Tej whether or not he should charge interest on overdue accounts. Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21 [Turn over


8

3 The trial balance of HV Limited at 31 March 2021 was as follows.

HV Limited
Trial Balance at 31 March 2021
Debit Credit

$ $
Revenue 145 000
Inventory at 1 April 2020 5 820
Purchases 64 900
Rent and insurance 9 280
Wages 24 750
Operating expenses 8 500
Fittings at cost 200 000
Provision for depreciation of fittings 72 000
Trade receivables 12 500
Bank 13 765
Trade payables 6 615
4% Debentures (repayable 1 April 2031) 30 000
Ordinary share capital 70 000
Retained earnings 21 500
Dividend paid on ordinary shares 5 600
345 115 345 115

Additional information

1 Inventory at 31 March 2021 was valued at $6090.

2 Depreciation on fittings is to be charged at 20% per annum using the reducing balance
method.

3 Rent includes a payment of $1800 for the 3 months from 1 March 2021 to 31 May 2021.

4 Accrued wages at 31 March 2021 were $2250.

5 No debenture interest has been paid for the year ended 31 March 2021.

6 No dividends were outstanding at 31 March 2021.

7 $2000 is to be transferred to a general reserve on 31 March 2021.

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


9

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the income statement for HV Limited for the year ended 31 March 2021.

HV Limited
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

[8]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21 [Turn over


10

(b) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for HV Limited for the year ended 31 March 2021.

HV Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 March 2021
Details Ordinary General Retained Total
Share reserve earnings
capital
$ $ $ $

On 1 April 2020 ................... ................... ................... ...................

................................................... ................... ................... ................... ...................

................................................... ................... ................... ................... ...................

................................................... ................... ................... ................... ...................

On 31 March 2021 ................... ................... ................... ...................

[5]

(c) Calculate the return on capital employed for the year ended 31 March 2021.
The answer should be correct to two decimal places.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(d) State two differences between ordinary shares and preference shares.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


11

4 RIA Music Club owns its premises where it has a shop and a number of music rooms.
Shop sales are for cash and shop purchases are on credit. Mark-up is 20%.
The treasurer provided the following information.

At At
1 January 31 December
2020 2020
$ $
Subscriptions in advance 1 200 1 050
Subscriptions in arrears 5 215 5 830
Total shop trade payables 4 275 4 990
Shop inventory 2 500 2 500
Balance at bank 240 110

For the year to 31 December 2020


Subscriptions received 36 700
Shop purchases 34 200
Shop purchases returns 1 710
Interest charged on overdue shop trade payables accounts 200

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance the
account and bring down the balances on 1 January 2021.

RIA Music Club


Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[6]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21 [Turn over


12

(b) Prepare the total shop trade payables account for the year ended 31 December 2020 to
calculate the amount paid to shop trade payables.

RIA Music Club


Total shop trade payables account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ ................................... ............


[6]

(c) Calculate the revenue from shop sales for the year ended 31 December 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


13

The treasurer is concerned about the decreasing bank balance and the increase in shop trade
payables. He is looking into the possibility of renting out part of the club premises to an art society
for $400 per month.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise the treasurer whether renting out part of the premises is the most suitable way of
improving cash flow or whether other methods may be more suitable. Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21 [Turn over


14

5 Kia is a trader.
The totals of the trial balance prepared on 30 April 2021 did not agree and the difference was
placed in a suspense account.

Kia later discovered the errors shown in the table in part (a).

REQUIRED

(a) Complete the following table to show the entries required to correct each error.
The first one has been completed as an example.

Entries required to correct the error


Error Debit Credit
Account $ Account $

Cash drawings, $200, had been omitted Drawings 200 Suspense 200
from the drawings account.

A petty cash book payment, $31, to ................... ............ ................... ............


Abel, a supplier, had been recorded in
the column for office expenses. ................... ............ ................... ............

Sales returns, $105, had been correctly ................... ............ ................... ............
entered in the customer’s account but
had been credited to the purchases ................... ............ ................... ............
returns account.

A payment for motor expenses, $72, ................... ............ ................... ............


had been recorded in the motor
expenses account as $172. ................... ............ ................... ............

A purchase invoice, $102, from Abel, ................... ............ ................... ............


had been debited to Abel’s account and
credited to the purchases account. ................... ............ ................... ............

[9]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


15

(b) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance, as a
balancing figure.
Kia
Suspense account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[5]

(c) The account for Abel in Kia’s books showed that Kia owed him $327 before the errors were
corrected. Calculate the correct amount which Kia owed Abel at 30 April 2021.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

Kia has recorded the purchase of a calculator, $5, as an office expense.

REQUIRED

(d) State three reasons why Kia did not record this as a non-current asset.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

3 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/22/M/J/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Social Science-Specific Marking Principles
(for point-based marking)

1 Components using point-based marking:


• Point marking is often used to reward knowledge, understanding and application of skills. We give credit where the candidate’s answer
shows relevant knowledge, understanding and application of skills in answering the question. We do not give credit where the answer
shows confusion.

From this it follows that we:

a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark scheme
requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)

2 Presentation of mark scheme:


• Slashes (/) or the word ‘or’ separate alternative ways of making the same point.
• Semi colons (;) bullet points (•) or figures in brackets (1) separate different points.
• Content in the answer column in brackets is for examiner information/context to clarify the marking but is not required to earn the mark
(except Accounting syllabuses where they indicate negative numbers).

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
3 Calculation questions:
• The mark scheme will show the steps in the most likely correct method(s), the mark for each step, the correct answer(s) and the mark for
each answer
• If working/explanation is considered essential for full credit, this will be indicated in the question paper and in the mark scheme. In all
other instances, the correct answer to a calculation should be given full credit, even if no supporting working is shown.
• Where the candidate uses a valid method which is not covered by the mark scheme, award equivalent marks for reaching equivalent
stages.
• Where an answer makes use of a candidate’s own incorrect figure from previous working, the ‘own figure rule’ applies: full marks will be
given if a correct and complete method is used. Further guidance will be included in the mark scheme where necessary and any
exceptions to this general principle will be noted.

4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners who
marked that paper.

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Leo 10
Petty Cash Book
Total Total Office Ledger
Date Details Travel
received paid expenses accounts

$ 2021 $ $ $ $

48 Apr 1 Balance b/d (1)

152 Bank (1)

5 Office cleaning (1) 21 21

7 Train ticket (1) 13 13

13 Hunter (1) 72 72

11 18 Taxi fare (1) 14 14

25 Conrad (1)

120 27 21 72

91

211 30 Balance c/d 211

91 May 1 Balance b/d (1)OF

+ (1) dates
+ (1) OF totalling analysis columns

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(b)(i) Travel – general ledger (1) 2


Hunter – purchases ledger (1)

1(b)(ii) Duality (1) 1

1(c) To remind Leo to pay the balance (1) 2


To allow Leo to check his records (1)
To provide a summary of the transactions for the month/period (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

1(d) Advantages 5
Do not need to keep as much cash on the premises (1)
Less risk of theft or fraud (1)
Do not have to have face to face meeting to pay/save time (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)

Disadvantages
No source document immediately available (1)
Still have to pay amounts below $50 by other methods (1)
May be easier / more suitable to use cheques (1)
May Increase bank charges (1)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(a) Tej 6
Rent payable account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2021
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1) 300 Feb 28 Income Statement (1) 3 900
Jun 30 Bank (1) 1950 Balance c/d 450
Nov 30 Bank (1) 2100
4350 4 350
2021
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 450

+ (1) dates

2(b) Tej 4
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2021 2020
Feb 28 Balance c/d (7 000 × 6%) (1) 420 Mar 1 Balance b/d (6 250 × 4%) (1) 250
2021
Feb 28 Income statement (1)OF 170
420 420
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 420

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c) Matching (1) 1

Accept ‘Accruals’

2(d)(i) Revenue is regarded as being earned (1) when title to the goods is passed (1) 2
The profit on sales is not recognised until it is earned (1)
Profit is recognised when earned not when payment is received (1)
Profit is earned when the sale is completed/legal title passes (1)
No profit is recognised when goods are ordered (1)
Accept other valid points.
Max (2)

2(d)(ii) To ensure that profits/trade receivables are not overstated (1) 2


To ensure that trade receivables are shown at a realistic amount in the statement of financial position (1)
Profits and assets are reduced when the provision for doubtful debts is increased/profits and assets are increased when
the provision is reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(e) Advantages 5
Will encourage customers to pay earlier (1)
May increase liquidity/cash flow (1)
May reduce administration time/costs (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Good relationships with customers will be damaged (1)
May lose customers/sales may reduce (1)
May incur extra costs to attract customers/advertising/marketing (1)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) HV Limited 8
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021

$ $
Revenue 145 000
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 5 820
Purchases 64 900
70 720
Less Closing inventory 6 090
64 630 (1)
Gross profit 80 370 (1)OF
Less Expenses
Rent and insurance (9 280 (1) – (2/3 × 1 800) (1)) 8 080
Wages (24 750 + 2 250) 27 000 (1)
Operating expenses 8 500
Depreciation of Fittings 25 600 (1) 69 180
(20% × (200 000 – 72 000))
Profit from operations 11 190
Debenture interest 1 200 (1)
Profit for the year 9 990 (1)OF

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) HV Limited 5
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 March 2021

Ordinary
General Retained
Details share Total
Reserve earnings
capital

$ $ $ $

On 1 April 2020 70 000 21 500 91 500 (1)

Profit for the year 9 990 9 990 (1)OF

Dividend paid (5 600) (5 600) (1)

Transfer to general reserve 2 000 (2 000) (1)

On 31 March 2021 70 000 2 000 23 890 95 890 (1)OF

3(c) 11190 (1) OF 100 3


Return on Capital employed = × = 8.89% (1) OF
( 95 890 OF + 30 000 )(1) OF 1
3(d) There is a fixed rate of dividend on preference shares (1): the dividend on ordinary shares may vary (1) 4
There are higher risks and rewards for ordinary shares (1) than there are for preference shares (1)
Ordinary shares normally carry voting rights (1): preference shares do not (1)
Ordinary shares are part of the equity of the company (1). Redeemable preference shares are a non-current liability and
non-redeemable preference shares are part of the equity (1).
If the company is wound up, preference shares are repaid before ordinary shares(1)/ordinary shares are repaid after
preference shares (1)
Preference shares receive the dividend first (1) ordinary shares receive the dividend after the preference shares (1)
Accept other valid points
Must be two contrasting statements
Max (4)

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) RIA Music Club 6


Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 5 215 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 1 200
Dec 31 Income and expenditure (1)OF 37 465 Dec 31 Bank (1) 36 700
Balance c/d 1 050 Balance c/d 5 830
43 730 43 730

2021 2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 5 830 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 1 050

4(b) RIA Music Club 6


Total shop trade payables account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2020
Dec 31 Purchases returns (1) 1 710 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 4 275
Bank (1)OF 31 975 Dec 31 Purchases (1) 34 200
Balance c/d (1) 4 990 Interest (1) 200
38 675 38 675
2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d 4 990

4(c) Sales revenue = cost of sales + 20% 3


Cost of sales = 34 200 – 1 710 = 32 490 (1)
Sales revenue = 32 490 + 20% = 32 490 + 6 498 (1)OF = 38 988 (1)OF

Alternative calculation
Cost of sales 32 490 (1)
Gross profit 20% 6 498 (1)OF
Sales revenue 38 988 (1)OF

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(d) Benefits of renting out the premises 5


Extra income would be generated by renting out the premises (1)
Extra funds would be raised if the club is not fully used (1)
May increase the opportunity to recruit new members (1)
May increase the levels of shop trade to additional customers/increase shop profit (1)
Or other relative benefits
Max 2

Disadvantages
Income from existing members may fall/members may leave the club (1)
The facilities to members may be reduced (1)
Expenses may be increased (1)

Alternatives to renting out the premises


Extra funds could be raised by increasing subscriptions/charging interest on overdue subscriptions/fund raising/increasing
the mark-up on the sales of shop goods (1)
Expenses may be reduced (1)
Or other relative disadvantages/alternatives
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) 9
Entries required to correct the error

Error Debit Credit

Account $ Account $

Cash drawings, $200, had been omitted Drawings 200 Suspense 200
from the drawings account.

A petty cash book payment, $31, to Abel, a Abel 31 (1) Office expenses 31 (1)
supplier, had been recorded in the column
for office expenses.

Sales returns, $105, had been correctly Sales returns 105 (1) Suspense 210 (1)
entered in the customer’s account but had Purchases returns 105 (1)
been credited to the purchases returns
account.

A payment for motor expenses, $72, had Suspense 100 (1) Motor expenses 100 (1)
been recorded in the motor expenses
account as $172.

A purchase invoice, $102, from Abel, had Purchases 204 (1) Abel 204 (1)
been debited to Abel and credited to
purchases.

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 16


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(b) Kia 5
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2021 2021
April 30 Trial balance difference (1)OF 310 April 30 Drawings (1) 200
Motor expenses (1) 100 Sales returns (1) 105
Purchases returns (1) 105
410 410

5(c) $ 3
Original balance 327
Purchases 204 (1)
Office expenses (31) (1)
Corrected balance 500 (1)OF

5(d) The principle of materiality was applied (1). 3


The cost of the calculator was an immaterial amount (1)
The cost of recording the calculator as a non-current asset would have outweighed the benefit (1)
The amount of depreciation would be insignificant (1)
The calculator may not last over 12 months (1)

Accept other valid points


Max (3)

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 16


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 9 7 5 2 7 8 0 7 4 8 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (NF) 213461
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Leo maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The imprest amount, which is $200, is
restored on the first day of each month.

All payments of less than $100 are made from petty cash. All cash receipts of less than $100 are
paid into petty cash.

On 1 April 2021 Leo had $48 in his petty cash box. Leo provided the following information for April
2021.

April 1 Restored petty cash imprest from the business bank account

5 Paid for office cleaning, $21

7 Paid for train ticket, $13

13 Paid $72 to Hunter, a trade payable

18 Paid taxi fare, $14

25 Received cash, $11, from Conrad, a trade receivable

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare Leo’s petty cash book for the month of April 2021, on page 3.

Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 May 2021.

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


Leo
Petty Cash Book
Total Date Details Total Travel Office Ledger

© UCLES 2021
received paid expenses accounts
$ 2021 $ $ $ $

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................


3

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

0452/23/M/J/21
...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................

[10]

[Turn over
4

(b) (i) Name the ledger to which each of the following would be posted.

The total of the column for travel expenses ......................................................................

The payment to Hunter .....................................................................................................


[2]

(ii) Name the accounting principle which is being applied when figures from the petty cash
book are posted to the appropriate ledgers.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Leo received a statement of account from Hunter.

REQUIRED

(c) State two purposes of issuing this statement to Leo.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

Leo is considering making all payments over $50 to trade payables by credit transfer.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Leo whether he should go ahead with this change. Justify your answer by providing
two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


5

2 Tej is a trader who sells goods on credit. His year end is 28 February.
Tej provided the following information.

$
At 1 March 2020
Trade receivables 6250
Other receivables (rent prepaid) 300

For the year ended 28 February 2021


Rent charge for the year 3900
Cheque payments for rent 30 June 2020 1950
30 November 2020 2100

At 28 February 2021
Trade receivables 7000

The provision for doubtful debts was 4% of trade receivables at 1 March 2020 and 6% of trade
receivables at 28 February 2021.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the rent payable account for the year ended 28 February 2021. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 March 2021.

Tej
Rent payable account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[6]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21 [Turn over


6

(b) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 28 February 2021.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 March 2021.

Tej
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[4]

(c) Name the accounting principle applied when the income statement is adjusted for rent
prepaid.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) (i) Explain how the realisation principle is applied to the recording of Tej’s credit sales.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain how the prudence principle is applied to the maintenance of Tej’s provision for
doubtful debts.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


7

Tej sells to a small number of customers. He has good working relationships with them and they
sometimes recommend him to potential customers.

Tej is concerned that his customers are taking a long time to pay him. He is considering charging
interest on overdue accounts.

REQUIRED

(e) Advise Tej whether or not he should charge interest on overdue accounts. Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21 [Turn over


8

3 The trial balance of HV Limited at 31 March 2021 was as follows.

HV Limited
Trial Balance at 31 March 2021
Debit Credit

$ $
Revenue 145 000
Inventory at 1 April 2020 5 820
Purchases 64 900
Rent and insurance 9 280
Wages 24 750
Operating expenses 8 500
Fittings at cost 200 000
Provision for depreciation of fittings 72 000
Trade receivables 12 500
Bank 13 765
Trade payables 6 615
4% Debentures (repayable 1 April 2031) 30 000
Ordinary share capital 70 000
Retained earnings 21 500
Dividend paid on ordinary shares 5 600
345 115 345 115

Additional information

1 Inventory at 31 March 2021 was valued at $6090.

2 Depreciation on fittings is to be charged at 20% per annum using the reducing balance
method.

3 Rent includes a payment of $1800 for the 3 months from 1 March 2021 to 31 May 2021.

4 Accrued wages at 31 March 2021 were $2250.

5 No debenture interest has been paid for the year ended 31 March 2021.

6 No dividends were outstanding at 31 March 2021.

7 $2000 is to be transferred to a general reserve on 31 March 2021.

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


9

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the income statement for HV Limited for the year ended 31 March 2021.

HV Limited
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

................................................................................. ........................... ...........................

[8]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21 [Turn over


10

(b) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for HV Limited for the year ended 31 March 2021.

HV Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 March 2021
Details Ordinary General Retained Total
Share reserve earnings
capital
$ $ $ $

On 1 April 2020 ................... ................... ................... ...................

................................................... ................... ................... ................... ...................

................................................... ................... ................... ................... ...................

................................................... ................... ................... ................... ...................

On 31 March 2021 ................... ................... ................... ...................

[5]

(c) Calculate the return on capital employed for the year ended 31 March 2021.
The answer should be correct to two decimal places.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(d) State two differences between ordinary shares and preference shares.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


11

4 RIA Music Club owns its premises where it has a shop and a number of music rooms.
Shop sales are for cash and shop purchases are on credit. Mark-up is 20%.
The treasurer provided the following information.

At At
1 January 31 December
2020 2020
$ $
Subscriptions in advance 1 200 1 050
Subscriptions in arrears 5 215 5 830
Total shop trade payables 4 275 4 990
Shop inventory 2 500 2 500
Balance at bank 240 110

For the year to 31 December 2020


Subscriptions received 36 700
Shop purchases 34 200
Shop purchases returns 1 710
Interest charged on overdue shop trade payables accounts 200

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance the
account and bring down the balances on 1 January 2021.

RIA Music Club


Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[6]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21 [Turn over


12

(b) Prepare the total shop trade payables account for the year ended 31 December 2020 to
calculate the amount paid to shop trade payables.

RIA Music Club


Total shop trade payables account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ ................................... ............


[6]

(c) Calculate the revenue from shop sales for the year ended 31 December 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


13

The treasurer is concerned about the decreasing bank balance and the increase in shop trade
payables. He is looking into the possibility of renting out part of the club premises to an art society
for $400 per month.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise the treasurer whether renting out part of the premises is the most suitable way of
improving cash flow or whether other methods may be more suitable. Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21 [Turn over


14

5 Kia is a trader.
The totals of the trial balance prepared on 30 April 2021 did not agree and the difference was
placed in a suspense account.

Kia later discovered the errors shown in the table in part (a).

REQUIRED

(a) Complete the following table to show the entries required to correct each error.
The first one has been completed as an example.

Entries required to correct the error


Error Debit Credit
Account $ Account $

Cash drawings, $200, had been omitted Drawings 200 Suspense 200
from the drawings account.

A petty cash book payment, $31, to ................... ............ ................... ............


Abel, a supplier, had been recorded in
the column for office expenses. ................... ............ ................... ............

Sales returns, $105, had been correctly ................... ............ ................... ............
entered in the customer’s account but
had been credited to the purchases ................... ............ ................... ............
returns account.

A payment for motor expenses, $72, ................... ............ ................... ............


had been recorded in the motor
expenses account as $172. ................... ............ ................... ............

A purchase invoice, $102, from Abel, ................... ............ ................... ............


had been debited to Abel’s account and
credited to the purchases account. ................... ............ ................... ............

[9]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


15

(b) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance, as a
balancing figure.
Kia
Suspense account
Date Details $ Date Details $

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

............ .................................... ............ ............ .................................... ............

[5]

(c) The account for Abel in Kia’s books showed that Kia owed him $327 before the errors were
corrected. Calculate the correct amount which Kia owed Abel at 30 April 2021.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

Kia has recorded the purchase of a calculator, $5, as an office expense.

REQUIRED

(d) State three reasons why Kia did not record this as a non-current asset.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

3 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/M/J/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Social Science-Specific Marking Principles
(for point-based marking)

1 Components using point-based marking:


• Point marking is often used to reward knowledge, understanding and application of skills. We give credit where the candidate’s answer
shows relevant knowledge, understanding and application of skills in answering the question. We do not give credit where the answer
shows confusion.

From this it follows that we:

a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark scheme
requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)

2 Presentation of mark scheme:


• Slashes (/) or the word ‘or’ separate alternative ways of making the same point.
• Semi colons (;) bullet points (•) or figures in brackets (1) separate different points.
• Content in the answer column in brackets is for examiner information/context to clarify the marking but is not required to earn the mark
(except Accounting syllabuses where they indicate negative numbers).

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
3 Calculation questions:
• The mark scheme will show the steps in the most likely correct method(s), the mark for each step, the correct answer(s) and the mark for
each answer
• If working/explanation is considered essential for full credit, this will be indicated in the question paper and in the mark scheme. In all
other instances, the correct answer to a calculation should be given full credit, even if no supporting working is shown.
• Where the candidate uses a valid method which is not covered by the mark scheme, award equivalent marks for reaching equivalent
stages.
• Where an answer makes use of a candidate’s own incorrect figure from previous working, the ‘own figure rule’ applies: full marks will be
given if a correct and complete method is used. Further guidance will be included in the mark scheme where necessary and any
exceptions to this general principle will be noted.

4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners who
marked that paper.

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Leo 10
Petty Cash Book
Total Total Office Ledger
Date Details Travel
received paid expenses accounts

$ 2021 $ $ $ $

48 Apr 1 Balance b/d (1)

152 Bank (1)

5 Office cleaning (1) 21 21

7 Train ticket (1) 13 13

13 Hunter (1) 72 72

11 18 Taxi fare (1) 14 14

25 Conrad (1)

120 27 21 72

91

211 30 Balance c/d 211

91 May 1 Balance b/d (1)OF

+ (1) dates
+ (1) OF totalling analysis columns

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(b)(i) Travel – general ledger (1) 2


Hunter – purchases ledger (1)

1(b)(ii) Duality (1) 1

1(c) To remind Leo to pay the balance (1) 2


To allow Leo to check his records (1)
To provide a summary of the transactions for the month/period (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

1(d) Advantages 5
Do not need to keep as much cash on the premises (1)
Less risk of theft or fraud (1)
Do not have to have face to face meeting to pay/save time (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)

Disadvantages
No source document immediately available (1)
Still have to pay amounts below $50 by other methods (1)
May be easier / more suitable to use cheques (1)
May Increase bank charges (1)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(a) Tej 6
Rent payable account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2021
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1) 300 Feb 28 Income Statement (1) 3 900
Jun 30 Bank (1) 1950 Balance c/d 450
Nov 30 Bank (1) 2100
4350 4 350
2021
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 450

+ (1) dates

2(b) Tej 4
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2021 2020
Feb 28 Balance c/d (7 000 × 6%) (1) 420 Mar 1 Balance b/d (6 250 × 4%) (1) 250
2021
Feb 28 Income statement (1)OF 170
420 420
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 420

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c) Matching (1) 1

Accept ‘Accruals’

2(d)(i) Revenue is regarded as being earned (1) when title to the goods is passed (1) 2
The profit on sales is not recognised until it is earned (1)
Profit is recognised when earned not when payment is received (1)
Profit is earned when the sale is completed/legal title passes (1)
No profit is recognised when goods are ordered (1)
Accept other valid points.
Max (2)

2(d)(ii) To ensure that profits/trade receivables are not overstated (1) 2


To ensure that trade receivables are shown at a realistic amount in the statement of financial position (1)
Profits and assets are reduced when the provision for doubtful debts is increased/profits and assets are increased when
the provision is reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(e) Advantages 5
Will encourage customers to pay earlier (1)
May increase liquidity/cash flow (1)
May reduce administration time/costs (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Good relationships with customers will be damaged (1)
May lose customers/sales may reduce (1)
May incur extra costs to attract customers/advertising/marketing (1)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) HV Limited 8
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021

$ $
Revenue 145 000
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 5 820
Purchases 64 900
70 720
Less Closing inventory 6 090
64 630 (1)
Gross profit 80 370 (1)OF
Less Expenses
Rent and insurance (9 280 (1) – (2/3 × 1 800) (1)) 8 080
Wages (24 750 + 2 250) 27 000 (1)
Operating expenses 8 500
Depreciation of Fittings 25 600 (1) 69 180
(20% × (200 000 – 72 000))
Profit from operations 11 190
Debenture interest 1 200 (1)
Profit for the year 9 990 (1)OF

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) HV Limited 5
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 March 2021

Ordinary
General Retained
Details share Total
Reserve earnings
capital

$ $ $ $

On 1 April 2020 70 000 21 500 91 500 (1)

Profit for the year 9 990 9 990 (1)OF

Dividend paid (5 600) (5 600) (1)

Transfer to general reserve 2 000 (2 000) (1)

On 31 March 2021 70 000 2 000 23 890 95 890 (1)OF

3(c) 11190 (1) OF 100 3


Return on Capital employed = × = 8.89% (1) OF
( 95 890 OF + 30 000 )(1) OF 1
3(d) There is a fixed rate of dividend on preference shares (1): the dividend on ordinary shares may vary (1) 4
There are higher risks and rewards for ordinary shares (1) than there are for preference shares (1)
Ordinary shares normally carry voting rights (1): preference shares do not (1)
Ordinary shares are part of the equity of the company (1). Redeemable preference shares are a non-current liability and
non-redeemable preference shares are part of the equity (1).
If the company is wound up, preference shares are repaid before ordinary shares(1)/ordinary shares are repaid after
preference shares (1)
Preference shares receive the dividend first (1) ordinary shares receive the dividend after the preference shares (1)
Accept other valid points
Must be two contrasting statements
Max (4)

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) RIA Music Club 6


Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 5 215 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 1 200
Dec 31 Income and expenditure (1)OF 37 465 Dec 31 Bank (1) 36 700
Balance c/d 1 050 Balance c/d 5 830
43 730 43 730

2021 2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 5 830 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 1 050

4(b) RIA Music Club 6


Total shop trade payables account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2020
Dec 31 Purchases returns (1) 1 710 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 4 275
Bank (1)OF 31 975 Dec 31 Purchases (1) 34 200
Balance c/d (1) 4 990 Interest (1) 200
38 675 38 675
2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d 4 990

4(c) Sales revenue = cost of sales + 20% 3


Cost of sales = 34 200 – 1 710 = 32 490 (1)
Sales revenue = 32 490 + 20% = 32 490 + 6 498 (1)OF = 38 988 (1)OF

Alternative calculation
Cost of sales 32 490 (1)
Gross profit 20% 6 498 (1)OF
Sales revenue 38 988 (1)OF

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(d) Benefits of renting out the premises 5


Extra income would be generated by renting out the premises (1)
Extra funds would be raised if the club is not fully used (1)
May increase the opportunity to recruit new members (1)
May increase the levels of shop trade to additional customers/increase shop profit (1)
Or other relative benefits
Max 2

Disadvantages
Income from existing members may fall/members may leave the club (1)
The facilities to members may be reduced (1)
Expenses may be increased (1)

Alternatives to renting out the premises


Extra funds could be raised by increasing subscriptions/charging interest on overdue subscriptions/fund raising/increasing
the mark-up on the sales of shop goods (1)
Expenses may be reduced (1)
Or other relative disadvantages/alternatives
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) 9
Entries required to correct the error

Error Debit Credit

Account $ Account $

Cash drawings, $200, had been omitted Drawings 200 Suspense 200
from the drawings account.

A petty cash book payment, $31, to Abel, a Abel 31 (1) Office expenses 31 (1)
supplier, had been recorded in the column
for office expenses.

Sales returns, $105, had been correctly Sales returns 105 (1) Suspense 210 (1)
entered in the customer’s account but had Purchases returns 105 (1)
been credited to the purchases returns
account.

A payment for motor expenses, $72, had Suspense 100 (1) Motor expenses 100 (1)
been recorded in the motor expenses
account as $172.

A purchase invoice, $102, from Abel, had Purchases 204 (1) Abel 204 (1)
been debited to Abel and credited to
purchases.

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 16


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(b) Kia 5
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2021 2021
April 30 Trial balance difference (1)OF 310 April 30 Drawings (1) 200
Motor expenses (1) 100 Sales returns (1) 105
Purchases returns (1) 105
410 410

5(c) $ 3
Original balance 327
Purchases 204 (1)
Office expenses (31) (1)
Corrected balance 500 (1)OF

5(d) The principle of materiality was applied (1). 3


The cost of the calculator was an immaterial amount (1)
The cost of recording the calculator as a non-current asset would have outweighed the benefit (1)
The amount of depreciation would be insignificant (1)
The calculator may not last over 12 months (1)

Accept other valid points


Max (3)

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 16


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*3830955640*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

IB20 11_0452_11/FP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 A trader prepares financial statements each year.

What do these assist the trader to do?

A calculate the amount owing to credit suppliers


B calculate the cash drawings
C check the bank statement balance
D make decisions about the future

2 The following balances appeared in Hussein's books.

fixtures 6000
inventory 3300
trade receivables 3000
trade payables 4500
other receivables 500
other payables 300
loan to Imran 1000
bank overdraft 1400

What was the total of the liabilities?

A $4800 B $6200 C $6400 D $7200

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


3

3 The following account appeared in the books of Mary.

Paul account
$ $

April 1 balance b/d 90 April 21 returns 25


14 sales 150 30 bank 88
discount 2
balance c/d 125
240 240

Which statement is correct?

A On 1 April Paul owed Mary $90.


B On 14 April Paul sold goods, $150, to Mary.
C On 21 April Mary returned goods, $25, to Paul.
D On 30 April Mary owed Paul $125.

4 Which business document is used to update the cash book for standing order payments?

A bank statement
B cheque counterfoil
C paying-in slip
D receipt

5 On 1 March 2020 the bank column of a cash book had a credit balance of $290.

During March cheques totalling $580 were received and cheques totalling $610 were paid to
suppliers. Bank charges of $12 incurred in February were also entered in the cash book.

What was the balance of the bank column in the cash book on 1 April 2020?

A $248 credit
B $248 debit
C $332 credit
D $332 debit

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20 [Turn over


4

6 Ziningi prepared a trial balance. The total of the debit column was $225 750 and the total of the
credit column was $225 250.

What could explain the difference?

A Bank overdraft, $250, was recorded as a debit balance.


B Inventory, $500, was included as a debit balance.
C Purchases returns, $250, were included as a credit balance.
D Sales returns, $250, were included as a debit balance.

7 Rent received from a tenant was debited to the rent receivable account and credited to the cash
book.

Which type of error has been made?

A commission
B compensating
C complete reversal
D principle

8 A computer system purchased from Ace Computers for $1430 had been incorrectly recorded as
$1340 and was entered in the stationery account instead of the office equipment account.

Which journal entry corrects this error?

debit credit
$ $

A Ace computers 90
stationery 1340
office equipment 1340

B Ace computers 90
stationery 1340
office equipment 1430

C office equipment 1340


Ace computers 90
stationery 1340

D office equipment 1430


Ace computers 90
stationery 1340

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


5

9 Kate calculated her draft profit for the year at $28 400.

She later discovered the following errors.

1 Rent prepaid by Kate was understated by $1000.


2 Closing inventory was understated by $1500.

What was the correct profit for the year?

A $25 900 B $27 900 C $28 900 D $30 900

10 What would not be included in a sales ledger control account?

A cash sales recorded in the cash book


B cheques received from credit customers recorded in the cash book
C goods sold on credit recorded in the sales journal
D irrecoverable debts written off recorded in the journal

11 A trader debited the cost of repairing office equipment to the office equipment account.

How did this error affect the financial statements?

profit for non-current


the year assets

A overstated overstated
B overstated understated
C understated overstated
D understated understated

12 A trader uses the reducing balance method of depreciation.

What effect will this have over the life of the non-current asset?

A depreciation charged evenly over the years


B more depreciation charged in the early years
C more depreciation charged in the later years
D the non-current asset being revalued each year

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20 [Turn over


6

13 Rashid provided the following information at 31 December.

machinery at cost 52 000


provision for depreciation of machinery 23 000

Depreciation for the year is calculated at 20% on cost.

After the statement of financial position was prepared it was found that the machinery repairs
costing $2000 had been debited to the machinery account.

What is the correct balance on the provision for the depreciation of machinery account?

A $21 000 B $22 600 C $23 400 D $25 000

14 At the end of his financial year on 31 August 2020 a trader had prepaid insurance.

How will this appear in the insurance account and the statement of financial position at
31 August 2020?

insurance account statement of financial position

A credit balance carried down current asset


B credit balance carried down current liability
C debit balance carried down current asset
D debit balance carried down current liability

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


7

15 Hayley’s financial year ends on 30 September 2020. She provided the following information.

$
on 1 October 2019
rent receivable accrued 480
during the year ended 30 September 2020
rent received 6800
On 30 September 2020
rent received in advance 720

Which journal entry would be made on 30 September 2020?

debit credit
$ $
A income statement 5600
rent receivable 5600
B income statement 6560
rent receivable 6560
C rent receivable 5600
income statement 5600
D rent receivable 6560
income statement 6560

16 The balances in the books of Jason on 1 July 2019 included the following.

trade receivables 64 200


provision for doubtful debts 1 284

Trade receivables at 30 June 2020 were $58 500, of which $500 should be written off as
irrecoverable.

Jason wants to maintain his provision for doubtful debts at 2% of trade receivables.

What was the change in the provision for doubtful debts at 30 June 2020?

A $114 decrease
B $124 decrease
C $376 increase
D $386 increase

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20 [Turn over


8

17 Nirmal sells two products, product G and product H.

The following information is available about his inventory at the end of the financial year.

number cost price net realisable


product
of units per unit value per unit

G 1000 $2.00 $2.50


H 800 $1.50 $1.20

It was found that 100 units of product G were damaged and were unsaleable.

What was the total value of Nirmal’s inventory?

A $2760 B $3000 C $3260 D $3460

18 Which items will not be shown in an income statement prepared for a service business?

1 cost of sales
2 gross profit
3 profit for the year
4 wages paid to employees

A 1 only B 1 and 2 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

19 A trader provided the following information.

capital at 1 October 2019 52 000


motor vehicle given to the business by the trader 3 500
personal expenses paid out of business bank account 1 500
cash drawings made during the year 500

What was the capital at 30 September 2020?

A $46 500 B $50 000 C $53 500 D $55 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


9

20 John and Mark are in partnership. Profits and losses are shared in the ratio 3 : 2. John is entitled
to an annual salary of $12 000. The profit for the year ended 31 August 2020 was $52 000.

How much would be credited to the partners’ current accounts on 31 August 2020?

John’s Mark’s
current account current account
$ $

A 24 000 16 000
B 26 000 26 000
C 31 200 20 800
D 36 000 16 000

21 A partnership maintains both current and capital accounts for each partner. An inexperienced
book-keeper prepared the following account which contains errors.

Owen capital account


$ $

balance c / d 135 000 balance b / d 100 000


loan made to partnership 30 000
interest on capital 5 000
135 000 135 000

What should appear as the closing balance on Owen’s capital account?

A $75 000 B $100 000 C $105 000 D $130 000

22 Z Limited provided the following information.

5% debentures 50 000
general reserve 25 000
issued ordinary share capital 300 000
retained earnings 75 000
short-term bank loan 10 000

What was the equity?

A $325 000 B $400 000 C $450 000 D $460 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20 [Turn over


10

23 Which statement about preference shares is not correct?

A Preference shareholders do not have voting rights.


B Preference shareholders receive a fixed dividend.
C Preference shareholders have a prior claim before ordinary shareholders in the event of
liquidation.
D Preference shareholders receive their dividend after the ordinary shareholders have been
paid.

24 A sports club was formed on 1 September 2019.

What may appear in the receipts and payments account for the year ended 31 August 2020?

A closing bank balance


B closing inventory of club shop
C depreciation of sports equipment
D subscriptions in arrears

25 A manufacturing company provided the following information.

cost of raw materials 186 000


direct wages 75 000
machinery depreciation 45 000
factory supervisor’s salary 32 000
factory rent 24 000
machinery repairs 18 000

What was the prime cost of manufacturing?

A $186 000 B $261 000 C $293 000 D $380 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


11

26 A manufacturer’s work in progress at the start of the year was valued at $850. At the end of the
year it was valued at $10 200.

What was the effect of this increase on the cost of production and the cost of sales?

cost of cost of
production sales

A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase

27 A trader made the following forecasts for the business for the next financial year.

average inventory $80 000


rate of inventory turnover 6 times
mark-up 25%

What are the forecast sales for the next financial year?

A $360 000 B $480 000 C $576 000 D $600 000

28 Kim’s trade payables turnover increased.

What could have caused this?

A Kim’s customers took longer to pay their accounts.


B Kim’s credit purchases increased.
C Kim’s sales revenue increased.
D Kim took longer to pay her credit suppliers.

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20 [Turn over


12

29 A company provided the following information about its rate of inventory turnover.

year 1 24 times
year 2 25 times
year 3 27 times

What would explain the changes in the ratio?

A cost of sales is decreasing


B inventory is increasing
C sales volume is increasing
D selling price is increasing

30 A company provided the following information about its current ratio.

year 1 2.3 : 1
year 2 2.4 : 1
year 3 2.5 : 1

What would explain the changes in the ratio?

A Inventory is decreasing.
B Other payables are increasing.
C Other receivables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.

31 A trader wants to improve his gross margin.

How can this be done?

A Reduce administrative expenses.


B Reduce depreciation of equipment.
C Reduce rate of cash discount allowed.
D Reduce rate of trade discount allowed.

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


13

32 Zak has depreciated his machinery at the rate of 20% per annum using the straight-line method.

At 31 December 2018 the statement of financial position included:

machinery at cost 30 000


depreciation to date 12 000
18 000

On 31 December 2019 Zak was considering calculating the annual depreciation at 20% per
annum on the net book value of the machinery.

Which statement is correct?

A depreciation would be $3600 applying the consistency principle


B depreciation would be $3600 applying the prudence principle
C depreciation would be $6000 applying the consistency principle
D depreciation would be $6000 applying the prudence principle

33 The financial statements of a business are prepared on the basis that it will continue to operate
for many years into the future.

Which accounting principle is being applied?

A business entity
B going concern
C money measurement
D realisation

34 When Marina opened a business she purchased a stapler for the office.

She recorded this as office expenses rather than as office equipment.

Which accounting principle did Marina apply?

A consistency
B historic cost
C materiality
D prudence

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20 [Turn over


14

35 What is not an aim of international accounting standards?

A to ensure accounting standards in different countries agree


B to establish an organisation to set standards in every country
C to make it easier to compare companies’ financial statements
D to reduce the variety of accounting practices worldwide

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/11/O/N/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2020

Question Answer Marks

1 D 1

2 B 1

3 A 1

4 A 1

5 C 1

6 A 1

7 C 1

8 D 1

9 D 1

10 A 1

11 A 1

12 B 1

13 B 1

14 A 1

15 C 1

16 B 1

17 A 1

18 B 1

19 C 1

20 D 1

21 B 1

22 B 1

23 D 1

24 A 1

25 B 1

26 A 1

27 D 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 3


0452/11 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2020

Question Answer Marks

29 C 1

30 C 1

31 D 1

32 C 1

33 B 1

34 C 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*1786308326*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

IB20 11_0452_12/3RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 A trader prepares financial statements each year.

What do these assist the trader to do?

A calculate the amount owing to credit suppliers


B calculate the cash drawings
C check the bank statement balance
D make decisions about the future

2 What is not an example of a book-keeping entry?

A an entry made in the bank column of the cash book for a cheque received
B cost of goods purchased on credit entered in the supplier’s account
C expenses paid during the year entered in the income statement
D goods returned by a customer entered in the sales returns journal

3 The following balances appeared in Hussein's books.

fixtures 6000
inventory 3300
trade receivables 3000
trade payables 4500
other receivables 500
other payables 300
loan to Imran 1000
bank overdraft 1400

What was the total of the liabilities?

A $4800 B $6200 C $6400 D $7200

4 What does the owner’s equity consist of?

A the amount of money in the business bank account


B the amount owed by the business to the owner
C the total of the assets owned by the business
D the total of the current assets less the current liabilities

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20


3

5 Which entries did Sally make to record the following transaction?

Rashid, a credit customer, returned damaged goods.

account to account to
be debited be credited

A purchase returns Rashid


B Rashid purchase returns
C sales returns Rashid
D Rashid sales returns

6 The following account appeared in the books of Mary.

Paul account
$ $

April 1 balance b/d 90 April 21 returns 25


14 sales 150 30 bank 88
discount 2
balance c/d 125
240 240

Which statement is correct?

A On 1 April Paul owed Mary $90.


B On 14 April Paul sold goods, $150, to Mary.
C On 21 April Mary returned goods, $25, to Paul.
D On 30 April Mary owed Paul $125.

7 In which sections of Zamir’s ledger would the following accounts be maintained?

1 the sales account


2 the account of Harjit, a trade receivable

sales account Harjit account

A nominal (general) ledger purchases ledger


B nominal (general) ledger sales ledger
C purchases ledger sales ledger
D sales ledger purchases ledger

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20 [Turn over


4

8 Sue allows 2% cash discount to credit customers who settle their account within 28 days. Jane
purchased goods, list price $200, on 10 September. She returned these goods on 15 September.

Which entry would Sue make on 15 September?

A purchases returns journal $196


B purchases returns journal $200
C sales returns journal $196
D sales returns journal $200

9 A transaction was posted to the wrong account of the same class.

Which type of error was made?

A commission
B original entry
C principle
D reversal

10 Motor vehicle expenses, $50, were incorrectly debited to the motor vehicles account.

Which journal entry corrects this error?

debit credit
$ $

A motor vehicle expenses 50


motor vehicles 50
B motor vehicles 50
motor vehicle expenses 50
C motor vehicles expenses 50
motor vehicles 50
suspense 100
D suspense 100
motor vehicles expenses 50
motor vehicles 50

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20


5

11 Kate calculated her draft profit for the year at $28 400.

She later discovered the following errors.

1 Rent prepaid by Kate was understated by $1000.


2 Closing inventory was understated by $1500.

What was the correct profit for the year?

A $25 900 B $27 900 C $28 900 D $30 900

12 A trader’s bank statement showed a credit balance of $2940. The following items had not been
entered in the cash book.

bank interest received 70


credit transfer 280

What was the debit balance in the cash book before it was updated?

A $2590 B $2730 C $3150 D $3290

13 What is a purpose of preparing a sales ledger control account?

A to identify irrecoverable debts


B to make fraud more difficult
C to provide the total owed to trade payables
D to show the total of cash and credit sales

14 George is preparing his purchases ledger control account.

Which information would he obtain from his general journal?

A contra entries with the sales ledger


B goods returned to credit suppliers
C irrecoverable debts written off
D refunds received from credit suppliers

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20 [Turn over


6

15 A trader debited the cost of repairing office equipment to the office equipment account.

How did this error affect the financial statements?

profit for non-current


the year assets

A overstated overstated
B overstated understated
C understated overstated
D understated understated

16 Rashid provided the following information at 31 December.

machinery at cost 52 000


provision for depreciation of machinery 23 000

Depreciation for the year is calculated at 20% on cost.

After the statement of financial position was prepared it was found that the machinery repairs
costing $2000 had been debited to the machinery account.

What is the correct balance on the provision for the depreciation of machinery account?

A $21 000 B $22 600 C $23 400 D $25 000

17 A machine which cost $32 000 was sold for $14 000. The total depreciation at the date of disposal
was $15 000.

What was the profit or loss on disposal?

A $3000 profit
B $3000 loss
C $18 000 profit
D $18 000 loss

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20


7

18 Beena maintains a provision for doubtful debts of 3% of the trade receivables at the end of each
financial year.

On 1 September 2019 the provision for doubtful debts was $900.

On 31 August 2020 the trade receivables amounted to $42 800.

Which journal entry did Beena make on 31 August 2020?

debit credit
$ $
A income statement 384
provision for doubtful debts 384
B income statement 1284
provision for doubtful debts 1284
C provision for doubtful debts 384
income statement 384
D provision for doubtful debts 1284
income statement 1284

19 Nirmal sells two products, product G and product H.

The following information is available about his inventory at the end of the financial year.

number cost price net realisable


product
of units per unit value per unit

G 1000 $2.00 $2.50


H 800 $1.50 $1.20

It was found that 100 units of product G were damaged and were unsaleable.

What was the total value of Nirmal’s inventory?

A $2760 B $3000 C $3260 D $3460

20 What is not a service business?

A hairdressing salon
B accountant’s practice
C supermarket
D computer repair shop

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20 [Turn over


8

21 The financial year of Peter ends on 30 September. On 1 August 2020 Peter received rent $1000.
This covered the period from 1 July to 30 November 2020.

Which entry will be made in Peter’s statement of financial position on 30 September 2020?

A current asset $400


B current asset $500
C current liability $400
D current liability $500

22 In addition to a share of the profit a partner receives interest on capital, a salary and is charged
interest on drawings.

How are these recorded in the ledger accounts of the partner?

interest on capital salary interest on drawings

A credit capital account credit current account debit capital account


B credit current account debit capital account credit current account
C credit current account credit current account debit current account
D debit current account debit current account credit current account

23 A sports club provided the following information.

subscriptions for the year 26 800


profit on sale of refreshments 4 200
depreciation 1 500
rent and insurance 12 600
wages 3 200

What was the total income for the year?

A $15 800 B $17 300 C $22 600 D $31 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20


9

24 A club was formed on 1 July 2019.

During the year ended 30 June 2020 subscriptions received from members totalled $2500.

This included $120 paid in advance for the next financial year. Subscriptions outstanding on
30 June 2020 amounted to $280.

How much was recorded for subscriptions in the income and expenditure account for the year
ended 30 June 2020?

A $2100 B $2500 C $2660 D $2780

25 Anthony does not keep a full set of accounting records. He knows his opening and closing cash
balances and wishes to calculate his cash sales.

Which item does Anthony not need in order to calculate his cash sales?

A cash banked
B cash discount
C cash drawings
D cash expenses

26 A trader has not maintained a full set of accounting records.

How can she calculate the credit sales for the year?

A receipts from credit customers + closing trade receivables – discount allowed


– opening trade receivables
B receipts from credit customers – closing trade receivables + discount allowed
+ opening trade receivables
C receipts from credit customers – closing trade receivables – discount allowed
+ opening trade receivables
D receipts from credit customers + closing trade receivables + discount allowed
– opening trade receivables

27 A trader made the following forecasts for the business for the next financial year.

average inventory $80 000


rate of inventory turnover 6 times
mark-up 25%

What are the forecast sales for the next financial year?

A $360 000 B $480 000 C $576 000 D $600 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20 [Turn over


10

28 A company provided the following information about its current ratio.

year 1 2.3 : 1
year 2 2.4 : 1
year 3 2.5 : 1

What would explain the changes in the ratio?

A Inventory is decreasing.
B Other payables are increasing.
C Other receivables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.

29 A trader wants to improve his gross margin.

How can this be done?

A Reduce administrative expenses.


B Reduce depreciation of equipment.
C Reduce rate of cash discount allowed.
D Reduce rate of trade discount allowed.

30 Meesha provided the following information for her first year of trading.

sales (1000 units at $10 each) 10 000


cost of sales (1000 units at $4.50 each) 4 500
gross profit 5 500

In her second year of trading, Meesha reduced the selling price and sold 1500 units. Her gross
profit decreased by $250. There was no change in the cost per unit.

What was the total value of sales in the second year of trading?

A $9750 B $10 250 C $12 000 D $12 500

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20


11

31 AB Limited and CD Limited both started business on 1 January 2019 with an ordinary share
capital of $100 000. Neither company had any debentures or loans.

Both companies had the same profit in 2019.

Only AB Limited paid a dividend.

The return on capital employed (ROCE) was calculated using closing capital employed.

Which statement about AB Limited’s ROCE is correct when compared to that of CD Limited?

A It is higher because the dividend reduced retained earnings.


B It is lower because the dividend reduced capital employed.
C It is lower because the dividend reduced the profit for the year.
D It is the same as that of CD Limited.

32 Which interested party uses the financial statements of a business to assess current performance
and plan for future activities?

A banks
B employees
C government
D managers

33 The special skills of the employees are not recorded in the financial statements of a business.

Which accounting principle is being applied?

A historic cost
B materiality
C money measurement
D realisation

34 How can a business comply with the accounting principle of prudence?

assets losses

A avoid overstating avoid overstating


B avoid overstating avoid understating
C avoid understating avoid overstating
D avoid understating avoid understating

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20 [Turn over


12

35 What is not an aim of international accounting standards?

A to ensure accounting standards in different countries agree


B to establish an organisation to set standards in every country
C to make it easier to compare companies’ financial statements
D to reduce the variety of accounting practices worldwide

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/12/O/N/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2020

Question Answer Marks

1 D 1

2 C 1

3 B 1

4 B 1

5 C 1

6 A 1

7 B 1

8 D 1

9 A 1

10 A 1

11 D 1

12 A 1

13 B 1

14 A 1

15 A 1

16 B 1

17 B 1

18 A 1

19 A 1

20 C 1

21 C 1

22 C 1

23 D 1

24 C 1

25 B 1

26 D 1

27 D 1

28 C 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 3


0452/12 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2020

Question Answer Marks

29 D 1

30 C 1

31 A 1

32 D 1

33 C 1

34 B 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*3825567397*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

IB20 11_0452_13/2RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 A trader prepares financial statements each year.

What do these assist the trader to do?

A calculate the amount owing to credit suppliers


B calculate the cash drawings
C check the bank statement balance
D make decisions about the future

2 The following balances appeared in Hussein's books.

fixtures 6000
inventory 3300
trade receivables 3000
trade payables 4500
other receivables 500
other payables 300
loan to Imran 1000
bank overdraft 1400

What was the total of the liabilities?

A $4800 B $6200 C $6400 D $7200

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


3

3 The following account appeared in the books of Mary.

Paul account
$ $

April 1 balance b/d 90 April 21 returns 25


14 sales 150 30 bank 88
discount 2
balance c/d 125
240 240

Which statement is correct?

A On 1 April Paul owed Mary $90.


B On 14 April Paul sold goods, $150, to Mary.
C On 21 April Mary returned goods, $25, to Paul.
D On 30 April Mary owed Paul $125.

4 Which business document is used to update the cash book for standing order payments?

A bank statement
B cheque counterfoil
C paying-in slip
D receipt

5 On 1 March 2020 the bank column of a cash book had a credit balance of $290.

During March cheques totalling $580 were received and cheques totalling $610 were paid to
suppliers. Bank charges of $12 incurred in February were also entered in the cash book.

What was the balance of the bank column in the cash book on 1 April 2020?

A $248 credit
B $248 debit
C $332 credit
D $332 debit

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20 [Turn over


4

6 Ziningi prepared a trial balance. The total of the debit column was $225 750 and the total of the
credit column was $225 250.

What could explain the difference?

A Bank overdraft, $250, was recorded as a debit balance.


B Inventory, $500, was included as a debit balance.
C Purchases returns, $250, were included as a credit balance.
D Sales returns, $250, were included as a debit balance.

7 Rent received from a tenant was debited to the rent receivable account and credited to the cash
book.

Which type of error has been made?

A commission
B compensating
C complete reversal
D principle

8 A computer system purchased from Ace Computers for $1430 had been incorrectly recorded as
$1340 and was entered in the stationery account instead of the office equipment account.

Which journal entry corrects this error?

debit credit
$ $

A Ace computers 90
stationery 1340
office equipment 1340

B Ace computers 90
stationery 1340
office equipment 1430

C office equipment 1340


Ace computers 90
stationery 1340

D office equipment 1430


Ace computers 90
stationery 1340

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


5

9 Kate calculated her draft profit for the year at $28 400.

She later discovered the following errors.

1 Rent prepaid by Kate was understated by $1000.


2 Closing inventory was understated by $1500.

What was the correct profit for the year?

A $25 900 B $27 900 C $28 900 D $30 900

10 What would not be included in a sales ledger control account?

A cash sales recorded in the cash book


B cheques received from credit customers recorded in the cash book
C goods sold on credit recorded in the sales journal
D irrecoverable debts written off recorded in the journal

11 A trader debited the cost of repairing office equipment to the office equipment account.

How did this error affect the financial statements?

profit for non-current


the year assets

A overstated overstated
B overstated understated
C understated overstated
D understated understated

12 A trader uses the reducing balance method of depreciation.

What effect will this have over the life of the non-current asset?

A depreciation charged evenly over the years


B more depreciation charged in the early years
C more depreciation charged in the later years
D the non-current asset being revalued each year

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20 [Turn over


6

13 Rashid provided the following information at 31 December.

machinery at cost 52 000


provision for depreciation of machinery 23 000

Depreciation for the year is calculated at 20% on cost.

After the statement of financial position was prepared it was found that the machinery repairs
costing $2000 had been debited to the machinery account.

What is the correct balance on the provision for the depreciation of machinery account?

A $21 000 B $22 600 C $23 400 D $25 000

14 At the end of his financial year on 31 August 2020 a trader had prepaid insurance.

How will this appear in the insurance account and the statement of financial position at
31 August 2020?

insurance account statement of financial position

A credit balance carried down current asset


B credit balance carried down current liability
C debit balance carried down current asset
D debit balance carried down current liability

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


7

15 Hayley’s financial year ends on 30 September 2020. She provided the following information.

$
on 1 October 2019
rent receivable accrued 480
during the year ended 30 September 2020
rent received 6800
On 30 September 2020
rent received in advance 720

Which journal entry would be made on 30 September 2020?

debit credit
$ $
A income statement 5600
rent receivable 5600
B income statement 6560
rent receivable 6560
C rent receivable 5600
income statement 5600
D rent receivable 6560
income statement 6560

16 The balances in the books of Jason on 1 July 2019 included the following.

trade receivables 64 200


provision for doubtful debts 1 284

Trade receivables at 30 June 2020 were $58 500, of which $500 should be written off as
irrecoverable.

Jason wants to maintain his provision for doubtful debts at 2% of trade receivables.

What was the change in the provision for doubtful debts at 30 June 2020?

A $114 decrease
B $124 decrease
C $376 increase
D $386 increase

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20 [Turn over


8

17 Nirmal sells two products, product G and product H.

The following information is available about his inventory at the end of the financial year.

number cost price net realisable


product
of units per unit value per unit

G 1000 $2.00 $2.50


H 800 $1.50 $1.20

It was found that 100 units of product G were damaged and were unsaleable.

What was the total value of Nirmal’s inventory?

A $2760 B $3000 C $3260 D $3460

18 Which items will not be shown in an income statement prepared for a service business?

1 cost of sales
2 gross profit
3 profit for the year
4 wages paid to employees

A 1 only B 1 and 2 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

19 A trader provided the following information.

capital at 1 October 2019 52 000


motor vehicle given to the business by the trader 3 500
personal expenses paid out of business bank account 1 500
cash drawings made during the year 500

What was the capital at 30 September 2020?

A $46 500 B $50 000 C $53 500 D $55 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


9

20 John and Mark are in partnership. Profits and losses are shared in the ratio 3 : 2. John is entitled
to an annual salary of $12 000. The profit for the year ended 31 August 2020 was $52 000.

How much would be credited to the partners’ current accounts on 31 August 2020?

John’s Mark’s
current account current account
$ $

A 24 000 16 000
B 26 000 26 000
C 31 200 20 800
D 36 000 16 000

21 A partnership maintains both current and capital accounts for each partner. An inexperienced
book-keeper prepared the following account which contains errors.

Owen capital account


$ $

balance c / d 135 000 balance b / d 100 000


loan made to partnership 30 000
interest on capital 5 000
135 000 135 000

What should appear as the closing balance on Owen’s capital account?

A $75 000 B $100 000 C $105 000 D $130 000

22 Z Limited provided the following information.

5% debentures 50 000
general reserve 25 000
issued ordinary share capital 300 000
retained earnings 75 000
short-term bank loan 10 000

What was the equity?

A $325 000 B $400 000 C $450 000 D $460 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20 [Turn over


10

23 Which statement about preference shares is not correct?

A Preference shareholders do not have voting rights.


B Preference shareholders receive a fixed dividend.
C Preference shareholders have a prior claim before ordinary shareholders in the event of
liquidation.
D Preference shareholders receive their dividend after the ordinary shareholders have been
paid.

24 A sports club was formed on 1 September 2019.

What may appear in the receipts and payments account for the year ended 31 August 2020?

A closing bank balance


B closing inventory of club shop
C depreciation of sports equipment
D subscriptions in arrears

25 A manufacturing company provided the following information.

cost of raw materials 186 000


direct wages 75 000
machinery depreciation 45 000
factory supervisor’s salary 32 000
factory rent 24 000
machinery repairs 18 000

What was the prime cost of manufacturing?

A $186 000 B $261 000 C $293 000 D $380 000

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


11

26 A manufacturer’s work in progress at the start of the year was valued at $850. At the end of the
year it was valued at $10 200.

What was the effect of this increase on the cost of production and the cost of sales?

cost of cost of
production sales

A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase

27 A trader made the following forecasts for the business for the next financial year.

average inventory $80 000


rate of inventory turnover 6 times
mark-up 25%

What are the forecast sales for the next financial year?

A $360 000 B $480 000 C $576 000 D $600 000

28 Kim’s trade payables turnover increased.

What could have caused this?

A Kim’s customers took longer to pay their accounts.


B Kim’s credit purchases increased.
C Kim’s sales revenue increased.
D Kim took longer to pay her credit suppliers.

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20 [Turn over


12

29 A company provided the following information about its rate of inventory turnover.

year 1 24 times
year 2 25 times
year 3 27 times

What would explain the changes in the ratio?

A cost of sales is decreasing


B inventory is increasing
C sales volume is increasing
D selling price is increasing

30 A company provided the following information about its current ratio.

year 1 2.3 : 1
year 2 2.4 : 1
year 3 2.5 : 1

What would explain the changes in the ratio?

A Inventory is decreasing.
B Other payables are increasing.
C Other receivables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.

31 A trader wants to improve his gross margin.

How can this be done?

A Reduce administrative expenses.


B Reduce depreciation of equipment.
C Reduce rate of cash discount allowed.
D Reduce rate of trade discount allowed.

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


13

32 Zak has depreciated his machinery at the rate of 20% per annum using the straight-line method.

At 31 December 2018 the statement of financial position included:

machinery at cost 30 000


depreciation to date 12 000
18 000

On 31 December 2019 Zak was considering calculating the annual depreciation at 20% per
annum on the net book value of the machinery.

Which statement is correct?

A depreciation would be $3600 applying the consistency principle


B depreciation would be $3600 applying the prudence principle
C depreciation would be $6000 applying the consistency principle
D depreciation would be $6000 applying the prudence principle

33 The financial statements of a business are prepared on the basis that it will continue to operate
for many years into the future.

Which accounting principle is being applied?

A business entity
B going concern
C money measurement
D realisation

34 When Marina opened a business she purchased a stapler for the office.

She recorded this as office expenses rather than as office equipment.

Which accounting principle did Marina apply?

A consistency
B historic cost
C materiality
D prudence

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20 [Turn over


14

35 What is not an aim of international accounting standards?

A to ensure accounting standards in different countries agree


B to establish an organisation to set standards in every country
C to make it easier to compare companies’ financial statements
D to reduce the variety of accounting practices worldwide

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/13/O/N/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/13 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2020

Question Answer Marks

1 D 1

2 B 1

3 A 1

4 A 1

5 C 1

6 A 1

7 C 1

8 D 1

9 D 1

10 A 1

11 A 1

12 B 1

13 B 1

14 A 1

15 C 1

16 B 1

17 A 1

18 B 1

19 C 1

20 D 1

21 B 1

22 B 1

23 D 1

24 A 1

25 B 1

26 A 1

27 D 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 3


0452/13 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2020

Question Answer Marks

29 C 1

30 C 1

31 D 1

32 C 1

33 B 1

34 C 1

35 B 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 5 4 9 5 0 7 2 3 7 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (PQ) 207257
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Sariah owns a business selling ladies’ clothing. She maintains a system of double entry
bookkeeping.

The following occurred during September 2020.

1 Purchased a motor vehicle on credit from Sharpe Motors $6350.

2 Ruhee, a credit customer, was declared bankrupt owing Sariah $1200. The debt is to be
written off.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the above transactions. Narratives are not required.

Sariah
Journal

Details Debit Credit


$ $
............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................


[4]

Sariah is preparing her financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2020. She provides
the following information for fixtures and fittings.

2019 $
October 1 Fixtures and fittings at cost 28 600
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings 6 185
2020
January 31 Sold fixtures and received a cheque 1 150
The fixtures had been purchased on 1 February 2018 for $1500
March 31 Purchased new fixtures paying by cheque 3 500

Sariah’s policy is to provide depreciation on fixtures and fittings at 10% per annum using the
reducing balance method. A full year’s depreciation is charged in the year of purchase but none in
the year of disposal.

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


3

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 September 2020. Close the accounts
by balancing or by making an appropriate year end transfer.

Sariah
Fixtures and fittings account

Date Details $ Date Details $

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings account

Date Details $ Date Details $

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

Disposal account

Date Details $ Date Details $

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

[11]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


4

Sariah is considering forming a partnership with her friend Emy who runs a similar business.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise Sariah whether or not she should form a partnership with Emy. Justify your answer
with two advantages and two disadvantages of forming a partnership with Emy.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


6

2 Eniola compared her bank statement for July 2020 with the bank columns of her cash book. She
provided the following information.

$
Overdrawn balance shown in the cash book at 31 July 2020 3420
Direct debit payment dated 25 July 2020, had not yet been entered in
the cash book 350
A cheque received from a customer on 12 July 2020 was dishonoured.
This dishonoured cheque had not yet been recorded in the cash book 665
Bank charges on the bank statement had not yet been entered in
the cash book 45
Unpresented cheques at 31 July 2020 1290
Uncredited deposits at 31 July 2020 410

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the corrected balance of the bank columns in the cash book at 31 July 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement at 31 July 2020. Clearly identify the bank statement
balance at that date.

Eniola
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2020

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


7

Eniola is concerned that her bank balance has decreased significantly during the last year. She is
considering how to improve her liquidity.

REQUIRED

(c) Suggest one effect of each of the following proposals.

(i) Hire new non-current assets instead of purchasing them.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Delay paying credit suppliers.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Eniola’s financial year end is 31 July 2020. She provided the following information about the rent
and rates of her business.

On 1 August 2019, she owed two months’ rent totalling $900. On the same date, rates of $260
were prepaid up to 30 September 2019.

During the year ended 31 July 2020 the following payments were made by credit transfer.

2019 $
August 1 Seven months’ rent 3150
October 1 Twelve months’ rates 1860
2020
March 1 Six months’ rent 2700

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


8

REQUIRED

(d) Prepare the rent and rates account for the year ended 31 July 2020. Balance the account and
bring down the balances on 1 August 2020.

Eniola
Rent and rates account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2019 2019
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 260 Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 900

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........


[6]

(e) Identify the sections of the statement of financial position at 31 July 2020 in which each of the
balances on the rent and rates account would appear.

Rent ..........................................................................................................................................

Rates ........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(f) (i) Name one accounting principle Eniola would apply when recording the rent and rates in
her financial statements.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State how Eniola would apply the accounting principle named in (f)(i).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


9

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


10

3 Haziq has not maintained full accounting records for his business.

Haziq provided the following information for the year ended 31 July 2020.

At 1 August At 31 July
2019 2020
$ $
Bank loan 6 000 4 500
Inventory 8 400 ?
Non-current assets at net book value 35 580 32 450
Rent prepaid 240 –
Trade payables 6 280 7 460
Wages accrued – 610

Summary of bank account for the year ended 31 July 2020


Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2019
July 31 Sales receipts 166 000 Aug 1 Balance b/d 2 150
Balance c/d 6 600 2020
July 31 Payments to credit suppliers 96 220
Bank loan repayments 1 500
Bank loan interest 300
Rent 2 640
Wages 41 400
General expenses 10 890
Drawings 17 500
172 600 172 600

Additional information

1 The gross margin was 40%.

2 All sales were for cash and all cash received was banked.

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2020.

Haziq
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... ……………. ……………....

............................................................................................... ……………. ……………....

............................................................................................... ……………. ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....


[15]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


12

(b) Advise Haziq whether or not he should maintain a double entry bookkeeping system for his
business. Justify your answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


13

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


14

4 The directors of DW Limited provided the following information at 30 September 2020.

$
6% debentures (2028) 18 000
Bank overdraft 6 450
Dividend paid 2 000
General reserve at 1 October 2019 6 500
Inventory at 30 September 2020 26 300
Issued share capital at 1 October 2019 200 000
Non-current assets at 30 September 2020
Cost 462 000
Provision for depreciation 106 000
Other payables 2 200
Other receivables 1 600
Provision for doubtful debts at 1 October 2019 625
Retained earnings 73 475
Trade payables 8 250
Trade receivables 14 500

Additional information

A draft income statement for the year ended 30 September 2020 was prepared showing a profit of
$84 900.

The following errors were later discovered.

1 Inventory of $26 300 included items valued at cost $5200 that needed repair. After repairs
costing $600, the items could be sold for $5000.

2 Operating expenses included insurance of $400 that was prepaid at 30 September 2020.

3 The provision for doubtful debts should have been adjusted so that it equals 5% of trade
receivables.

The directors decided to transfer $5000 to general reserve.

There was no change to the issued share capital during the year ended 30 September 2020.

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the correct value of inventory at 30 September 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


15

(b) Calculate the revised profit for the year ended 30 September 2020 after adjusting for
errors 1–3.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(c) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 September 2020.

DW Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2020
Details Share General Retained Total
capital reserve earnings
$ $ $ $
On 1 October 2019 .................. .................. .................. ..................

..................................................... .................. .................. .................. ..................

..................................................... .................. .................. .................. ..................

..................................................... _________ _________ _________ _________

On 30 September 2020 ..................


_________ ..................
_________ ..................
_________ ..................
_________
[5]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


16

(d) Prepare the statement of financial position at 30 September 2020.

DW Limited
Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2020
$ $ $

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

[9]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


17

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


18

5 Nazim owns a wholesale business and has prepared draft financial statements for the year ended
30 June 2020, his first year of trading.

After the preparation of these financial statements, some errors were discovered.

REQUIRED

(a) Complete the table to indicate the effect of each error on the profit for the year and on
working capital at 30 June 2020.

Write ‘understated’, ‘overstated’ or ‘no effect’.

The first one has been completed as an example.

Effect on profit Effect on working


Error
for the year capital
Repairs to office equipment had been entered
Overstated No effect
in the office equipment account.
No adjustment had been made for insurance
prepaid.

An irrecoverable debt had not been written off.

No record had been made of additional capital


introduced in cash.

Closing inventory had been overstated.

[8]

After correcting the errors, Nazim compared his results with those of his brother Aziz, who has a
similar business.

Nazim Aziz
Current ratio 1.71:1 2.12:1
Liquid (acid test) ratio 0.77:1 1.28:1
Return on capital employed 13.65% 15.25%

REQUIRED

(b) Suggest two reasons for the differences in each ratio.

(i) Current ratio

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


19

(ii) Liquid (acid test) ratio

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) Return on capital employed (ROCE)

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

Nazim discovered that his rate of inventory turnover (times) was also lower than that of Aziz.

REQUIRED

(c) Suggest one reason for this difference.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20 [Turn over


20

Nazim is concerned about the length of time his credit customers are taking to pay their accounts.
He is considering operating a strict credit control policy requiring customers to pay within 30 days.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Nazim whether or not he should introduce this strict credit control policy. Justify your
answer by providing two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/21/O/N/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Sariah 4
Journal
Details Debit Credit
$ $

Motor vehicles (1)


Sharpe Motors (1)

Irrecoverable debts (1)


Ruhee (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(b) Sariah 11
Fixtures and fittings account
2019 $ 2020 $
Oct 1 Balance b/d 28 600 Jan 31 Disposal 1 500 (1)
2020 Sep 30 Balance c/d 30 600
Mar 31 Bank 3 500 (1)
32 100 32 100
2020
Oct 1 Balance b/d 30 600 (1) OF

Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings account


2020 $ 2019 $
Jan 31 Disposal 285 (1) Oct 1 Balance b/d 6 185
Sep 30 Balance c/d 8 370 2020
Sep 30 Income statement
2 470 (1)
8 655 8 655
2020
Oct 1 Balance b/d 8 370 (1)OF

Disposal account
2020 $ 2020 $
Jan 31 Fixtures and fittings Jan 31 Prov. for Dep. 285 (1)OF
1 500 (1) Bank 1 150 (1)
Sep 30 Income statement
____ 65 (1)OF
1 500 1 500

+ (1) Dates

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) Advantages 5
Emy may introduce additional capital (1)
Emy may bring additional specialist skills to the business (1)
Sariah may benefit from Emy’s contacts from her business (1)
The partners will be able to share the workload/responsibilities/risks (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Sariah will have to share profits with Emy (1)
Decision making may take longer (1)
Disagreements between the partners may occur (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

Question Answer Marks

2(a) $ 4
Balance at 31 July 2020 (3 420)
Direct debit payment (350) (1)
Dishonoured cheque (665) (1)
Bank charges (45) (1)
Revised balance at 31 July 2020 (4 480) (1)OF

Accept alternative forms of presentation

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(b) Eniola 4
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2020
$
Balance in cash book (4 480) (1)OF
Cheques not yet presented 1 290 (1)
(3 190)
Amounts not yet credited (410) (1)
Balance on bank statement (3 600) (1)OF

Alternative presentation
$
Balance on bank statement (3 600) (1)OF
Amounts not yet credited 410 (1)
(3 190)
Cheques not yet presented (1 290) (1)
Balance in cash book (4 480) (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c)(i) Do not have to pay the purchase price of these assets (1) 1
Will pay a monthly/yearly hire charge which spreads the outlay (1)
Will possibly have to pay more than the actual cost if hire for a long time (1)
Will never own these assets (1)
Possibly will not have any repair costs (1)
There will be no depreciation charge (1)
Accept other valid responses

Max 1

2(c)(ii) Money will be retained in the business for longer (1) 1


Money is available for other purposes (1)
May not be able to obtain cash discount (1)
May be charged interest on an overdue balance (1)
May damage relationship with suppliers (1)
Accept other valid responses

Max 1

2(d) Eniola 6
Rent and rates account
2019 $ 2019 $
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 260 Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 900
Bank 3 150 } 2020
Oct 1 Bank 1 860 } Jul 31 Income statement
2020 }(1) Rent 5400 (1)OF
Mar 1 Bank 2 700 } Rates 1810 (1)OF 7 210
Jul 31 Balance c/d 450 Balance c/d 310
8 420 8 420
2020 2020
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 310 (1) Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 450 (1)

+ (1) dates

2(e) Rent: Current liabilities (1) or OF from (d) 2


Rates: Current assets (1) or OF from (d)

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(f)(i) Matching or prudence (1) 1

2(f)(ii) Matching – the expense for the year is matched to the revenue for the year (1) 1
OR
Prudence – ensures that the profit for the year is not overstated (1)

Question Answer Marks

3(a) Haziq 15
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $
Revenue 166 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 8 400
Purchases (96 220 (1) – 6 280 (1) + 7 460 (1)) 97 400
105 800
Less Closing inventory 6 200 (1)OF 99 600 (1)OF
Gross profit 66 400 (1)
Less expenses
Rent (2 640 (1) + 240 (1)) 2 880
Wages (41 400 (1) + 610 (1)) 42 010
General expenses 10 890 (1)
Depreciation of non-current assets
(35 580 – 32 450) 3 130 (1) 58 910
Profit from operations 7 490
Less Loan interest 300 (1)
Profit for the year 7 190 (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Advantages 5
Enables easier production of financial statements (1)
Enables greater accuracy of the financial records (1)
Provides checks and balances to minimise possibility of fraud (1)
Facilitates easier decision making/easier for reference/easier comparisons/better understanding of finances (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Disadvantages
May be complex and harder to understand for the non-accountant (1)
Time consuming (1)
May be costly to set-up (1)
Not all errors will be identified (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) $ 2
Inventory at 30 September 2020 26 300
Original cost of damaged goods (5 200) }(1)
Net realisable value of damaged goods 4 400 }
Correct value of inventory 25 500 (1)OF

Accept alternative forms of presentation

4(b) $ $ 4
Draft profit for the year 84 900
Add Insurance prepaid omitted 400 (1)
85 300
Less Inventory overstated 800 (1)OF
Provision for doubtful debts omitted 100 (1) 900
Revised profit for the year 84 400 (1)OF

Accept alternative forms of presentation

4(c) DW Limited 5
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2020
Details Share General Retained Total
capital reserve earnings
$ $ $ $
On 1 October 2019 200 000 6 500 73 475 279 975 (1) row
Profit for the year 84 400 84 400 (1) OF row
Dividend paid (2 000) (2 000) (1) row
Transfer to general reserve 5 000 (5 000) (1) row
On 30 September 2020 200 000 11 500 150 875 362 375 (1) OF row

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(d) DW Limited 9
Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2020
$ $ $
Assets
Cost Accumulated Net book
depreciation value
Non-current assets 462 000 106 000 356 000 (1)
Current assets
Inventory 25 500 (1)OF
Trade receivables 14 500
Less Provision for doubtful debts 725 (1) 13 775 (1)
Other receivables (1 600 + 400) 2 000 (1)
41 275
Total assets 397 275

Equity and liabilities


Equity
Ordinary share capital 200 000
General reserve 11 500
Retained earnings 150 875
362 375 (1)OF
Non-current liabilities
6% Debentures 18 000 (1)
Current liabilities
Trade payables 8 250 }
Other payables 2 200 }(1)
Bank overdraft 6 450 (1)
16 900
Total equity and liabilities 397 275

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) 8
Effect on profit Effect on
for the year working capital

Repairs to office equipment had been entered in the office equipment account Overstated No effect

No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid Understated (1) Understated (1)

An irrecoverable debt had not been written off Overstated (1) Overstated (1)

No record had been made of additional capital introduced in cash No effect (1) Understated (1)

Closing inventory had been overstated Overstated (1) Overstated (1)

5(b)(i) Aziz has more current assets/more inventory/more trade receivables/more cash (1) 2
Aziz has less current liabilities/trade payables/bank overdraft (1)

5(b)(ii) Aziz has less inventory (1) 2


Aziz has higher current ratio (1)

5(b)(iii) Aziz has higher profit for the year (1) 2


Aziz has lower capital employed (1)
Aziz has lower non-current liabilities (1)

Max 2

5(c) Nazim has lower sales (1) 1


Nazim has higher inventory (1)

Max 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 14


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d) Advantages 5
Cash received earlier (1)
Reduces possibility of irrecoverable debts (1)
May reduce bank overdraft interest charges (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Disadvantages
May lose customers/may reduce sales (1)
Will increase administration costs/may reduce profits (1)
May damage relationship with customers (1)
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 14


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 7 7 1 1 4 5 5 2 4 8 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (RCL/GO) 186554/3
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Dev owns a business selling furniture.

The following transactions took place during August 2020.

Transaction Date Details $


1 August 9 Sold goods on credit to Petra 675
2 14 Petra returned damaged goods to Dev 120
3 23 Banked cash sales 412
4 29 Petra settled her outstanding balance at 1 August by
credit transfer after taking a cash discount of 5%

On 1 August 2020, the balance on credit customer Petra’s sales ledger account was $940 debit.

REQUIRED

(a) Complete the table to name each business document and book of prime entry for the following
transactions in Dev’s accounting records.

Transaction Business document Book of prime entry


2
3
4
[6]

(b) Prepare the account of Petra for August 2020 as it would appear in Dev’s sales ledger.

Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 September 2020.

Dev
Petra account
Date Date
2020 Details $ 2020 Details $

......... ...................................... ........... ......... ...................................... ...........

......... ...................................... ........... ......... ...................................... ...........

......... ...................................... ........... ......... ...................................... ...........

......... ...................................... ........... ......... ...................................... ...........

......... ...................................... ........... ......... ...................................... ...........

......... ...................................... ........... ......... ...................................... ...........

......... ...................................... ........... ......... ...................................... ...........

[6]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


3

(c) Identify the section of Dev’s statement of financial position at 31 August 2020 in which the
balance on Petra’s account would appear.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

Dev allows his credit customers a cash discount of 5% for prompt payment. He is considering
reducing this to 2%.

REQUIRED

(d) State one advantage and one disadvantage to Dev of this proposal.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

Dev is considering turning his business into a limited company.

REQUIRED

(e) Advise Dev whether or not he should form a limited company. Justify your answer with two
advantages and two disadvantages of forming a limited company.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20 [Turn over


4

2 BH Sports Club provides sporting facilities and a café for the use of its members and guests.

The club’s financial year ends on 31 July. The following information is available.

Assets and liabilities


At 1 August At 31 July
2019 2020
$ $
Bank 840 1270
Café inventory 520 770
Sports hall at book value 17 000 16 560
Insurance prepaid – sports hall and
sports equipment 400 440
Sports equipment at book value 3900 ?
Subscriptions in arrears 360 720
Subscriptions received in advance – 120
Wages accrued – café staff 60 80

Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 31 July 2020
Details $ Details $
Balance b/d 840 Purchases of café supplies 8 190
Subscriptions received 9 960 Wages – café staff 2 750
Café takings 13 520 Wages – sports staff 5 220
Insurance – sports hall and
sports equipment 1 430
Sports equipment 2 100
Sports hall expenses 3 360
Balance c/d 1 270
24 320 24 320

Additional information

Sports equipment is depreciated at 10% per annum using the reducing balance method.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


5

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 July 2020. Balance the account and
bring down the balances on 1 August 2020.

BH Sports Club
Subscriptions account

Date Details $ Date Details $

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........


[6]

(b) Calculate the café profit for the year ended 31 July 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................ [4]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20 [Turn over


6

(c) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 31 July 2020.

BH Sports Club
Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….

……………………………………………………………........... ……………. …………….


[7]

(d) (i) State what the balance on BH Sports Club’s accumulated fund represents.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State the effect that the surplus or deficit on BH Sports Club’s income and expenditure
account for the year ended 31 July 2020 will have on the accumulated fund.

...........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


7

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20 [Turn over


8

3 JP Limited’s financial year ended on 30 September 2020.

The following balances were available at that date.

$
7% debentures (2026) 20 000
Administrative expenses 44 000
Carriage inwards 1 500
Distribution costs 38 000
Debenture interest paid 700
Inventory at 1 October 2019 66 000
Non-current assets at book value at 1 October 2019 610 000
Provision for doubtful debts 1 000
Purchases 263 000
Revenue 529 500
Trade receivables 80 500

Additional information

1 Inventory at 30 September 2020 was valued at $59 000.

2 Interest on the 7% debentures (2026) had been paid up to 31 March 2020.

3 Administrative expenses included rates of $1200 for the six months ending 31 March 2021.

4 Distribution costs of $800 were outstanding at 30 September 2020.

5 Non-current assets should be depreciated by 10% per annum using the reducing balance
method.

6 Irrecoverable debts of $500 are to be written off.

7 The directors wish to maintain the provision for doubtful debts at 2% of trade receivables.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


9

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the cost of sales for the year ended 30 September 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Calculate the increase or decrease in the provision for doubtful debts at 30 September 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20 [Turn over


10

(c) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2020.

JP Limited
Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2020
$ $

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....

……………………………………………………………........... …………….... ……………....


[12]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


11

(d) Complete the table by placing a tick (✓) in the correct column to indicate the effect on the
equity of JP Limited of each of the following.

The first one has been completed as an example.

Increase Decrease No effect


Issue additional debentures ✓
Issue additional ordinary shares
Payment of ordinary share dividend
Proposal of ordinary share dividend
Transfer from retained earnings to general reserve
[4]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20 [Turn over


12

4 Carlos owns a business selling computer equipment.

He provided the following information for the year ended 31 July 2020.

$
Sales 240 000
Cost of sales 169 000
Operating expenses 55 000
Drawings 18 000
Capital employed 62 000

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the profit for the year ended 31 July 2020.

Workings Profit for the year ended


31 July 2020 31 July 2019

$11 550

[1]

(b) Calculate the following ratios correct to two decimal places.

Profit margin

Workings Year ended


31 July 2020 31 July 2019

8.56%

Gross margin

Workings Year ended


31 July 2020 31 July 2019

34.26%

Return on capital employed (ROCE)

Workings Year ended


31 July 2020 31 July 2019

32.08%

[6]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


13

(c) Comment on the performance of Carlos’s business over the two years (2019 and 2020).

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [6]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20 [Turn over


14

Carlos is concerned that the business bank balance has shown a large decrease. He is considering
either investing more cash from his private funds or obtaining a two-year bank loan.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Carlos which option he should select. Justify your answer by providing one advantage
and one disadvantage of each option.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

(e) State the name of one party, other than himself and his employees, who would be interested
in Carlos’s financial statements. State one reason for their interest.

Interested party The interest they would have

[2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


15

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20 [Turn over


16

5 Razia’s financial year ends on 30 September.

The totals of the trial balance on 30 September 2020 did not agree. The totals were debit $10 450
and credit $10 250. A suspense account was opened.

The following errors were later discovered.

1 The total of the sales returns journal had been overcast by $300.

2 Cash sales, $820, had not been recorded in the books of account.

3 A purchase invoice, $190, had been credited to the account of P Hill instead of D Hill.

4 A cheque payment, $240, for motor repairs had been correctly entered in the cash book but
had been posted to the debit of motor repairs account as $420.

5 Rent received, $310, had been debited to the rent payable account.

6 Staff wages, $250, had been posted to Razia’s drawings account.

7 A cheque paid, $900, to Kamil, a credit supplier, had been entered correctly in the cash book
but had not been posted to Kamil’s account.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the suspense account. Start with the balance arising from the difference on the trial
balance. The account should be balanced or totalled as necessary.

Razia
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........

......... ...................................... .......... ......... ...................................... ..........


[6]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


17

(b) Identify the types of error made in Error 2 and Error 4.

Error Type of error


2
4
[2]

(c) Complete the table by placing a tick (✓) in the correct column to indicate the effect on the
profit for the year of correcting each error.

Error Increase profit Decrease profit No effect on profit


number

7
[7]

Razia is considering whether or not to sell on cash terms only.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Razia whether or not she should sell on cash terms only. Justify your answer with two
advantages and two disadvantages of selling on cash terms only.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/22/O/N/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) 6
Transaction Business document Book of prime entry

2 Credit note (1) Sales returns journal (1)

3 Paying-in slip (1) Cash book (1)

4 Bank statement (1) Cash book (1)

1(b) Dev 6
Petra account
2020 $ 2020 $
Aug 1 Balance b/d 940 Aug 14 Sales returns 120 (1)
9 Sales 675 (1) 29 Bank 893 (1)
Discount allowed 47 (1)
31 Balance c/d 555
1 615 1 615
2020
Sept 1 Balance b/d 555 (1)OF
+ (1) dates

1(c) Current assets (1) OF 1

1(d) Advantage 2
Increase profit for the year (1)
Increase cash inflow (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)

Disadvantage
May lose customers/sales may fall (1)
Customers may take longer to pay (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(e) Advantages 5
Dev will have limited liability for the debts of the company (1)
The limited company will have a separate legal identity to Dev (1)
Dev will have access to different forms of finance/increase in capital employed (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Disadvantages
The limited company will have greater regulation than Dev as a sole trader (1)
The accounting requirements of the limited company will be more complex than for Dev as a sole trader (1)
The financial statements of the limited company may be viewed by the public unlike those of Dev as a sole trader (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

Question Answer Marks

2(a) BH Sports Club 6


Subscriptions account
2019 $ 2020 $
Aug 1 Balance b/d 360 (1) Jul 31 Bank 9 960 (1)
2020 Balance c/d 720
Jul 31 Income and Expenditure 10 200 (1)OF
Balance c/d 120 _____
10 680 10 680
2020 2020
Aug 1 Balance b/d 720 (1) Aug 1 Balance b/d 120 (1)
+ (1) dates

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(b) $ $ 4
Revenue 13 520
Opening inventory 520
Purchases 8 190
8 710
Less Closing inventory 770
7 940 (1)
Wages – café staff (2750 + 80(1) – 60(1)) 2 770 10 710
Profit for the year 2 810 (1)(OF)

Alternative forms of presentation acceptable

2(c) BH Sports Club 7


Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $
Income
Subscriptions 10 200 (1) OF
Profit on café 2 810 (1) OF
13 010
Expenditure
Wages – sports staff 5 220
Insurance – sports hall and sports equipment
(1430 + 400 (1) – 440 (1)) 1 390
Sports Hall expenses 3 360
Depreciation – sports hall (17 000 – 16 560) 440 (1)
sports equipment
(10% × (3900 + 2100)) 600 (1) 11 010
Surplus for the year 2 000 (1) OF

2(d)(i) The difference between the assets and the liabilities (1) 1
The accumulated surpluses earned since the club started (1)
Max (1)

2(d)(ii) Increase (1)OF $2 000 (1)OF 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) $ 2
Opening inventory 66 000
Purchases 263 000
Carriage inwards 1 500
330 500 (1)
Less Closing inventory 59 000
Cost of sales 271 500 (1) OF

3(b) $ 2
Provision at 30 September 2020 ((80 500 – 500) x 2%) 1 600 (1)
Less Provision at 1 October 2019 1 000
Increase in provision for doubtful debts 600 (1) OF

3(c) JP Limited 12
Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2020
$ $
Revenue 529 500
Less Cost of sales 271 500 (1) OF
Gross profit 258 000 (1) OF
Less expenses
Administrative expenses (44 000(1) - 1200(1)) 42 800
Distribution costs (38 000(1) + 800(1)) 38 800
Irrecoverable debts 500 (1)
Provision for doubtful debts 600 (1) OF
Depreciation – non-current assets 61 000 (1) 143 700
Profit from operations 114 300
Debenture interest (700(1) + 700 (1)) 1 400
Profit for the year 112 900 (1) OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(d) 4
Increase Decrease No effect

Issue of additional debentures 

Issue of additional ordinary shares  (1)

Payment of ordinary share dividend  (1)

Proposal of ordinary share dividend  (1)

Transfer from retained earnings to general reserve  (1)

Question Answer Marks

4(a) 1
Workings Profit for the year

240 000 – 169 000 – 55 000 $16 000 (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(b) Profit margin 6


Workings Answer

16 000 OF 100 6.67% (1) OF


× (1) whole formula
240 000 1

Gross margin

Workings Answer

240 000 − 169 000 100 29.58% (1)


× (1) whole formula
240 000 1

Return on capital employed (ROCE)

Workings Answer

16 000 OF 100 25.81% (1) OF


× (1) whole formula
62000 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(c) Profit margin 6


General comment
Has worsened from 8.56% to 6.67% (1)
Possible causes
Increase in expenses (1)
Poor control over expenses (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1) from possible causes
All comments to be based on Own Figures from (b)

Gross margin
General comment
Has worsened from 34.26% to 29.58% (1)
Possible causes
Reduction in selling price (1)
Purchasing from more expensive suppliers / increased cost of sales (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1) from possible causes
All comments to be based on Own Figures from (b)

Return on capital employed


General comment
Has worsened from 32.08% to 25.81% (1)
Possible causes
Increased capital employed (1)
Less efficient use of its resources (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1) from possible causes
All comments to be based on Own Figures from (b)

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(d) Introduce additional capital 5

Advantages
Does not have to be repaid (1)
No interest cost (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)

Disadvantages
May not have enough available funds (1)
Greater personal risk (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)

Loan

Advantages
Instantly available (1)
Has two years to pay it off (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)

Disadvantages
Annual interest is charged (1)
Must be repaid (1)
Security may be required (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(e) 2
Interested party The interest they would have

Suppliers/potential suppliers To assess whether outstanding debts are likely to be paid

Bank To assess the likelihood of loan/overdraft being repaid when due


To assess the ability to pay interest on a loan/overdraft
To assess the availability of security for a loan

Lenders/potential lenders To assess the likelihood of a loan being repaid when due
To assess the ability to pay interest on a loan
To assess the availability of security for a loan

Investors/potential partners To assess future prospects of the business


To assess profitability

Government/tax authorities To assess the tax due from the owner of the business

Accept other suitable parties and reasons


(1) for one named party + (1) for reason

Question Answer Marks

5(a) Razia 6
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Sep 30 Sales returns 300 (1) Sep 30 Difference on trial balance 200 (1)
Motor repairs 180 (1)
Rent receivable 310 (1) Kamil 900 (1)
Rent payable 310 (1) ___
1 100 1 100

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(b) 2
Error Type of error

2 Error of omission (1)

4 Error of transposition in one account (1)

5(c) 7
Error number Increase profit Decrease profit No effect on profit

1 (1)

2 (1)

3 (1)

4 (1)

5 (1)

6 (1)

7 (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 14


0452/22 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d) Advantages 5
Less book-keeping (1)
No irrecoverable debts (1)
Cash received immediately (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Disadvantages
May lose customers/sales may reduce (1)
May adversely affect customer relationships/customer loyalty (1)
Increased security issues (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 14


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 9 5 7 0 9 6 0 1 3 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (RCL/GO) 186688/3
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2

1 Sariah owns a business selling ladies’ clothing. She maintains a system of double entry
bookkeeping.

The following occurred during September 2020.

1 Purchased a motor vehicle on credit from Sharpe Motors $6350.

2 Ruhee, a credit customer, was declared bankrupt owing Sariah $1200. The debt is to be
written off.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the above transactions. Narratives are not required.

Sariah
Journal

Details Debit Credit


$ $
............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................

............................................................................................. ..................... .....................


[4]

Sariah is preparing her financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2020. She provides
the following information for fixtures and fittings.

2019 $
October 1 Fixtures and fittings at cost 28 600
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings 6 185
2020
January 31 Sold fixtures and received a cheque 1 150
The fixtures had been purchased on 1 February 2018 for $1500
March 31 Purchased new fixtures paying by cheque 3 500

Sariah’s policy is to provide depreciation on fixtures and fittings at 10% per annum using the
reducing balance method. A full year’s depreciation is charged in the year of purchase but none in
the year of disposal.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


3

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 September 2020. Close the accounts
by balancing or by making an appropriate year end transfer.

Sariah
Fixtures and fittings account

Date Details $ Date Details $

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings account

Date Details $ Date Details $

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

Disposal account

Date Details $ Date Details $

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

........... ............................... ............. ........... ............................... .............

[11]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


4

Sariah is considering forming a partnership with her friend Emy who runs a similar business.

REQUIRED

(c) Advise Sariah whether or not she should form a partnership with Emy. Justify your answer
with two advantages and two disadvantages of forming a partnership with Emy.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


6

2 Eniola compared her bank statement for July 2020 with the bank columns of her cash book. She
provided the following information.

$
Overdrawn balance shown in the cash book at 31 July 2020 3420
Direct debit payment dated 25 July 2020, had not yet been entered in
the cash book 350
A cheque received from a customer on 12 July 2020 was dishonoured.
This dishonoured cheque had not yet been recorded in the cash book 665
Bank charges on the bank statement had not yet been entered in
the cash book 45
Unpresented cheques at 31 July 2020 1290
Uncredited deposits at 31 July 2020 410

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the corrected balance of the bank columns in the cash book at 31 July 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement at 31 July 2020. Clearly identify the bank statement
balance at that date.

Eniola
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2020

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


7

Eniola is concerned that her bank balance has decreased significantly during the last year. She is
considering how to improve her liquidity.

REQUIRED

(c) Suggest one effect of each of the following proposals.

(i) Hire new non-current assets instead of purchasing them.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Delay paying credit suppliers.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Eniola’s financial year end is 31 July 2020. She provided the following information about the rent
and rates of her business.

On 1 August 2019, she owed two months’ rent totalling $900. On the same date, rates of $260
were prepaid up to 30 September 2019.

During the year ended 31 July 2020 the following payments were made by credit transfer.

2019 $
August 1 Seven months’ rent 3150
October 1 Twelve months’ rates 1860
2020
March 1 Six months’ rent 2700

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


8

REQUIRED

(d) Prepare the rent and rates account for the year ended 31 July 2020. Balance the account and
bring down the balances on 1 August 2020.

Eniola
Rent and rates account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2019 2019
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 260 Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 900

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........

.......... ..................................... .......... .......... ..................................... ..........


[6]

(e) Identify the sections of the statement of financial position at 31 July 2020 in which each of the
balances on the rent and rates account would appear.

Rent ..........................................................................................................................................

Rates ........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(f) (i) Name one accounting principle Eniola would apply when recording the rent and rates in
her financial statements.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State how Eniola would apply the accounting principle named in (f)(i).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


9

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


10

3 Haziq has not maintained full accounting records for his business.

Haziq provided the following information for the year ended 31 July 2020.

At 1 August At 31 July
2019 2020
$ $
Bank loan 6 000 4 500
Inventory 8 400 ?
Non-current assets at net book value 35 580 32 450
Rent prepaid 240 –
Trade payables 6 280 7 460
Wages accrued – 610

Summary of bank account for the year ended 31 July 2020


Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2019
July 31 Sales receipts 166 000 Aug 1 Balance b/d 2 150
Balance c/d 6 600 2020
July 31 Payments to credit suppliers 96 220
Bank loan repayments 1 500
Bank loan interest 300
Rent 2 640
Wages 41 400
General expenses 10 890
Drawings 17 500
172 600 172 600

Additional information

1 The gross margin was 40%.

2 All sales were for cash and all cash received was banked.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2020.

Haziq
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... ……………. ……………....

............................................................................................... ……………. ……………....

............................................................................................... ……………. ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....


[15]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


12

(b) Advise Haziq whether or not he should maintain a double entry bookkeeping system for his
business. Justify your answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


13

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


14

4 The directors of DW Limited provided the following information at 30 September 2020.

$
6% debentures (2028) 18 000
Bank overdraft 6 450
Dividend paid 2 000
General reserve at 1 October 2019 6 500
Inventory at 30 September 2020 26 300
Issued share capital at 1 October 2019 200 000
Non-current assets at 30 September 2020
Cost 462 000
Provision for depreciation 106 000
Other payables 2 200
Other receivables 1 600
Provision for doubtful debts at 1 October 2019 625
Retained earnings 73 475
Trade payables 8 250
Trade receivables 14 500

Additional information

A draft income statement for the year ended 30 September 2020 was prepared showing a profit of
$84 900.

The following errors were later discovered.

1 Inventory of $26 300 included items valued at cost $5200 that needed repair. After repairs
costing $600, the items could be sold for $5000.

2 Operating expenses included insurance of $400 that was prepaid at 30 September 2020.

3 The provision for doubtful debts should have been adjusted so that it equals 5% of trade
receivables.

The directors decided to transfer $5000 to general reserve.

There was no change to the issued share capital during the year ended 30 September 2020.

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the correct value of inventory at 30 September 2020.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


15

(b) Calculate the revised profit for the year ended 30 September 2020 after adjusting for
errors 1–3.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(c) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 September 2020.

DW Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2020
Details Share General Retained Total
capital reserve earnings
$ $ $ $
On 1 October 2019 .................. .................. .................. ..................

..................................................... .................. .................. .................. ..................

..................................................... .................. .................. .................. ..................

..................................................... _________ _________ _________ _________

On 30 September 2020 ..................


_________ ..................
_________ ..................
_________ ..................
_________
[5]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


16

(d) Prepare the statement of financial position at 30 September 2020.

DW Limited
Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2020
$ $ $

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

............................................................................ ...................... ...................... ......................

[9]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


17

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


18

5 Nazim owns a wholesale business and has prepared draft financial statements for the year ended
30 June 2020, his first year of trading.

After the preparation of these financial statements, some errors were discovered.

REQUIRED

(a) Complete the table to indicate the effect of each error on the profit for the year and on
working capital at 30 June 2020.

Write ‘understated’, ‘overstated’ or ‘no effect’.

The first one has been completed as an example.

Effect on profit Effect on working


Error
for the year capital
Repairs to office equipment had been entered
Overstated No effect
in the office equipment account.
No adjustment had been made for insurance
prepaid.

An irrecoverable debt had not been written off.

No record had been made of additional capital


introduced in cash.

Closing inventory had been overstated.

[8]

After correcting the errors, Nazim compared his results with those of his brother Aziz, who has a
similar business.

Nazim Aziz
Current ratio 1.71:1 2.12:1
Liquid (acid test) ratio 0.77:1 1.28:1
Return on capital employed 13.65% 15.25%

REQUIRED

(b) Suggest two reasons for the differences in each ratio.

(i) Current ratio

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


19

(ii) Liquid (acid test) ratio

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) Return on capital employed (ROCE)

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

Nazim discovered that his rate of inventory turnover (times) was also lower than that of Aziz.

REQUIRED

(c) Suggest one reason for this difference.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20 [Turn over


20

Nazim is concerned about the length of time his credit customers are taking to pay their accounts.
He is considering operating a strict credit control policy requiring customers to pay within 30 days.

REQUIRED

(d) Advise Nazim whether or not he should introduce this strict credit control policy. Justify your
answer by providing two advantages and two disadvantages.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 0452/23/O/N/20


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) Sariah 4
Journal
Details Debit Credit
$ $

Motor vehicles (1)


Sharpe Motors (1)

Irrecoverable debts (1)


Ruhee (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(b) Sariah 11
Fixtures and fittings account
2019 $ 2020 $
Oct 1 Balance b/d 28 600 Jan 31 Disposal 1 500 (1)
2020 Sep 30 Balance c/d 30 600
Mar 31 Bank 3 500 (1)
32 100 32 100
2020
Oct 1 Balance b/d 30 600 (1) OF

Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings account


2020 $ 2019 $
Jan 31 Disposal 285 (1) Oct 1 Balance b/d 6 185
Sep 30 Balance c/d 8 370 2020
Sep 30 Income statement
2 470 (1)
8 655 8 655
2020
Oct 1 Balance b/d 8 370 (1)OF

Disposal account
2020 $ 2020 $
Jan 31 Fixtures and fittings Jan 31 Prov. for Dep. 285 (1)OF
1 500 (1) Bank 1 150 (1)
Sep 30 Income statement
____ 65 (1)OF
1 500 1 500

+ (1) Dates

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(c) Advantages 5
Emy may introduce additional capital (1)
Emy may bring additional specialist skills to the business (1)
Sariah may benefit from Emy’s contacts from her business (1)
The partners will be able to share the workload/responsibilities/risks (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Disadvantages
Sariah will have to share profits with Emy (1)
Decision making may take longer (1)
Disagreements between the partners may occur (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

Question Answer Marks

2(a) $ 4
Balance at 31 July 2020 (3 420)
Direct debit payment (350) (1)
Dishonoured cheque (665) (1)
Bank charges (45) (1)
Revised balance at 31 July 2020 (4 480) (1)OF

Accept alternative forms of presentation

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(b) Eniola 4
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2020
$
Balance in cash book (4 480) (1)OF
Cheques not yet presented 1 290 (1)
(3 190)
Amounts not yet credited (410) (1)
Balance on bank statement (3 600) (1)OF

Alternative presentation
$
Balance on bank statement (3 600) (1)OF
Amounts not yet credited 410 (1)
(3 190)
Cheques not yet presented (1 290) (1)
Balance in cash book (4 480) (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c)(i) Do not have to pay the purchase price of these assets (1) 1
Will pay a monthly/yearly hire charge which spreads the outlay (1)
Will possibly have to pay more than the actual cost if hire for a long time (1)
Will never own these assets (1)
Possibly will not have any repair costs (1)
There will be no depreciation charge (1)
Accept other valid responses

Max 1

2(c)(ii) Money will be retained in the business for longer (1) 1


Money is available for other purposes (1)
May not be able to obtain cash discount (1)
May be charged interest on an overdue balance (1)
May damage relationship with suppliers (1)
Accept other valid responses

Max 1

2(d) Eniola 6
Rent and rates account
2019 $ 2019 $
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 260 Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 900
Bank 3 150 } 2020
Oct 1 Bank 1 860 } Jul 31 Income statement
2020 }(1) Rent 5400 (1)OF
Mar 1 Bank 2 700 } Rates 1810 (1)OF 7 210
Jul 31 Balance c/d 450 Balance c/d 310
8 420 8 420
2020 2020
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 310 (1) Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 450 (1)

+ (1) dates

2(e) Rent: Current liabilities (1) or OF from (d) 2


Rates: Current assets (1) or OF from (d)

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(f)(i) Matching or prudence (1) 1

2(f)(ii) Matching – the expense for the year is matched to the revenue for the year (1) 1
OR
Prudence – ensures that the profit for the year is not overstated (1)

Question Answer Marks

3(a) Haziq 15
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $
Revenue 166 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 8 400
Purchases (96 220 (1) – 6 280 (1) + 7 460 (1)) 97 400
105 800
Less Closing inventory 6 200 (1)OF 99 600 (1)OF
Gross profit 66 400 (1)
Less expenses
Rent (2 640 (1) + 240 (1)) 2 880
Wages (41 400 (1) + 610 (1)) 42 010
General expenses 10 890 (1)
Depreciation of non-current assets
(35 580 – 32 450) 3 130 (1) 58 910
Profit from operations 7 490
Less Loan interest 300 (1)
Profit for the year 7 190 (1)OF

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Advantages 5
Enables easier production of financial statements (1)
Enables greater accuracy of the financial records (1)
Provides checks and balances to minimise possibility of fraud (1)
Facilitates easier decision making/easier for reference/easier comparisons/better understanding of finances (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Disadvantages
May be complex and harder to understand for the non-accountant (1)
Time consuming (1)
May be costly to set-up (1)
Not all errors will be identified (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) $ 2
Inventory at 30 September 2020 26 300
Original cost of damaged goods (5 200) }(1)
Net realisable value of damaged goods 4 400 }
Revised value of inventory 25 500 (1)OF

Accept alternative forms of presentation

4(b) $ $ 4
Draft profit for the year 84 900
Add Insurance prepaid omitted 400 (1)
85 300
Less Inventory overstated 800 (1)OF
Provision for doubtful debts omitted 100 (1) 900
Revised profit for the year 84 400 (1)OF

Accept alternative forms of presentation

4(c) DW Limited 5
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2020
Details Share General Retained Total
capital reserve earnings
$ $ $ $
On 1 October 2019 200 000 6 500 73 475 279 975 (1) row
Profit for the year 84 400 84 400 (1) OF row
Dividend paid (2 000) (2 000) (1) row
Transfer to general reserve 5 000 (5 000) (1) row
On 30 September 2020 200 000 11 500 150 875 362 375 (1) OF row

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(d) DW Limited 9
Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2020
$ $ $
Assets
Cost Accumulated Net book
depreciation value
Non-current assets 462 000 106 000 356 000 (1)
Current assets
Inventory 25 500 (1)OF
Trade receivables 14 500
Less Provision for doubtful debts 725 (1) 13 775 (1)
Other receivables (1 600 + 400) 2 000 (1)
41 275
Total assets 397 275

Equity and liabilities


Equity
Ordinary share capital 200 000
General reserve 11 500
Retained earnings 150 875
362 375 (1)OF
Non-current liabilities
6% Debentures 18 000 (1)
Current liabilities
Trade payables 8 250 }
Other payables 2 200 }(1)
Bank overdraft 6 450 (1)
16 900
Total equity and liabilities 397 275

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) 8
Effect on profit Effect on
for the year working capital

Repairs to office equipment had been entered in the office equipment account Overstated No effect

No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid Understated (1) Understated (1)

An irrecoverable debt had not been written off Overstated (1) Overstated (1)

No record had been made of additional capital introduced in cash No effect (1) Understated (1)

Closing inventory had been overstated Overstated (1) Overstated (1)

5(b)(i) Aziz has more current assets/more inventory/more trade receivables/more cash (1) 2
Aziz has less current liabilities/trade payables/bank overdraft (1)

5(b)(ii) Aziz has less inventory (1) 2


Aziz has higher current ratio (1)

5(b)(iii) Aziz has higher profit for the year (1) 2


Aziz has lower capital employed (1)
Aziz has lower non-current liabilities (1)

5(c) Nazim has lower sales (1) 1


Nazim has higher inventory (1)

Max 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 14


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(d) Advantages 5
Cash received earlier (1)
Reduces possibility of irrecoverable debts (1)
May reduce bank overdraft interest charges (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)

Disadvantages
May lose customers/may reduce sales (1)
Will increase administration costs/may reduce profits (1)
May damage relationship with customers (1)
Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 14


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.


*3151834256*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet


Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 35.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 12 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB21 11_0452_13/3RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Why does a trader calculate the profit of his business?

A to calculate the interest payable on a loan


B to calculate the provision for doubtful debts
C to know the total expenses of the business
D to know whether drawings are at a reasonable level

2 Hassan is a trader. During the financial year he took goods from the business for his own use.

How should he record this?

debit credit

A drawings inventory
B drawings purchases
C income statement inventory
D income statement purchases

3 Where are the accounts of credit suppliers maintained?

A purchases journal
B purchases ledger
C sales journal
D sales ledger

4 Which document does a trader issue to remind a credit customer that payment is due?

A credit note
B debit note
C receipt
D statement of account

5 What is a cheque counterfoil used for?

A to pay a cheque into the bank account


B to pay for goods purchased by cheque
C to record a cheque payment in the cash book
D to record a cheque received in the cash book

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21


3

6 Farouk sells goods on credit. A cheque from Khalid, a credit customer, was dishonoured by the
bank.

How should Farouk record this?

account to be debited account to be credited

A bank Khalid
B irrecoverable debts Khalid
C Khalid bank
D Khalid irrecoverable debts

7 Tumelo sells on credit. The terms of trade are listed.

list price: $200 per unit


credit period: 60 days
trade discount 15% if 10 units or more are purchased
cash discount 3% if the debt is paid within one month

A credit customer purchased 20 units and paid the debt within 15 days.

What was the total of the invoice?

A $3298 B $3400 C $3880 D $4000

8 Jane purchased goods and paid by credit transfer.

How should this be recorded in Jane’s accounting records?

account to account to
be debited be credited

A bank purchases
B purchases bank
C purchases trade payable
D trade payable purchases

9 What is shown in a trial balance?

A capital and profit on a particular date


B financial transactions for a particular period
C ledger balances on a particular date
D receipts and payments for a particular period

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21 [Turn over


4

10 At the end of each year, PT Limited transfers 20% of the profit for the year to the general reserve.

Draft financial statements were prepared for the year ended 30 September 2021. It was then
discovered that the inventory at 30 September 2021 had been overstated by $1500.

Which effects did the correction of this error have on retained earnings and general reserve at
30 September 2021?

retained earnings $ general reserve $

A decrease 300 increase 300


B decrease 1200 decrease 300
C increase 300 increase 1200
D increase 1500 no effect

11 The bank columns in a trader’s cash book and the bank statement both showed positive
balances. A comparison revealed the following differences.

uncredited cheque 200


bank charges not included in cash book 10

What was the difference between the balance shown in the bank column of the cash book and
that shown on the bank statement?

A The cash book balance was $190 higher than the bank statement balance.
B The cash book balance was $190 lower than the bank statement balance.
C The cash book balance was $210 higher than the bank statement balance.
D The cash book balance was $210 lower than the bank statement balance.

12 What is a reason for preparing a sales ledger control account?

A to calculate total sales revenue


B to ensure trade receivables pay on time
C to help prepare the income statement
D to summarise the accounts of the trade receivables

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21


5

13 Two companies each purchased a motor vehicle for $10 000 at the beginning of year 1. Company
G used the straight-line method of depreciation at a rate of 15% per annum, while Company H
used the reducing balance method at a rate of 20% per annum.

What was the difference in the depreciation charge between the two companies for year 2?

A $100 greater for G


B $100 greater for H
C $500 greater for G
D $500 greater for H

14 Amit’s financial year ends on 31 December. The following account appeared in his sales ledger.

Dipak account
2020 $ 2020 $

Jan 7 sales 3200 Jun 3 bank 1700


Oct 30 cash 230
Nov 21 ? 1270
3200 3200

What does the entry on 21 November represent?

A an irrecoverable debt
B discount allowed
C the balance carried down
D the recovery of a debt previously written off

15 Sally wished to increase the balance on the provision for doubtful debts account at the end of the
financial year.

How should this increase be recorded?

debit credit

A income statement provision for doubtful debts account


B irrecoverable debts account provision for doubtful debts account
C provision for doubtful debts account income statement
D provision for doubtful debts account irrecoverable debts account

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21 [Turn over


6

16 The following errors were found after a statement of financial position had been prepared.

1 A loan repayable in two year’s time had been included as a current liability.
2 A provision for doubtful debts should have been created.

What is the effect of correcting these errors?

current current non-current owner’s


assets liabilities liabilities equity

A decrease decrease increase decrease


B decrease increase decrease increase
C increase decrease decrease increase
D increase increase decrease decrease

17 John maintains a full set of accounting records.

Why does he also prepare a statement of financial position?

A to calculate the profit for the year


B to check if assets equal capital plus liabilities
C to show the transactions which took place during the year
D to summarise what the business owns and what it owes

18 What are advantages of operating as a sole trader?

1 The owner can keep all the profit.


2 The owner can raise finance by issuing debentures.
3 The owner can make decisions independently.
4 The owner is protected by limited liability.

A 1 and 3 B 1 only C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21


7

19 Anwar is a sole trader making annual profits of $24 000. He decides to admit Dilip as a partner.
They agree that Anwar would receive a salary, and profits and losses would be shared equally.

The forecast appropriation account for the partnership’s first year of trading is:

profit for the year 50 000


salary Anwar 10 000
profit available for distribution 40 000

By how much will Anwar’s total income increase?

A $1000 B $6000 C $16 000 D $26 000

20 Kasi and Ravi are in partnership. The financial statements for the year ended 31 August 2021
showed that Ravi was entitled to interest on capital and interest on loan and was charged interest
on drawings.

Which entries would be made in Ravi’s current account?

interest on capital interest on loan interest on drawings


debit credit debit credit debit credit

A   
B  
C   
D  

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21 [Turn over


8

21 BCD Limited provided the following information.

ordinary shares 300 000


retained earnings 200 000
debentures 170 000

How much was the equity and the capital employed?

equity capital employed


$ $

A 300 000 470 000


B 300 000 670 000
C 500 000 470 000
D 500 000 670 000

22 The issued share capital of CD Limited consists of ordinary shares.

Retained earnings were $86 000 on 1 September 2020 and $88 500 on 31 August 2021.

The company made a profit during the year of $26 000 and made a transfer to general reserve of
$5000.

What was the total ordinary share dividend paid during the year?

A $18 500 B $23 500 C $28 500 D $33 500

23 A sports club was formed on 1 August 2020. During the year ended 31 July 2021 the club
purchased equipment costing $5000, paying by cheque.

In which of the club’s financial statements did this appear?

receipts and payments income and expenditure statement of financial


account account position

A  
B  
C  
D 

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21


9

24 What is not part of the prime cost of a manufacturing business?

A raw material
B royalties
C wages of factory supervisors
D wages of production workers

25 The value of Thato’s work in progress increased during the year. This was recorded in his
financial statements.

How did this affect the cost of production and the cost of sales?

cost of
cost of sales
production

A decreased decreased
B decreased no effect
C increased increased
D increased no effect

26 What are advantages of keeping a full set of accounting records?

1 Financial statements will be free from errors.


2 It is impossible to make fraudulent entries.
3 More informed decision-making is possible.
4 The calculation of profit is more accurate.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

27 Beth provided the following information.

1 January 31 December
net assets $28 000 $24 000

Her drawings during the year amounted to $3000.

What was Beth’s profit or loss for the year?

A $1000 loss
B $1000 profit
C $7000 loss
D $7000 profit

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21 [Turn over


10

28 Roshan’s sales for his first year of trading were $55 000. His gross profit margin was 20%. The
closing inventory was $3200.

What were the purchases for the year?

A $41 250 B $44 000 C $44 450 D $47 200

29 Which information is required to calculate the return on capital employed for a sole trader?

A gross profit, non-current liabilities, owner’s capital


B gross profit, non-current liabilities, working capital
C operating profit for the year, non-current liabilities, owner’s capital
D operating profit for the year, non-current liabilities, working capital

30 What is the best indicator of the liquidity of a business?

A current ratio
B liquid (acid test) ratio
C return on capital employed
D working capital

31 A trader provided the following information for the year ended 31 May 2021.

trade payables on 1 June 2020 12 250


trade payables on 31 May 2021 42 000
credit purchases for the year 319 375

What was the trade payables turnover (days) for the year ended 31 May 2021?

A 31 days B 34 days C 48 days D 62 days

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21


11

32 A business provided the following information about its gross margin.

Year 1 40%
Year 2 38%
Year 3 35%

What could explain the changes in the gross margin?

A Cost of sales is decreasing.


B Expenses are decreasing.
C Quantity of goods sold is decreasing.
D Selling price is decreasing.

33 What is not a limitation of inter-firm comparison?

A Accounting records do not include the skills of the workforce.


B Businesses may have different accounting policies.
C Businesses may have different sales prices.
D The available information may not relate to a typical year.

34 Why would a supplier be interested in the financial statements of a credit customer?

A to know if the customer can pay what he owes


B to know the amount owed by trade receivables
C to know the profit for the year
D to know the value of the inventory

35 What does the objective of understandability assume users of financial statements will possess?

A a reasonable knowledge of accounting


B full knowledge of accounting
C knowledge of book-keeping but not accounting
D no knowledge of book-keeping or accounting

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/13/O/N/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 3 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/13 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2021

Question Answer Marks

1 D 1

2 B 1

3 B 1

4 D 1

5 C 1

6 C 1

7 B 1

8 B 1

9 C 1

10 B 1

11 C 1

12 D 1

13 B 1

14 A 1

15 A 1

16 A 1

17 D 1

18 A 1

19 B 1

20 C 1

21 D 1

22 A 1

23 B 1

24 C 1

25 A 1

26 D 1

27 A 1

28 D 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 3


0452/13 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2021

Question Answer Marks

29 C 1

30 B 1

31 C 1

32 D 1

33 C 1

34 A 1

35 A 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 3


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 6 6 8 6 6 0 1 5 4 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages.

DC (RW) 222134
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Shiv is a trader. His financial year ends on 31 August. He does not maintain a full set of accounting
records but was able to provide the following information for the year ended 31 August 2021.

Total revenue $320 000


Mark-up 25%

Bank account summary for the year ended 31 August 2021

$ $
Balance b/d 49 000 Expenses 34 000
Cash sales 3 700 Drawings 4 200
Receipts from trade receivables 312 400 Payments to trade payables 257 700
Equipment 16 000
Balance c/d 53 200
365 100 365 100

Assets and liabilities

1 September 2020 31 August 2021


$ $
Inventory at cost 23 500 ?
Trade receivables 22 000 25 900
Expenses owing – 400
Trade payables 32 600 29 600
Equipment at net book value – 12 800
Premises at cost 90 000 90 000

Shiv had withdrawn $900 for a family holiday during the year. He had included this in the expenses.

On 31 August 2021 Shiv decided to create a provision for doubtful debts of 3% of trade receivables.

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the purchases for the year ended 31 August 2021.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


3

(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 August 2021. The inventory on
31 August 2021 should be clearly shown within the statement.

Shiv
Income Statement for the year ended 31 August 2021

$ $

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....


[11]

(c) Name the accounting principle Shiv should apply when recording the $900 he had used for a
family holiday.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over


4

Shiv has always valued his inventory at cost price. He is considering valuing the inventory on
31 August 2021 at selling price as he believes it would result in a higher profit for the year.

REQUIRED

(d) Discuss the implications of Shiv valuing the inventory on 31 August 2021 at selling price.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over


6

2 Jas owns a printing business and has recently incurred various expenditures relating to her
premises.

REQUIRED

(a) Complete the table by inserting a tick (3) to show how each item of expenditure should be
classified. The first one has been completed as an example.

Capital Revenue
expenditure expenditure

Building new extension to warehouse 3

Rates on new extension

Carriage costs for roof tiles for new extension

Legal costs for new extension

Repairs to office roof

[4]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


7

Jas’s business is expanding rapidly and she needs more warehousing space.

Jas can rent an additional warehouse. The rent for the first six months would be $40 000.

Alternatively, Jas can purchase a warehouse for $900 000. She can obtain a long-term loan of
$700 000.

REQUIRED

(b) Advise Jas whether she should rent or purchase a warehouse. Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over


8

An extract from Jas’s statement of financial position at 31 December 2019 showed the following:

Cost Accumulated Net book


depreciation value
$ $ $
Fixtures 115 000 77 625 37 375

During the year ended 31 December 2020 the following transactions took place.

On 1 January 2020 fixtures, $30 000, were purchased by cheque.

On 30 June 2020 fixtures were sold for $6000, which was received by cheque. These fixtures had
originally been purchased on 1 January 2018 for $20 000.

Jas depreciates fixtures on a straight-line basis. She assumes fixtures will have a useful life of four
years, at which time the residual value will be 10% of original cost. Depreciation is charged for
each part of the year for which the fixtures are owned.

REQUIRED

(c) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance each account
and bring down the balance on 1 January 2021.

Jas
Fixtures account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d 115 000 ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


9

Provision for depreciation of fixtures account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020
............... ..................................... ............... Jan 1 Balance b/d 77 625

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[8]

(d) Prepare the fixtures disposal account for the year ended 31 December 2020.

Jas
Fixtures disposal account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[3]

Workings:

[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over
10

3 Anil is a trader. The totals of the trial balance he prepared on 31 December 2020 did not agree.
The debits exceeded the credits by $5140.

The following errors were later discovered.

1 The sales account had been undercast by $7100.

2 Sales returns of $520 had been posted as a credit to the purchases account. The correct
entry had been made in the customer’s account.

3 Bank charges of $320 had been correctly entered in the cash book, but had not been entered
in the bank charges account.

4 A cheque refund of $600 for insurance overpaid had been entered on the wrong side of the
bank account and no entry had been made in the insurance account.

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare journal entries to correct errors 1 to 4. Narratives are not required.

Anil
Journal

Error Details Debit Credit


number $ $

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

[12]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over


12

(b) Complete the suspense account.

Anil
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

........... .......................................... .............. ........... Difference on trial balance 5140

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

[6]

(c) Name two types of error not disclosed by a trial balance.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


13

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over


14

4 Karishma runs her own business. The balances in her books on 1 October 2020 included the
following.
$
Insurance account 1700 prepaid
Electricity account 1800 owing

During the financial year ended 30 September 2021 Karishma made the following payments by
cheque.

Insurance payments
$
7 February 2021 3400
13 August 2021 3500

Electricity payments
$
14 October 2020 1800
24 January 2021 1800
26 May 2021 1800

A refund of $300 for insurance overpaid was received by bank transfer on 28 February 2021. The
insurance paid on 13 August 2021 covered a period of five months to 31 December 2021.

At 30 September 2021, an amount of $2000 was owing for electricity.

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


15

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 September 2021. Balance the accounts
and bring down the balances on 1 October 2021.

Karishma
Insurance account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

Electricity account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[10]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over


16

Karishma is considering changing her electricity supplier. The new supplier has offered Karishma
a two-year contract at a fixed monthly amount of $450 payable by direct debit.

REQUIRED

(b) Advise Karishma whether she should change to the new electricity supplier. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages of changing supplier.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


17

On 1 October 2020 Karishma decided to rent out part of her premises to Noor at an annual rent of
$1965.

During the financial year ended 30 September 2021 Noor made the following payments to
Karishma by cheque.

$
1 October 2020 800
2 March 2021 825
8 August 2021 850

The amount received on 8 August 2021 included rent of $510 covering the period 1 October 2021
to 31 December 2021.

REQUIRED

(c) Prepare the rent receivable account for the year ended 30 September 2021. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 October 2021.

Karishma
Rent receivable account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[4]

(d) Identify the section of the statement of financial position at 30 September 2021 in which the
balance on the rent receivable account would appear.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over


18

5 The financial year of VL Sports Club ends on 31 December. The treasurer provided the following
information about receipts and payments for the year ended 31 December 2020.

Receipts $
Subscriptions 19 200
Competition receipts 7 300
Dinner dance ticket sales 6 500

Payments $
Competition prizes 4 100
Dinner dance costs 6 200
Equipment 12 000
General expenses 11 500

The treasurer also provided the following information.

1 January 2020 31 December 2020


$ $
Equipment at net book value 23 000 30 000
General expenses owing 400 500
Subscriptions in arrears 700 300
Subscriptions in advance 1 100 900

Of the subscriptions in arrears on 1 January 2020 an amount of $80 had not been paid by
31 December 2020 and is to be written off as irrecoverable.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance the
account and bring down the balances on 1 January 2021.

VL Sports Club
Subscriptions account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[8]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


19

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare the income and expenditure account for VL Sports Club for the year ended
31 December 2020.

VL Sports Club
Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December 2020

$ $

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....


[9]

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over


20

The treasurer of VL Sports Club wants to encourage more members to pay their subscriptions in
advance by offering a 10% reduction in annual subscription fees.

(c) Advise the treasurer whether or not VL Sports Club should offer this reduction in annual
subscription fees to members who pay in advance. Justify your answer with one advantage
and one disadvantage.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 20]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 17 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Social Science-Specific Marking Principles
(for point-based marking)

1 Components using point-based marking:


• Point marking is often used to reward knowledge, understanding and application of skills. We give credit where the candidate’s answer
shows relevant knowledge, understanding and application of skills in answering the question. We do not give credit where the answer
shows confusion.

From this it follows that we:

a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark
scheme requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)

2 Presentation of mark scheme:


• Slashes (/) or the word ‘or’ separate alternative ways of making the same point.
• Semi colons (;) bullet points (•) or figures in brackets (1) separate different points.
• Content in the answer column in brackets is for examiner information/context to clarify the marking but is not required to earn the mark
(except Accounting syllabuses where they indicate negative numbers).

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
3 Calculation questions:
• The mark scheme will show the steps in the most likely correct method(s), the mark for each step, the correct answer(s) and the mark
for each answer
• If working/explanation is considered essential for full credit, this will be indicated in the question paper and in the mark scheme. In all
other instances, the correct answer to a calculation should be given full credit, even if no supporting working is shown.
• Where the candidate uses a valid method which is not covered by the mark scheme, award equivalent marks for reaching equivalent
stages.
• Where an answer makes use of a candidate’s own incorrect figure from previous working, the ‘own figure rule’ applies: full marks will be
given if a correct and complete method is used. Further guidance will be included in the mark scheme where necessary and any
exceptions to this general principle will be noted.

4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners
who marked that paper.

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) $ 3
Payments to trade payables 257 700
Less Opening trade payables 32 600 (1)
225 100
Add Closing trade payables 29 600 (1)
Purchases 254 700 (1)

Accept alternative forms of presentation

1(b) Shiv 11
Income Statement for the year ended 31 August 2021

$ $
Revenue 320 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 23 500
Purchases 254 700 (1) OF
278 200
Closing inventory 22 200 (2) CF/(1) OF
256 000 (1) OF
Gross profit 64 000 (1)
Expenses (34 000 + 400 (1) – 900 (1)) 33 500
Provision for doubtful debts 777 (1)
Depreciation of equipment
(16 000 – 12 800) 3 200 (1)
37 477
Profit for the year 26 523 (1) OF

1(c) Business entity (1) 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(d) Inventory should be valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value (1) 5
Cost of sales would be understated (1)
The profit will be overstated/profit will not be shown at a realistic level (1)
The current assets/inventory will be overstated (1)
Prudence principle is not being observed (1)
Consistency principle is not being observed (1)
Comparison with previous years/competitors would not be accurate (1)
Accounting records must present a realistic view of the business (1)
Accept other valid points

Max (5)

Question Answer Marks

2(a) 4
Capital Revenue
expenditure expenditure

Building new extension to warehouse 

Rates on new extension  (1)

Carriage costs for roof tiles for new extension  (1)

Legal costs for new extension  (1)

Repairs to office roof  (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(b) 5
Rent warehouse Purchase warehouse

No initial outlay OR Has to raise an additional $200 000 (1)


in order to purchase

Little or no maintenance/repair cost OR Will be maintenance/repair (1)


costs/depreciation

The non-current asset is not owned OR Will own an additional non-current (1)
asset/gets fixed asset/owns a
warehouse

Loan must be repaid (1)

Will have to pay loan interest (1)

Warehouse may not be required if (1)


trade decreases in future

Premises may not be available on a long (1)


term basis

Rent may increase after 6 months (1)

Can vacate the premises after 6 months


(is flexible)

Max (2) Max (2)

Accept other valid points

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c) Jas 8
Fixtures account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d 115 000 Jun 30 Fixtures disposal (1) 20 000
Bank (1) 30 000 31 Balance c/d 125 000
145 000 145 000
2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 125 000

Provision for depreciation of fixtures account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Jun 30 Fixtures disposal (1) 11 250 Jan 1 Balance b/d 77 625
Dec 31 Balance c/d 96 750 Dec 31 Income statement
21 375 (1)
2 250 (1)
______ 6 750 (1) 30 375
108 000 108 000
2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 96 750

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(d) Jas 3
Fixtures disposal account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Jun 30 Fixtures 20 000 Jun 30 Prov. for Dep. (1)OF 11 250
Bank (1) 6 000
Dec 31 Income
______ statement (1)OF 2 750
20 000 20 000

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) Anil 12
Journal

Error Details Debit Credit


$ $

1 Suspense 7100
Sales 7100 (1)
(1)

2 Sales returns 520 (1)


Purchases 520 (1)
Suspense 1040 (2)
OR
Sales returns 520 (1)
Suspense 520 (1)
Purchases 520 (1)
Suspense 520 (1)

3 Bank charges 320 (1)


Suspense 320 (1)

4 Bank 1200
Suspense 600 (2)
Insurance 600 (1)
OR (1)
Bank 1200
Suspense 1200 (1)
Suspense 600 (1)
Insurance 600 (1)
(1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Anil 6
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

Sales (1) 7100 Difference on trial


balance 5140
Sales returns (1) 520
Purchases (1) 520
Bank charges (1) 320
____ Bank (1) 600
7100 7100

+(1) for matching totals OR for an own figure balance brought down

Alternative presentation if used alternative journal entry for error 4 in 3(a)

Date Details $ Date Details $

Sales (1) 7100 Difference on trial


Insurance (1) 600 balance 5140
Sales returns (1) 520
Purchases (1) 520
Bank charges (1) 320
____ Bank (1) 1200
7700 7700

3(c) Commission, compensating, complete reversal, omission, original entry, principle 2

Any 2 × 1 mark

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) Karishma 10
Insurance account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2021
Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 1700 Feb 28 Bank (1) 300
2021 Sep 30 Income statement
Feb 7 Bank } 3400 (1)OF 6200
Aug 13 Bank }(1) 3500 Balance c/d 2100
8600 8600
2021
Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 2100

Electricity account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Oct 14 Bank } 1800 Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 1800
2021 } 2021
Jan 24 Bank }(1) 1800 Sep 30 Income
May 26 Bank } 1800 statement (1)OF 5600
Sep 30 Balance c/d 2000 ____
7400 7400
2021
Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 2000

Dates (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(b) Advantages 5
Fixed monthly payment (1)
Payments would be made automatically (1)
More difficult to fall behind with payments (1)
Cheaper than existing contract (1)
Helps with planning expenditure (1)
Accept other valid points

Max (2)

Disadvantages
Would lose control of her payment schedule/ would not be able to pick and choose when to make the payments (1)
Bank charges might increase (1)
Tied to two-year contract (1)
Need to consider reliability of new supplier (1)
Possible price increase after two years (1)
Accept other valid points

Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(c) Karishma 4
Rent receivable account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2021 2020
Sep 30 Income Oct 1 Bank } 800
statement (1)OF 1965 2021 }
Balance c/d 510 Mar 2 Bank }(1) 825
____ Aug 8 Bank } 850
2475 2475
2021
Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 510

Dates (1)

4(d) Current liabilities 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) VL Sports Club 8


Subscriptions account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 700 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 1 100
Dec 31 Income and Dec 31 Bank (1) 19 200
expenditure (1)OF 19 080 Irrecoverable debts(1) 80
Balance c/d 900 Balance c/d 300
20 680 20 680
2021 2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 300 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 900

Dates (1)

5(b) VL Sports Club 9


Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December 2020

$ $
Income
Subscriptions 19 080 (1)OF
Competition receipts 7 300
cost of prizes 4 100 3 200 (1)
Dinner dance ticket sales 6 500
costs 6 200 300 (1)
22 580
Expenditure
General expenses
(11 500 – 400(1) + 500(1)) 11 600
Irrecoverable debt 80 (1)
Depreciation of equipment
(23 000 + 12 000 – 30 000) 5 000 (1) 16 680
Surplus for the year 5 900 (2)CF/(1)OF

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 17


0452/21 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(c) Advantages 3
Cash received earlier (1)
Reduced risk of irrecoverable subscriptions/reduced risk of subscriptions in arrears (1)
Reduction in administration costs (1)
May encourage new members to join (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Disadvantages
Less cash received (1)
Possible reduction in membership (1)
Difficulty of monitoring varying subscription rates (1)
Reduces the surplus for the year (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 17


Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 5 9 7 7 4 4 2 2 0 *

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.

This document has 20 pages.

DC (DH) 203494/3
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2

1 Shiv is a trader. His financial year ends on 31 August. He does not maintain a full set of accounting
records but was able to provide the following information for the year ended 31 August 2021.

Total revenue $320 000


Mark-up 25%

Bank account summary for the year ended 31 August 2021

$ $
Balance b/d 49 000 Expenses 34 000
Cash sales 3 700 Drawings 4 200
Receipts from trade receivables 312 400 Payments to trade payables 257 700
Equipment 16 000
Balance c/d 53 200
365 100 365 100

Assets and liabilities

1 September 2020 31 August 2021


$ $
Inventory at cost 23 500 ?
Trade receivables 22 000 25 900
Expenses owing – 400
Trade payables 32 600 29 600
Equipment at net book value – 12 800
Premises at cost 90 000 90 000

Shiv had withdrawn $900 for a family holiday during the year. He had included this in the expenses.

On 31 August 2021 Shiv decided to create a provision for doubtful debts of 3% of trade receivables.

REQUIRED

(a) Calculate the purchases for the year ended 31 August 2021.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


3

(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 August 2021. The inventory on
31 August 2021 should be clearly shown within the statement.

Shiv
Income Statement for the year ended 31 August 2021

$ $

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....

........................................................................................ …………….... ……………....


[11]

(c) Name the accounting principle Shiv should apply when recording the $900 he had used for a
family holiday.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over


4

Shiv has always valued his inventory at cost price. He is considering valuing the inventory on
31 August 2021 at selling price as he believes it would result in a higher profit for the year.

REQUIRED

(d) Discuss the implications of Shiv valuing the inventory on 31 August 2021 at selling price.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


5

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over


6

2 Jas owns a printing business and has recently incurred various expenditures relating to her
premises.

REQUIRED

(a) Complete the table by inserting a tick (3) to show how each item of expenditure should be
classified. The first one has been completed as an example.

Capital Revenue
expenditure expenditure

Building new extension to warehouse 3

Rates on new extension

Carriage costs for roof tiles for new extension

Legal costs for new extension

Repairs to office roof

[4]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


7

Jas’s business is expanding rapidly and she needs more warehousing space.

Jas can rent an additional warehouse. The rent for the first six months would be $40 000.

Alternatively, Jas can purchase a warehouse for $900 000. She can obtain a long-term loan of
$700 000.

REQUIRED

(b) Advise Jas whether she should rent or purchase a warehouse. Justify your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over


8

An extract from Jas’s statement of financial position at 31 December 2019 showed the following:

Cost Accumulated Net book


depreciation value
$ $ $
Fixtures 115 000 77 625 37 375

During the year ended 31 December 2020 the following transactions took place.

On 1 January 2020 fixtures, $30 000, were purchased by cheque.

On 30 June 2020 fixtures were sold for $6000, which was received by cheque. These fixtures had
originally been purchased on 1 January 2018 for $20 000.

Jas depreciates fixtures on a straight-line basis. She assumes fixtures will have a useful life of four
years, at which time the residual value will be 10% of original cost. Depreciation is charged for
each part of the year for which the fixtures are owned.

REQUIRED

(c) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance each account
and bring down the balance on 1 January 2021.

Jas
Fixtures account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d 115 000 ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


9

Provision for depreciation of fixtures account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020
............... ..................................... ............... Jan 1 Balance b/d 77 625

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[8]

(d) Prepare the fixtures disposal account for the year ended 31 December 2020.

Jas
Fixtures disposal account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[3]

Workings:

[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over
10

3 Anil is a trader. The totals of the trial balance he prepared on 31 December 2020 did not agree.
The debits exceeded the credits by $5140.

The following errors were later discovered.

1 The sales account had been undercast by $7100.

2 Sales returns of $520 had been posted as a credit to the purchases account. The correct
entry had been made in the customer’s account.

3 Bank charges of $320 had been correctly entered in the cash book, but had not been entered
in the bank charges account.

4 A cheque refund of $600 for insurance overpaid had been entered on the wrong side of the
bank account and no entry had been made in the insurance account.

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


11

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare journal entries to correct errors 1 to 4. Narratives are not required.

Anil
Journal

Error Details Debit Credit


number $ $

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

............... ................................................................................ ................... ...................

[12]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over


12

(b) Complete the suspense account.

Anil
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

........... .......................................... .............. ........... Difference on trial balance 5140

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

........... .......................................... .............. ........... .......................................... ..............

[6]

(c) Name two types of error not disclosed by a trial balance.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


13

PLEASE TURN OVER

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over


14

4 Karishma runs her own business. The balances in her books on 1 October 2020 included the
following.
$
Insurance account 1700 prepaid
Electricity account 1800 owing

During the financial year ended 30 September 2021 Karishma made the following payments by
cheque.

Insurance payments
$
7 February 2021 3400
13 August 2021 3500

Electricity payments
$
14 October 2020 1800
24 January 2021 1800
26 May 2021 1800

A refund of $300 for insurance overpaid was received by bank transfer on 28 February 2021. The
insurance paid on 13 August 2021 covered a period of five months to 31 December 2021.

At 30 September 2021, an amount of $2000 was owing for electricity.

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


15

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 September 2021. Balance the accounts
and bring down the balances on 1 October 2021.

Karishma
Insurance account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

Electricity account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[10]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over


16

Karishma is considering changing her electricity supplier. The new supplier has offered Karishma
a two-year contract at a fixed monthly amount of $450 payable by direct debit.

REQUIRED

(b) Advise Karishma whether she should change to the new electricity supplier. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages of changing supplier.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


17

On 1 October 2020 Karishma decided to rent out part of her premises to Noor at an annual rent of
$1965.

During the financial year ended 30 September 2021 Noor made the following payments to
Karishma by cheque.

$
1 October 2020 800
2 March 2021 825
8 August 2021 850

The amount received on 8 August 2021 included rent of $510 covering the period 1 October 2021
to 31 December 2021.

REQUIRED

(c) Prepare the rent receivable account for the year ended 30 September 2021. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 October 2021.

Karishma
Rent receivable account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[4]

(d) Identify the section of the statement of financial position at 30 September 2021 in which the
balance on the rent receivable account would appear.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over


18

5 The financial year of VL Sports Club ends on 31 December. The treasurer provided the following
information about receipts and payments for the year ended 31 December 2020.

Receipts $
Subscriptions 19 200
Competition receipts 7 300
Dinner dance ticket sales 6 500

Payments $
Competition prizes 4 100
Dinner dance costs 6 200
Equipment 12 000
General expenses 11 500

The treasurer also provided the following information.

1 January 2020 31 December 2020


$ $
Equipment at net book value 23 000 30 000
General expenses owing 400 500
Subscriptions in arrears 700 300
Subscriptions in advance 1 100 900

Of the subscriptions in arrears on 1 January 2020 an amount of $80 had not been paid by
31 December 2020 and is to be written off as irrecoverable.

REQUIRED

(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance the
account and bring down the balances on 1 January 2021.

VL Sports Club
Subscriptions account

Date Details $ Date Details $

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

............... ..................................... ............... ............... ..................................... ...............

[8]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


19

REQUIRED

(b) Prepare the income and expenditure account for VL Sports Club for the year ended
31 December 2020.

VL Sports Club
Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December 2020

$ $

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....

............................................................................................... …………….... ……………....


[9]

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over


20

The treasurer of VL Sports Club wants to encourage more members to pay their subscriptions in
advance by offering a 10% reduction in annual subscription fees.

(c) Advise the treasurer whether or not VL Sports Club should offer this reduction in annual
subscription fees to members who pay in advance. Justify your answer with one advantage
and one disadvantage.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 20]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21


Cambridge IGCSE™

ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 17 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Social Science-Specific Marking Principles
(for point-based marking)

1 Components using point-based marking:


• Point marking is often used to reward knowledge, understanding and application of skills. We give credit where the candidate’s answer
shows relevant knowledge, understanding and application of skills in answering the question. We do not give credit where the answer
shows confusion.

From this it follows that we:

a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark
scheme requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)

2 Presentation of mark scheme:


• Slashes (/) or the word ‘or’ separate alternative ways of making the same point.
• Semi colons (;) bullet points (•) or figures in brackets (1) separate different points.
• Content in the answer column in brackets is for examiner information/context to clarify the marking but is not required to earn the mark
(except Accounting syllabuses where they indicate negative numbers).

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
3 Calculation questions:
• The mark scheme will show the steps in the most likely correct method(s), the mark for each step, the correct answer(s) and the mark
for each answer
• If working/explanation is considered essential for full credit, this will be indicated in the question paper and in the mark scheme. In all
other instances, the correct answer to a calculation should be given full credit, even if no supporting working is shown.
• Where the candidate uses a valid method which is not covered by the mark scheme, award equivalent marks for reaching equivalent
stages.
• Where an answer makes use of a candidate’s own incorrect figure from previous working, the ‘own figure rule’ applies: full marks will be
given if a correct and complete method is used. Further guidance will be included in the mark scheme where necessary and any
exceptions to this general principle will be noted.

4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners
who marked that paper.

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) $ 3
Payments to trade payables 257 700
Less Opening trade payables 32 600 (1)
225 100
Add Closing trade payables 29 600 (1)
Purchases 254 700 (1)

Accept alternative forms of presentation

1(b) Shiv 11
Income Statement for the year ended 31 August 2021

$ $
Revenue 320 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 23 500
Purchases 254 700 (1) OF
278 200
Closing inventory 22 200 (2) CF/(1) OF
256 000 (1) OF
Gross profit 64 000 (1)
Expenses (34 000 + 400 (1) – 900 (1)) 33 500
Provision for doubtful debts 777 (1)
Depreciation of equipment
(16 000 – 12 800) 3 200 (1)
37 477
Profit for the year 26 523 (1) OF

1(c) Business entity (1) 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(d) Inventory should be valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value (1) 5
Cost of sales would be understated (1)
The profit will be overstated/profit will not be shown at a realistic level (1)
The current assets/inventory will be overstated (1)
Prudence principle is not being observed (1)
Consistency principle is not being observed (1)
Comparison with previous years/competitors would not be accurate (1)
Accounting records must present a realistic view of the business (1)
Accept other valid points

Max (5)

Question Answer Marks

2(a) 4
Capital Revenue
expenditure expenditure

Building new extension to warehouse 

Rates on new extension  (1)

Carriage costs for roof tiles for new extension  (1)

Legal costs for new extension  (1)

Repairs to office roof  (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(b) 5
Rent warehouse Purchase warehouse

No initial outlay OR Has to raise an additional $200 000 (1)


in order to purchase

Little or no maintenance/repair cost OR Will be maintenance/repair (1)


costs/depreciation

The non-current asset is not owned OR Will own an additional non-current (1)
asset/gets fixed asset/owns a
warehouse

Loan must be repaid (1)

Will have to pay loan interest (1)

Warehouse may not be required if (1)


trade decreases in future

Premises may not be available on a long (1)


term basis

Rent may increase after 6 months (1)

Can vacate the premises after 6 months


(is flexible)

Max (2) Max (2)

Accept other valid points

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(c) Jas 8
Fixtures account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d 115 000 Jun 30 Fixtures disposal (1) 20 000
Bank (1) 30 000 31 Balance c/d 125 000
145 000 145 000
2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 125 000

Provision for depreciation of fixtures account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Jun 30 Fixtures disposal (1) 11 250 Jan 1 Balance b/d 77 625
Dec 31 Balance c/d 96 750 Dec 31 Income statement
21 375 (1)
2 250 (1)
______ 6 750 (1) 30 375
108 000 108 000
2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 96 750

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2(d) Jas 3
Fixtures disposal account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Jun 30 Fixtures 20 000 Jun 30 Prov. for Dep. (1)OF 11 250
Bank (1) 6 000
Dec 31 Income
______ statement (1)OF 2 750
20 000 20 000

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) Anil 12
Journal

Error Details Debit Credit


$ $

1 Suspense 7100
Sales 7100 (1)
(1)

2 Sales returns 520 (1)


Purchases 520 (1)
Suspense 1040 (2)
OR
Sales returns 520 (1)
Suspense 520 (1)
Purchases 520 (1)
Suspense 520 (1)

3 Bank charges 320 (1)


Suspense 320 (1)

4 Bank 1200
Suspense 600 (2)
Insurance 600 (1)
OR (1)
Bank 1200
Suspense 1200 (1)
Suspense 600 (1)
Insurance 600 (1)
(1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(b) Anil 6
Suspense account

Date Details $ Date Details $

Sales (1) 7100 Difference on trial


balance 5140
Sales returns (1) 520
Purchases (1) 520
Bank charges (1) 320
____ Bank (1) 600
7100 7100

+(1) for matching totals OR for an own figure balance brought down

Alternative presentation if used alternative journal entry for error 4 in 3(a)

Date Details $ Date Details $

Sales (1) 7100 Difference on trial


Insurance (1) 600 balance 5140
Sales returns (1) 520
Purchases (1) 520
Bank charges (1) 320
____ Bank (1) 1200
7700 7700

3(c) Commission, compensating, complete reversal, omission, original entry, principle 2

Any 2 × 1 mark

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) Karishma 10
Insurance account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2021
Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 1700 Feb 28 Bank (1) 300
2021 Sep 30 Income statement
Feb 7 Bank } 3400 (1)OF 6200
Aug 13 Bank }(1) 3500 Balance c/d 2100
8600 8600
2021
Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 2100

Electricity account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Oct 14 Bank } 1800 Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 1800
2021 } 2021
Jan 24 Bank }(1) 1800 Sep 30 Income
May 26 Bank } 1800 statement (1)OF 5600
Sep 30 Balance c/d 2000 ____
7400 7400
2021
Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 2000

Dates (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(b) Advantages 5
Fixed monthly payment (1)
Payments would be made automatically (1)
More difficult to fall behind with payments (1)
Cheaper than existing contract (1)
Helps with planning expenditure (1)
Accept other valid points

Max (2)

Disadvantages
Would lose control of her payment schedule/ would not be able to pick and choose when to make the payments (1)
Bank charges might increase (1)
Tied to two-year contract (1)
Need to consider reliability of new supplier (1)
Possible price increase after two years (1)
Accept other valid points

Max (2)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(c) Karishma 4
Rent receivable account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2021 2020
Sep 30 Income Oct 1 Bank } 800
statement (1)OF 1965 2021 }
Balance c/d 510 Mar 2 Bank }(1) 825
____ Aug 8 Bank } 850
2475 2475
2021
Oct 1 Balance b/d (1) 510

Dates (1)

4(d) Current liabilities 1

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) VL Sports Club 8


Subscriptions account

Date Details $ Date Details $


2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 700 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 1 100
Dec 31 Income and Dec 31 Bank (1) 19 200
expenditure (1)OF 19 080 Irrecoverable debts(1) 80
Balance c/d 900 Balance c/d 300
20 680 20 680
2021 2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 300 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 900

Dates (1)

5(b) VL Sports Club 9


Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December 2020

$ $
Income
Subscriptions 19 080 (1)OF
Competition receipts 7 300
cost of prizes 4 100 3 200 (1)
Dinner dance ticket sales 6 500
costs 6 200 300 (1)
22 580
Expenditure
General expenses
(11 500 – 400(1) + 500(1)) 11 600
Irrecoverable debt 80 (1)
Depreciation of equipment
(23 000 + 12 000 – 30 000) 5 000 (1) 16 680
Surplus for the year 5 900 (2)CF/(1)OF

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 17


0452/23 Cambridge IGCSE – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(c) Advantages 3
Cash received earlier (1)
Reduced risk of irrecoverable subscriptions/reduced risk of subscriptions in arrears (1)
Reduction in administration costs (1)
May encourage new members to join (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Disadvantages
Less cash received (1)
Possible reduction in membership (1)
Difficulty of monitoring varying subscription rates (1)
Reduces the surplus for the year (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)

Recommendation (1)

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 17

You might also like